Sage 100 Contractor Version 19.6 Product Overview

Sage 100 Contractor Version 19.6 Product Overview
Sage 100 Contractor 2014
(formerly Sage Master Builder)
Product Overview
United States Edition
Version 19.6
This is a publication of Sage Software, Inc.
Copyright © 2015. Sage Software, Inc. All rights reserved.
Sage, the Sage logos, and the Sage product and service names mentioned herein are registered trademarks or
trademarks of Sage Software, Inc. or its affiliated entities. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
Microsoft ®SQL Server®, Windows Vista® and the Windows logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or in other countries.
Your use of this document and the Sage product(s) described herein is governed by the terms and conditions of the
Sage End User License Agreement ("EULA") or other agreement that is provided with or included in the Sage product.
Nothing in this document supplements, modifies or amends those terms and conditions. Except as expressly stated in
those terms and conditions, the information in this document is provided by Sage "AS IS" and Sage disclaims all
express, implied or statutory warranties of any kind, including but not limited to the warranties of merchantability,
fitness for a particular purpose or of non-infringement. No implied license is granted to you under any Sage intellectual
property or trade secret right. Sage reserves the right to revise, supplement or remove information in this document at
any time without notice to you or others.
Sage End User License: http://na.sage.com/sage-na/eula
Last updated: May 27, 2015
Contents
Chapter 1: Welcome to Sage 100 Contractor
1
Sage 100 Contractor—A better way to run your business
1
Sage 100 Contractor Printed and Printable Documentation
1
Printing Sage 100 Contractor Documentation
2
Sage 100 Contractor In-product Help
2
Customer Support and resources
3
Training resources
6
Business partners
6
The Users Group
6
Business forms
7
Sage 100 Contractor Add-on Modules
7
About Sage 100 Contractor Intelligence Reporting
9
Document Conventions and Notes
Chapter 2: Companies, Security, and Users
10
13
Working with Utilities
13
License Administration Tool
13
Security Groups and Users
14
Chapter 3: General Ledger
21
Chapter 1: General Ledger
21
Ledger and Subsidiary Accounts
21
Company Departments
28
Checks and Bank Charges
29
Deposits and Interest
30
Chapter 4: Accounts Receivable
45
Working with Accounts Receivable
45
Invoices, Credits, and Statements
45
Cash Receipts and Electronic Receipts
55
Jobs
59
Receivable Clients
62
Product Overview iii
Contents
Progress Billing
64
Loan Draw Requests
64
Unitary Billing
65
Time and Materials
65
Recurring Receivables
66
Chapter 5: Accounts Payable
69
Working with Accounts Payable
69
Payable Invoices/Credits
70
Work in Progress and Percentage Complete Accounting
72
Vendor Payments
73
Vendors (Accounts Payable)
79
Chapter 6: Payroll
93
Working with Payroll
93
Employees
94
Payroll Records
96
Compute Payroll
102
Direct Deposit
103
Posting Payroll to the General Ledger
104
Payroll Calculations
105
Workers' Compensation
118
Employee Positions
119
Paygroups
119
Local Payroll Tax
120
Federal and state Filing
121
Chapter 7: Project Management
125
Working with Project Management
125
Project Work Center
126
Budgets
129
Job Costs
130
Change Orders
131
Cost Codes and Divisions
136
iv Sage 100 Contractor
Contents
Purchase Orders
138
Subcontracts
139
Job-Complete Tracking
140
Proposals
141
Unitary Proposals
142
Document Control
142
7-8 Contact Manager
148
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
149
Working with Review and Reporting
149
Selecting and Creating Reports
149
Dashboard Reports
155
Form/Report Page Design
166
Using Report Writer
174
Report Printing
175
Report Scheduling
177
Exporting Data to Microsoft Excel
183
Financial Review
185
Project Review
190
Index
193
Product Overview v
Chapter 1: Welcome to Sage 100
Contractor
Sage 100 Contractor—A better way to run your business
Welcome to Sage 100 Contractor. Sage 100 Contractor is an integrated, construction-specific, estimating,
accounting, and project management software solution. Whether you are a general contractor, a
subcontractor, or service contractor, Sage 100 Contractor manages your business using one system.
Sage 100 Contractor provides many features that are beneficial for customers with complex environments
that may include remote connections, many simultaneous users, and/or multiple companies.
Sage 100 Contractor Printed and Printable Documentation
Sage 100 Contractor and Your Business
Sage 100 Contractor and Your Business provides basic information about key relationships in your business
and how they interact with Sage 100 Contractor. This book also explores Sage 100 Contractor’s underlying
concepts for working with general ledger, accounts payable, accounts receivable, and more. In addition, you
will find detailed information about Sage 100 Contractor general operational features, accounting, analysis,
payroll, accounts receivable, accounts payable, and more.
Sage 100 Contractor Installation and License Administration Guide
The Sage 100 Contractor Installation and License Administration Guide provides explicit information about
how to install Sage 100 Contractor and set up the software in your specific environment. It also provides
information on how to set up and administer licensing. This guide is a “must read” for all systems
administrators and business owners.
Sage 100 Contractor Product Overview
Sage 100 Contractor Product Overview provides background information to help you understand the core
functionality of Sage 100 Contractor and how to use it to manage your business. If you are new to Sage 100
Contractor, we highly recommend that you read the specific background information about the tasks that you
will perform. If you are a company owner or administrator, we recommend that you read all the information in
this guide.
Sage 100 Contractor User Guide
The Sage 100 Contractor User Guide is a printable-PDF version of the Sage 100 Contractor Help. You will find
that the Sage 100 Contractor User Guide is the most comprehensive yet. It provides extensive explanation of
Sage 100 Contractor functions and tools as well as hundreds of procedures for completing tasks.
Product Overview 1
Chapter 1: Welcome to Sage 100 Contractor
Sage 100 Contractor Release Notes
The Release Notes document provides information about enhancements and previously reported issues in the
software that have been resolved for the current release.
It also provides, where applicable, information and comments about recently discovered issues that have not
yet been resolved before the latest software release.
Printing Sage 100 Contractor Documentation
Links to the printable documentation are located under the Home & Resources tab > Printable
Documentation menu on the Sage 100 Contractor main window.
IMPORTANT: You must have the Adobe®Reader® installed on your computer to view and print Sage
100 Contractor guides. To download this free software for viewing and printing documents in PDF
format, visit
http://get.adobe.com/reader/
To print a Sage 100 Contractor printable document:
1 On the main window, click Home & Resources tab > Printable Documentation.
2 From the menu list, select the printable document you want to open. Adobe Reader opens and loads the
guide.
3 From the File menu, click Print.
4 To print a section of pages, from the Adobe Reader Print window, select Print Range > Pages from, and
type a range of pages.
Sage 100 Contractor In-product Help
Using Help
The in-product Help system is integrated with Sage 100 Contractor and accessible from the Help menu. On
the Help menu, you can click Contents and Index, About This Window F1, and Quick Links Shift+F1.
Contents and Index opens the Help system to the main page. From this Help window, you have access to
the entire Help system.
When you are on a Sage 100 Contractor window, clicking About This Window or pressing the F1 key
launches a Help window that provides information about the currently active Sage 100 Contractor window.
Clicking Quick Links or pressing Shift+F1 opens a Help window that provides a list of topics directly related
to the currently active window.
About the Help navigation
The window opens automatically with the left-hand navigation pane in view displaying three tabs.
2 Sage 100 Contractor
Customer Support and resources
Tab
Navigation/Search Option
Contents
A table of contents displays a list of headings and subheadings with lists of all the topics in the
Help.
Index
The index displays subjects by keywords and sub-keywords.
Search
By typing in a keyword and clicking List Topics, the system searches all Help topics for the
entered words.
Button
Action
Back
Opens the topic viewed previously.
Forward
Opens the next topic in a previously viewed sequence.
Home
Loads the Help title page.
Customer response system for Help topics
To improve our in-product Help documentation, we are soliciting a response based on your experience using
the Help topics. We want to know, “Did this topic help you?” We will review your comments and consider
them when making changes to our documentation.
When you respond, your responses are sent via the Internet to our Web-based collection system. Please
understand that when you respond, no personally identifiable information is collected. We cannot respond to
customers individually.
NOTE: The Web pages connected to the customer response system for in-product Help topics appear
only if you are logged on to or have access to the Internet.
Customer Support and resources
IMPORTANT: Before you contact the Customer Support Call Center, take advantage of the following
resources, which are available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Sage 100 Contractor Help
From anywhere in the Sage 100 Contractor software, you can display this comprehensive library of
accessible topics to learn more about specific procedures, topics, fields, or buttons.
Product documentation
The software comes with several PDF guides, including Release Notes, Installation and License
Administration Guide, and User Guide, among others.
Product Overview 3
Chapter 1: Welcome to Sage 100 Contractor
To view the guides, click Home & Resources tab > Product Documentation or, if you have Activity
Centers hidden, click Resources > Printable Documentation.
Sage Knowledgebase
Depending on your Sage service plan, we offer a web-based Sage Knowledgebase and online user
community forums at www.na.sage.com or through the in-product menu. Our staff maintains an extensive
knowledge database of questions and answers covering everything from frequently asked questions to more
complex problems and solutions. In addition, we keep all product reference documentation available in the
Knowledgebase. This online tool is the same tool we use in our customer support call center to help answer
your call.
To log in to the Sage Knowledgebase:
1. Go to https://support.na.sage.com/.
2. In the upper-right section of the page, above the Search, click Login.
3. Enter your Customer Portal Username and Password.
4. Click Log on.
Contacting Customer Support
Depending on your Sage service plan, you may be able to contact the Sage Customer Support Call Center to
work with one of our highly trained customer support professionals. The Knowledgebase article How do I get
technical support for Sage 100 Contractor? provides contact information and hours of operation, and it can
help you to determine which service works best for you.
Our analysts work with you to respond accordingly to the urgency of your issue.
Call urgency can range from a simple explanation of software settings to critical situations in which work is
stopped or data integrity is compromised. Some calls may warrant further research and followup, in which
case our support analyst will place your call in his/her in-progress work list. At every step of the way, we work
with you until we reach a resolution or agreement.
Depending on your Sage service plan, you may check the status or update, or even create a new support
ticket online:
1. Visit www.na.sage.com.
2. In the upper-right section of the page, above the Search, click Login.
3. Enter your Customer Portal Username and Password.
4. Click Log on.
5. On the right, select Submit a customer support case.
Before you call customer support
Be sure to have the following information on hand so we can handle your call efficiently.
4 Sage 100 Contractor
Customer Support and resources
Question
How to Find the Answer
What is your Sage client
ID number?
Your client ID number can be found on correspondence you receive from
Sage. If you do not know your Sage client ID, contact the person at your
company who maintains your relationship with Sage.
What software version
are you using?
To find the version, open Sage 100 Contractor; click Help > About
Sage 100 Contractor and note the number listed.
What application or area
in the software are you
calling about?
On the menu list, identify the application and window where are you
are working (i.e. Selecting Invoices to Pay in 4-3-1, Accounts Payable
Vendor Payments).
How can we help you?
Walk through the exact steps you completed with as much detail and
accuracy as possible.
Is there an error message?
Write down the exact wording of the message.
Can you reproduce the
issue?
Were you able to walk through the same steps that led to the problem
and see whether it happened again?
Is this the first time the
problem has happened?
Does the problem occur
on one workstation or several?
Ask other users if they have experienced the same problem. Have
them test at their workstation to see if they experience the same problem. Also, have the original user try other workstations to see whether
the problem is specific to that user.
Has anything changed
with your software, hardware, or workflow?
Ask your network administrator for technical information regarding anything that may have changed behind the scenes: upgrades to Sage
100 Contractor, new third-party software installations, moving of data
from one server to another, new printers or print driver installation, or
anything else that might affect the network.
Does the problem happen in the sample data
sets?
Select [File> Open Company], then change the drive letter on the
dropdown to C:, select Sample Company.
What kind of network are
you using?
If you do not know, contact your network administrator.
What operating system is For Vista: Click [Start], type winver in the ‘start search’ window and click
[OK].
on your computer?
What printers and print
drivers are installed?
If you do not know, contact your network administrator.
When was your last
backup?
If you do not know, contact your network administrator.
Product Overview 5
Chapter 1: Welcome to Sage 100 Contractor
Training resources
When you choose to take online classes from Sage or work with a Sage business partner, you will learn how
to use Sage 100 Contractor to support your business. Contact your business partner to find out about training
options or visit Sage University at http://www.sageu.com.
Online classes
Online classes help you maximize your use of Sage 100 Contractor. Online classes are a convenient training
option for your company and new users to learn more about Sage 100 Contractor so you can get the most out
of the software. You can select from classes on all aspects of Sage 100 Contractor, including project
management, estimating, scheduling, service management and payroll. Each online class is led by an
instructor with years of experience using Sage 100 Contractor. During the class, you will be able to follow
along as the instructor demonstrates functions and workflows in Sage 100 Contractor. In the online live
session, you can ask questions and benefit from hearing answers to other students' questions.
For more information, visit http://www.sageu.com.
Getting started as a new user
We recommend that all new users should begin with our New Customer Training (NCT) series, which is
included in our Essentials Training Package in recorded format for 24/7 access. If you prefer live online
training led by an instructor, you can register for the Realtime Learning version of these NCT courses. For
more information, visit http://www.sageu.com.
Business partners
To serve you better, Sage 100 Contractor products and services are available to you through an authorized
network of business partners. Business partners have local expertise and regional knowledge working with
contractors in the region.
Your business partner is available to serve you, from simple how-to questions and hands-on demonstrations,
to installation, implementation, and training. They're fully equipped to help you get where you want to be. For
more information, contact your Sage 100 Contractor business partner.
The Users Group
TUG, The Users Group for Sage 300 Construction and Real Estate, Sage 100 Contractor, and Sage
Estimating is a not-for-profit, professional organization committed to supporting the users of Sage 100
Contractor and other Sage construction software.
You can find out more about the group, their services, and how to become a member at http://tugweb.siteym.com/default.asp?.
6 Sage 100 Contractor
Business forms
Business forms
Sage 100 Contractor is designed to work with generic checks and forms that are available from many
sources. There is no single vendor that customers must use; however, you can get a complete portfolio of
forms, tax forms, and checks through Sage Construction and Real Estate Forms by calling 800-760-7929 or
by visiting www.sagecreforms.biz.
Sage 100 Contractor Add-on Modules
There are currently five add-on modules for use with Sage 100 Contractor: “Estimating,” "Equipment,"
"Document Control," "Inventory," and the combined “Service Receivables/Inventory.”
Estimating
The Sage 100 Contractor Estimating Basic module allows you to stay on top of the estimating process from
start to finish thanks to multiple takeoff options, industry-specific pricing databases, and integration with Sage
100 Contractor accounting modules. By automating and streamlining your estimating processes, you'll ensure
that every detail is accounted for and your cost projections are accurate.
Global variables, formulas, and templates make your estimating process easier and more accurate. You can
selectively factor in cost increases, lock prices to prevent accidental edits, and add notes for clarity. Windows
functionality (such as cut, copy, and paste) allows you to import blocks of information from other estimates
with just a few clicks of the mouse. All grids are Microsoft® Excel® compatible —you will not have to learn a
new interface if you have been using spreadsheets. After the takeoff is complete, you can generate the
budget, the proposal, requests for proposals, purchase orders, and subcontracts. You can even email them
directly to your subs and suppliers without printing them out.
With the data import feature, you can import a parts list or update prices directly from your suppliers. The
simple assembly tools help you build new assemblies without leaving your takeoff (available in 9-5 Takeoffs).
With just a few mouse clicks, you can copy, adjust, or create assemblies from scratch.
For more information on the Estimating add-on module, visit http://na.sage.com/sage-100contractor/modules/estimating.
You can also step up to the next level with Sage Estimating Standard and Extended versions, powered by
trade-specific cost databases, enabling you to turbo-charge takeoffs and final proposals. Input your own costs
into a pre-built database or choose a database pre-populated with costs. For more information about Sage
Estimating, visit http://na.sage.com/sage-estimating.
Equipment
Build your bottom line by better managing equipment. Track and charge all equipment costs directly to your
jobs, helping your company recoup these outlays. Sage 100 Contractor equipment management includes:
Job allocation capabilities. Improve job cost data—and job profitability analysis—by allocating
equipment costs to specific jobs.
Product Overview 7
Chapter 1: Welcome to Sage 100 Contractor
Maintenance reports. Take advantage of down time and optimize your schedule with up-to-the-minute
equipment maintenance schedule reports.
Financial information. Make more informed decisions by analyzing depreciation information with
automatically created reports and disbursements.
Analysis reports. Use cost, maintenance, and revenue records to quickly determine equipment
profitability.
Rent, lease, or buy analysis. Compare ownership, lease, or rental options to make the right equipment
decisions for your company.
Cost recovery analysis. Determine the optimal cost recovery rate for each piece of equipment.
For more information on the Equipment add-on module, visit http://na.sage.com/sage-100contractor/modules/service-management .
Document Control
Complete project documentation with all the forms you need. Avoid disputes and communicate effectively
with employees, customers, and subcontractors with Sage 100 Contractor document control capabilities.
Create and track responses to critical project documents such as:
Requests for Information (RFIs). Document your requests and match to information received.
Transmittals and submittals. Track all correspondence and replies.
Plan records. Maintain plan revisions and document the delivery of critical reports to all parties.
Daily field reports. Generate a complete diary of job site information including payroll, subcontract, units
complete, equipment use, meetings, incidents, and more.
Punch lists. Effectively and completely close each phase of every job with up-to-the-minute to-do lists,
including who is assigned to the work and who is responsible for payment.
For more information on the Document Control add-on module, visit http://na.sage.com/sage-100contractor/modules/project-management.
Inventory
Keeping track of inventory items is easy with integrated estimating, purchase orders, accounts payable, jobcosting, and service work orders. Whether you need to track inventory for a central warehouse or for a number
of locations and service trucks, Sage 100 Contractor Inventory can handle it.
Inventory also can manage both basic stock and serialized items for all locations, bin numbers, Materials
Safety Data Numbers (MSDN), manufacturer identification, and multiple vendors with different order numbers
for the same part.
Truck restocking can be run from the work orders completed each day so that your warehouse staff can
restock trucks at night after your service technicians bring them in.
You can move inventory in Sage 100 Contractor from one location to another, apply inventory to a job, re-price
inventory, post shrinkage, or create finished goods inventory from stock items and labor. A template feature
can save repetitive transactions for future use.
8 Sage 100 Contractor
About Sage 100 Contractor Intelligence Reporting
Resource reports from service work orders let you see which items will be needed in the future, making the
ordering easy. And since Estimating integrates into Inventory, your estimators will always know if items are in
stock and what your latest price is for any item.
Service Receivables and Inventory
Service Receivables include service contracts, service routes, service dispatch, on-call work orders, quotes,
point-of-sale and billing-of-service work and materials. This option is integrated with the Inventory module for
automatic decrementing of inventory from work orders. You can maintain your service truck inventory with
parts assigned to truck or warehouse inventory.
Service dispatch is displayed in 15-minute, hourly or daily increments. Work orders are displayed with userdefinable color codes showing client, priority, and zip code. You can review information about equipment
installed at the client’s site. Items can be billed individually or as part of an assembly. The flat-rate billing
option allows you to create and print your own price book for technicians to use. The same parts and
assemblies databases are used for estimating and for service, making it easy to keep your entire system
updated.
Service Receivables seamlessly integrates with payroll to eliminate the need for duplicate entry of labor
hours.
For more information on the Service Receivables and Inventory add-on module, visit
http://na.sage.com/sage-100-contractor/modules/service-management.
About Sage 100 Contractor Intelligence Reporting
Sage 100 Contractor integrates with Sage Intelligence Reporting, a Microsoft Excel-based business
intelligence reporting tool designed to help you to make timely, informed decisions for your business, while
reducing spreadsheet chaos.
NOTE: Sage 100 Contractor version 19.6 will integrate with Sage 100 Contractor Intelligence Reporting
when it is released in June, 2015.
You use Sage Intelligence Reporting to create financial reports and analyze Sage 100 Contractor data using
the familiar Microsoft Excel application. It includes the following modules:
Report Manager. Use this module to create and edit reports using Sage 100 Contractor data containers,
and to run reports.
Report Designer. Use this module to create new financial reports. You can easily:
"Drag and drop" columns and predefined calculations.
Create additional calculated fields using the Formula Builder.
Change amounts dynamically when forecasting and budgeting.
Report Viewer. Use this module to view existing reports.
License Manager. Use this module to enter or edit Sage Intelligence Reporting module licenses.
Security Manager. Use this module to define security for reports and users.
Product Overview 9
Chapter 1: Welcome to Sage 100 Contractor
Connector. Use this module to connect to unlimited ODBC data sources or additional Sage 100
Contractor companies.
IMPORTANT: The first time you run Sage Intelligence Reporting, you must log in as the Windows
administrator. A user with Windows administrator privileges must register the ActiveX component,
BICore.exe, that Sage Intelligence Reporting requires. To register this component, open any Sage
Intelligence Reporting module. Once the component is registered, other users can use Sage Intelligence
Reporting.
The following predefined reports come with Sage Intelligence Reporting:
2-3 Income Statement: 21 – Income Statement
2-3 Income Statement: 31 – Income Statement ~Period and YTD
2-3 Income Statement: Dept. Income Statement ~Actual/Budget Comparison
3-1-3 Receivables Aging: 26 – AR Invoice Aging ~Land
4-1-3 Payable Aging: 26 – AP Invoice Aging ~Land
6-1-1 Job Status Report: 31 – Job Status Report ~Land
6-1-12 Committed Cost Report: 31 – Committed Costs ~Land
6-1-12 Committed Cost Report: 61 – Committed Costs ~With Cost to Complete
6-1-13 Home Builder Reports: 21 – Committed Budget/Cost Variance~by Cost Code
6-1-13 Home Builder Reports: 51 – Gross Profit ~by Job
6-1-4 Job Summary Report: 21 – Job Cost Summary
6-1-4 Job Summary Report: 51 – Job Billing Summary
6-1-4 Job Summary Report: 71 – Job Income Statement
6-1-7 Over/Under Billing Report: 31 – Over/Under Billings ~Extended
6-1-8 Bonding Report: 21 – Bonding Report
6-6-3 Purchase Order Audit: 31 – Purchase Order Audit ~Land
For information on using Sage Intelligence Reporting, see the Sage Intelligence Reporting help and supporting
documentation.
You can also visit the following websites for more assistance:
Sage Intelligence Community (includes access to the Sage Intelligence Knowledgebase)
Sage Intelligence Academy
Document Conventions and Notes
Understanding documentation conventions
Standard text formats are used in all the guides to help you find information.
10 Sage 100 Contractor
Document Conventions and Notes
Definition
Convention
Indicates a component such as a menu, menu command, dialog box, check box, button, list
or option.
Bold
Indicates the names of ledger accounts, account ranges, and reports.
Indicates the names of operators and fields.
Indicates the syntax of queries.
Courier
Bold font
Indicates text that you must type into Sage 100 Contractor.
Indicates the names of expressions and functions.
Courier font
Indicates the name of a file or a folder.
Key1+Key2
The plus (+) sign indicates that you should press and hold down the first key while you press
the second key. For example, Alt+C indicates that you should press the Alt key and hold it
while you press the C key; then release both.
Indicates the titles of printed or printable documents.
Italic
Indicates variable values or parameters within expressions.
(See links)
(Help only) Indicates that there is a hypertext link to a topic related to that step in the
procedure. Look for it in the links list at the end of the procedure.
How?
(Help only) Indicates that there is a hypertext link to a specific procedural topic.
About note styles and their meaning
There are four levels of notes in this guide: Caution!, Important, Note, and Tip.
CAUTION: Read all information presented in a caution note. It advises you that failure to take or avoid a
specific action could result in a loss of data.
IMPORTANT: This type of note provides information essential to the completion of a task. You can
disregard the information in a regular note and still complete a task, but you should not disregard an
important note.
NOTE: A note provides positive information that emphasizes or supplements important points of the
main text. The information in notes may only apply in special cases, such as memory limitation or details
that apply to specific versions of Sage 100 Contractor.
TIP: A tip is a type of note that helps you apply the techniques and procedures described in the text to
their specific needs. A tip may suggest alternative methods that may not be obvious and help you
understand the benefits and capabilities of Sage 100 Contractor.
Product Overview 11
Chapter 2: Companies, Security, and
Users
Working with Utilities
The 7-Utilities windows enable you to setup security, create users, create companies, and to perform
maintenance functions. The supervisor user with exclusive access rights must perform many of these tasks.
List of 7-Utilities Windows
7-1 Create New Company—Create a new blank company or copy selected data from an existing open
company to create a new company.
7-2 Company Information—Enter company information into the system, such as address, license
numbers, tax numbers, direct deposit information, and more.
7-3 Company Security—Contains two sub-menu windows:
7-3-1 Security Groups—Create security groups and set security for Save, Delete, Void, Print
Checks, and more.
7-3-2 User List—Set up a list of users in the current company. To save time, you can also copy user
defaults.
7-4 Rebuild Indexes—Rebuilds the database indexes for the company that is currently open.
7-5 Update Databases—Rebuilds the database indexes for all the companies that located in the current
company's drive.
7-6 Repair Database—Opens the Support Password window. This is only need to repair damaged
databases. You need to contact Customer Support for assistance. Database damage can be caused by
a power failure or hard disk failure.
IMPORTANT: The maintenance task carried out in 7-6 Repair Database requires contact with
Customer Support.
7-7 Scheduled Reports Manager—View and delete events recorded when scheduled reports are
executed.
7-8 Contact Manager—7-8 Contact Manager allows you to add and update 3-5 Jobs (Accounts
Receivable), 3-6 Receivables Clients, and 4-4 Vendors (Accounts Payable) contact records in your
Outlook contacts .
7-9 Alerts Manager—Use 7-9 Alerts Manager to view, created, edit, and import custom alerts and
program alerts that are viewable in the Dashboard and email.
License Administration Tool
License Administration window
Use the License Administration window to view and maintain your licensing information, which includes:
Product Overview 13
Chapter 2: Companies, Security, and Users
The number of license uses.
The users who are logged on to Sage 100 Contractor.
Licensing events.
Your Sage 100 Contractor software automatically retrieves license information from Sage every day. The
licenses give you access to the various modules of Sage 100 Contractor. As you purchase or remove license
activations, the Sage license server automatically updates this information in your system. You can also
select to update the licensing information from Sage on demand.
Security Groups and Users
Security features of Sage 100 Contractor
Sage 100 Contractor provides a variety of security features that enable you to restrict access to data in each
company. You can:
Create a list of users and passwords for each company. You use this list to restrict access to
individual companies.
NOTE: Restricting access to a company also restricts access to its archive.
Create groups of users. You create security groups to organize users by function, such as project
managers, payables clerks, or payroll clerks. You can assign each user to up to five security groups.
Assign access rights to groups of users. You control user access to windows through security
groups, assigning access rights to each security group.
Restrict access to specific data. Control items within windows, such as text boxes, lists, check
boxes, and grid columns. By limiting the information a security group can enter or view in a window, you
also restrict access to that same information in queries and reports. For example, you might not want to
allow the payroll clerks security group access to salaries and wage rates in the employee files. The
payroll clerks will not be able to view salaries and wage rates in the employee files, or while entering
timecards, or by running any payroll reports.
Each company in Sage 100 Contractor can use different user names, passwords, security groups, and
access rights. You only have to set up security groups and access rights one time for each company. As you
add or remove users from the User List, you can simply assign or reassign users to the proper security
groups.
IMPORTANT: Many actions in Sage 100 Contractor can be performed only by a user logged on as
supervisor. When setting up security, it is critical that you add a password for the user name supervisor.
About security groups
Use the 7-3-1 Security Groups window to set up security groups for your company’s employees.
Security groups let you control users’ ability to open windows as well as perform specific actions within a
window. The 7-3-1 Security Groups window contains a grid with numbered rows on the left and eight
columns:
14 Sage 100 Contractor
Security Groups and Users
Group# (User input is required to save the record.)
Group Name (User input is required to save the record.)
Save
Delete
Void
Chg Period
Print Checks
Notes
When you set up user groups, you type a group number and group name. Then you determine whether or not
that group will have rights to Save, Delete, and Void records, as well as to change the accounting period and
print checks. You may use the Notes column to add any pertinent information about each group.
While you might create security groups for specific employees, it is a good idea to build each security group
for the tasks performed by the employee. This allows you to add or remove employees from security groups
rather than having to build new security groups for each new employee.
As the company size increases, the need for additional security groups increases. For example, a large
company has an office staff that includes several accounts payable clerks, an accounts receivables clerk, a
payroll clerk, a controller, project managers, and estimators. In this company, six different security groups are
set up to accommodate the specific needs of the employees engaged in six different task areas.
In addition to creating task-oriented security groups, it is a good idea to create one security group with full
access to the entire program. This allows owners or managers to log in with full access, but prevents
unauthorized access to program features that only a user logged in as supervisor can use.
It is important to consider the scope of tasks performed by users as well as the number of users that access
Sage 100 Contractor. Before designing security groups, examine which users need access to specific
windows in Sage 100 Contractor. After you set up the security groups, you can then set up window and menulevel security.
For example, a small company has three clerks: a general accounting clerk, an accounts payable and
accounts receivable clerk, and a payroll clerk. For this company, it is only necessary to create three security
groups. The first group, titled Payroll Clerk, only provides access to payroll operations. The second group,
titled A/P A/R Clerk, provides access to accounts payable and accounts receivable operations. The third
group, titled General Ledger Clerk, provides access to general ledger operations not covered by accounts
payable and accounts receivable.
Consider the following before setting up security groups:
Do you need to create separate security groups for employees who perform specific tasks? For example,
does your company have a payables clerk who only enters payables data?
Do you need to create separate security groups for accounts payable, accounts receivable, and payroll
supervisors, or can you just create one group for the supervisors?
Do estimators perform different tasks than project managers?
Product Overview 15
Chapter 2: Companies, Security, and Users
Do you need to provide differing levels of access to owners, controllers, or managers?
Are you going to use the Sage 100 Contractor API to integrate with other programs? If so, create a
security group named API with a group number such as 51.
IMPORTANT: To use the Sage 100 Contractor API program, you must create an API security group
that is named exactly API. At least one user must be added to the API security group. You have to set
rights to save, void, and so on.
About setting field properties
You open the Field Properties window by pressing the F7 key when you are using a data entry window, for
example, 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits. Using the Field Properties window, you can set up the default
properties for almost any text box, check box, grid cell, or column within a window. You can set the following
options:
Default Entry to. Provides a list of entries from which you can select the default. Enter the default data,
or click the item in the list you want to appear as the default entry.
Permit Access to. Lets you select which user groups have access to a window, text box, list, or grid
column. If no user groups are selected, then all user groups have access. If the user groups appear
shaded, then you cannot restrict access.
When a user group is not granted access to a window, that user group cannot open the window. In
addition, the user group cannot access the information by printing documents or reports.
When a user group is not granted access to a text box or list, that user group cannot enter or access
information in that text box or list, or access the information using a query, quick list, or Lookup
window. In addition, the user group cannot access the information by printing documents or reports.
When a user group is not granted access to a grid column, that grid column is hidden from view and is
not accessible by the user group. In addition, the user group cannot access the information by printing
documents or reports.
Skip During Entry. During data entry, Sage 100 Contractor skips over the field or list. You can still
enter data when you select it.
Require Entry. Requires an entry, or Sage 100 Contractor will not save the record.
Require List Match. Requires that the entry match an item on the Quick List.
Require Unique. Prevents users from entering duplicate information. This is available for indexed text
boxes that let you enter character-based information.
When you select this property for the Invoice# box in 3-2 Receivable Invoices, 6-6-1 Purchase
Orders, or 6-7-1 Subcontracts, Sage 100 Contractor ignores records that have status 5-Void.
When you select this property for the Work Order and Invoice# boxes in 11-2 Work
Orders/Invoices/Credits, Sage 100 Contractor ignores records that have status 5-Void.
When you select this property for the Invoice# box in 4-2 Payable Invoices, Sage 100 Contractor
ignores records that have status 5-Void for a given vendor. You can set up a vendor to use duplicate
invoice numbers.
Lock After Save. Prevents users from editing the information after saving the record. Only users logged
in as supervisor can edit the information.
16 Sage 100 Contractor
Security Groups and Users
Lock Quick List. Prevents users from editing a Quick List. Only users logged in as supervisor can edit
the information.
Check Spelling. Checks the spelling when you move to another text box or cell. If Sage 100 Contractor
finds a misspelled word, it displays the Spelling dialog box.
Mixed Case. Allows text entry in upper and lower case.
Upper Case. Displays text only in upper case.
Lower Case. Converts entry to lower case text.
User Defined Field Type. Lets you select the type of information the field accepts.
System Description. Displays the default description of the field.
User Description. Lets you change the description of the field. To display the system description again,
delete the user description.
System Prompt. Displays the default prompt that appears in the status bar at the bottom of the window.
User Prompt. Allows you to change the default prompt in the status bar at the bottom of the window.
When the user prompt is deleted, the system prompt is restored.
Setting up properties for text boxes, lists, check boxes, columns, and
the Dashboard
Setting up properties
Using the F7 key, you can set up the default properties for almost any text box, list, check box, grid cell, or
column within a window.
IMPORTANT:
Access to set up these properties is limited to the supervisor user.
You cannot restrict access to system-required fields.
For example, you may want to autopopulate certain fields in a window to speed up the work. In some cases, it
is essential for certain fields to be hidden from view for business purposes.
About the 7-3-2 User List window
The 7-3-2 User List window controls major features dealing with users and program security.
If you are a supervisor user, you can use the grid in this window to set up a list of user names for each
company folder to help control access to Sage 100 Contractor.
By setting up security groups and assigning the groups to user names, you can further limit access to certain
modules or windows, and text boxes, lists, and columns within windows.
Because Sage 100 Contractor determines access through the user names, a user can log on to Sage 100
Contractor from any workstation in a network environment.
By selecting the Display Passwords check box, a supervisor user can view, set and/or change users’
passwords.
Product Overview 17
Chapter 2: Companies, Security, and Users
If you want certain users to see job-related information only for the jobs they manage, you can assign them to
job-level security using the Subject to Job Security column.
NOTE: Any user can be a member of the API security group. However, we recommend that you create
a specific user to use the API, for example, “APIUser.”
About the supervisor user
When you log on to Sage 100 Contractor as supervisor, you have access rights to the entire Sage 100
Contractor application.
IMPORTANT: To maintain security, we strongly recommend that you set up a password for the
supervisor user. Be sure to write it down and keep it in a safe place.
Following is a list of actions you can only perform when logged on to Sage 100 Contractor as supervisor:
Create security groups in 7-3-1 Security Groups.
Grant access rights to security groups for windows and items within windows such as text boxes, lists,
and grid columns in 7-3-1 Security Groups.
Grant job-level security to specific users in 7-3-2 User List.
Use the F7 key to display the Field Properties dialog box to set the individual security properties for a
text box, list, check box, or grid column, as well as set security for certain menu commands from the
main menus. You can also customize the window, set defaults in specific fields, and set system user
prompts.
Create user names and passwords, and assign user names to security groups in 7-3-1 User List.
Create new companies in 7-1 Create New Company.
Make and save changes to the General Ledger in 1-8 General Ledger Setup.
Archive the accounting at the fiscal year-end in 1-6 Period/Fiscal Year Management.
Close payroll at the calendar year-end, which starts on 5-4-5 Close Payroll Year.
Restrict posting to specific accounting posting periods, for example, 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits and
other windows.
About window and menu-level security
Window-level security lets you limit a security group’s ability to open specific windows within Sage 100
Contractor. You can set up window-level security on a menu command that opens a window or sub-level
window.
Suppose a small company has three security groups: General Ledger Clerk, A/P A/R Clerk, and Payroll
Clerk. Using the window and menu-level security, you can allow only members of the General Ledger Clerk
group access to windows related to general ledger operations; the A/P A/R Clerk group to accounts payable
and accounts receivable operations; and the Payroll Clerk group to payroll operations.
For menu commands that open a window, Sage 100 Contractor allows access only by users in the selected
security groups, and applies the access rights assigned to each group.
18 Sage 100 Contractor
Security Groups and Users
For menu commands that open a different menu item, Sage 100 Contractor allows access only by users in the
selected security groups. For example, you can provide the General Ledger Clerk group access through
menu 1-General Ledger. However, this does not apply the access rights to the items under menu 1-General
Ledger.
IMPORTANT: Assigning security to a window or menu command does not restrict Dashboard access
to the information aggregated by that window or module. You must assign security to Dashboard
information separately.
About access rights regarding window and menu-level security
CAUTION: Without window and menu-level security set up, Sage 100 Contractor gives all access
rights to any user opening the window.
When you assign a user to a security group, that user gains the access rights associated with its security
group. Sage 100 Contractor applies the access rights only when you have set up window-level and menu-level
security on a menu command that opens a window.
Suppose you assign to a security group titled General Ledger Clerk only the right to save and delete records.
Then, you set up window and menu-level security for each window under the general ledger—1-1
Checks/Bank Charges, 1-2 Deposits/Interest, 1-3 Journal Transactions, 1-4 Recurring Journal
Transactions, 1-5 Bank Reconciliation, 1-6 Period/Fiscal Year Management, 1-7 Ledger Accounts, 1-8
General Ledger Setup, and 1-9 Company Departments—selecting only the General Ledger Clerk group
to have access to those windows.
Example 1. Gerald is assigned to the General Ledger Clerk group. When Gerald opens the 1-1
Checks/Bank Charges window, he can only save and delete records.
Example 2. A security group titled Payroll Clerk has rights to save records, change posting periods,
print checks, and void or delete records. Each window under payroll is assigned window and menu-level
security. Only users assigned to the Payroll security group can open those windows.
Example 3. Dianna is assigned to both the General Ledger Clerk and Payroll Clerk groups. When
Dianna opens any of the payroll windows, she has the access rights assigned to the Payroll Clerk
group. And when Dianna opens any of the general ledger windows, she has the access rights assigned
to the General Ledger Clerk group.
To set up window and menu-level security
1. Log on to the company as supervisor.
2. Select the menu command, and then press F7.
3. Select the groups to which you want to provide access.
4. Click Save.
About exclusive access
While users in a network environment can simultaneously work in the same company’s data, some operations
require that access to the company is restricted to a single user.
Product Overview 19
Chapter 2: Companies, Security, and Users
For example, exclusive access is required when rebuilding indexes, copying a company to create a new one,
or archiving the accounting at the fiscal year-end. To protect the data, limit the access of a company to a
single workstation during rebuilding indexes and archiving the fiscal year.
20 Sage 100 Contractor
Chapter 3: General Ledger
Chapter 1: General Ledger
Working with General Ledger
As the backbone of the accounting system, General Ledger pulls together information from Payroll,
Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable, Inventory, Service Receivables, Equipment Management,
and other features. You can also make direct entries for cash, checks, deposits, journal transactions, and
recurring transactions.
A tight audit trail creates a well-protected system from accounting to job costs and automatically audits all
stored balances back to their original entries.
General Ledger maintains true subsidiary ledgers with lookup windows for each controlling account to simplify
data entry to all 12 accounting periods for the current fiscal year, and you can control posting to any period.
Entries made to the prior year automatically update the prior year’s ending balances as well as the current
year’s beginning balances.
TIP: Sage 100 Contractor devotes an entire program section to major accounting reports in 2Accounting Reports.
Ledger and Subsidiary Accounts
About general ledger accounts
In the 1-7 General Ledger Accounts window, you can view a summary of activity for an account broken
down by fiscal period. As an aid to organizing the financial data, you can use subsidiary accounts or
departments.
You can manually enter a budget for each ledger account that takes into consideration the activity of each
period within the fiscal year. Over the course of the fiscal year, you can generate reports detailing the budget
versus actual account activity. Sage 100 Contractor also stores period balances for the previous fiscal year.
When you archive at the fiscal year-end, Sage 100 Contractor transfers the period balances from the This
Year column to the Last Year column.
Comparisons between the account activity of the current year and the budget or account activity for the prior
year provide a valuable way for you to analyze the company finances. The comparisons enable you to create
budgets with greater accuracy, determine areas in the company that are over or under budgeted, and compare
projections to the actual activity.
Because the 1-7 General Ledger Accounts window only displays account activity, you cannot enter
adjusting entries in this window. If you need to correct a period balance, you can enter the transaction using
the 1-3 Journal Transactions window.
Product Overview 21
Chapter 3: General Ledger
In ledger accounts, you can organize data using departments or subsidiary accounts. Departments allow you
to group data across the income and expense accounts, whereas subsidiary accounts allow you to divide data
under a single, controlling ledger account. Sage 100 Contractor also allows you to set up summary accounts,
which allow you to combine ledger accounts for financial reports.
Learning more about ledger accounts
Ledger accounts are divided into two categories: permanent accounts (also called balance sheet accounts)
and temporary accounts (also called profit and loss or income statements). Assets, liabilities, and equity
accounts are referred to as permanent accounts. With permanent accounts, a period’s ending balance carries
forward to become the beginning balance for the following period. Therefore, the period balances provide you
with a running total over the course of a fiscal year.
The income and expense accounts are referred to as temporary accounts. With temporary accounts, the
balance for each period is recorded separately. When a period closes, the following period starts with a zero
balance. Temporary accounts only provide the activity for each individual period and not the year to date.
When you choose a pre-built chart of accounts, Sage 100 Contractor creates the ledger accounts. You can
then edit the ledgers to create the type of accounts needed. When you post the first transaction to a
company’s books, Sage 100 Contractor locks the system of ledger account ranges. To change the account
number for a ledger account after having posted a transaction to it, create a new ledger account manually and
transfer the balance through an adjusting journal entry.
You can rename a ledger account at any time. Sage 100 Contractor uses the short name for Picklists and
most accounting reports, and uses the long name for the Balance Sheet, Financial Report, and Income
Statement reports.
Subsidiary: If an account uses departments or subsidiary accounts, the departments or subsidiary accounts
must be set up before posting transactions. In the Subsidiary list, click departments or subsidiary accounts.
Summary Account: Using summary accounts, you can combine multiple ledgers into a single ledger for
generating a financial report in 2-8 Financial Reports. When you generate a financial report, Sage 100
Contractor looks to the Summary Account box in each ledger. If Sage 100 Contractor finds an account
number, it combines the balance of that account into the indicated summary account.
Account Type: Displays the account range to which an account belongs and whether the account maintains
a debit or credit balance. Ledger accounts that fall within specific account ranges are assigned certain
properties:
Ledgers in the Cash Accounts range cannot use subsidiary accounts.
When posting to WIP Assets or Direct Expense ranges, Sage 100 Contractor requires you to create job
costs before posting transactions.
When posting to equipment accounts, Sage 100 Contractor requires you to create equipment costs.
Starting Balance: Displays the account balance at the beginning of the fiscal year, and that balance does not
change by posting transactions to period zero.
22 Sage 100 Contractor
Ledger and Subsidiary Accounts
Beginning Balance: Displays the account balance at the beginning of the fiscal year. The beginning balance
is adjusted to reflect any postings made to period zero. Temporary accounts start with a $0 balance, and
permanent accounts carry forward the ending balance from the prior fiscal year.
Ending Balance: Displays the ending balance as it appears in period 12 for permanent accounts. It is
important to note that with temporary accounts, Sage 100 Contractor displays the total of all period balances.
Posting to period 0 changes the beginning balances of the active company, and changes the ending balances
in the archived company.
CAUTION: Once set up and saved, you cannot delete a chart of accounts, and you cannot edit it after
you have entered a transaction. Call Customer Support or your business partner if you need more
information.
General Ledger Setup
Accounting setup considerations
Before you begin to set up your general ledger and other parts of accounting, there are several things that you
should consider. For example, what is your startup date? It is going to take days and perhaps a couple of
weeks to set up your company, so you need to have a startup date for your company in Sage 100 Contractor.
You also must know your company’s fiscal year-end. In addition, you’ll need to consider the amount of
information that you plan to bring into Sage 100 Contractor and its level of detail.
Here is a list of suggested information:
Balance sheet and income statement as of now: If it’s currently mid-year, you have to merge the
income statement from Sage 100 Contractor with the prior system for year-to-date reporting.
Balance sheet as of beginning of fiscal year and year-to-date activity as of Sage 100 Contractor
start date: You do not need month-by-month income statements, and you do not need prior year history.
Balance sheet as of the beginning of the fiscal year and activity for each month: You do not need
details. All detailed information must come from your prior system.
Balance sheet as of beginning of fiscal year and all transactions: Starting up your accounting this
way requires a lot of work unless only a few hundred entries need to be made.
In addition, you need the following information:
A chart of accounts
Listing of open accounts payable invoices
Listing of accounts receivable invoices (including fully paid) for jobs that are in progress
Job information: names, clients, and addresses
Contract amounts
Payroll information regarding employee balances, unions, company deductions, local taxes, and so forth.
CAUTION: Once set up and saved, you cannot delete a chart of accounts, and you cannot edit it after
you have entered a transaction. Call Customer Support or your business partner if you need more
information.
Product Overview 23
Chapter 3: General Ledger
About general ledger setup
One of the first tasks when creating a new company in Sage 100 Contractor is to set up the general ledger
structure. When you select a pre-built ledger, Sage 100 Contractor creates the ledger accounts for you.
You can also set up the general ledger manually. If you choose to enter the account ranges, controlling
accounts, and posting accounts manually, Sage 100 Contractor will not create the ledger accounts. You will
then need to create each ledger account in the 1-7 General Ledger Accounts window.
CAUTION: Once set up and saved, you cannot delete a chart of accounts, and you cannot edit it after
you have entered a transaction. Call Customer Support or your business partner if you need more
information.
NOTE: Unless you have prior experience setting up general ledgers, it is a good idea to choose a prebuilt chart of accounts.
Pre-built chart of accounts
When you select the pre-built chart of accounts, Sage 100 Contractor automatically sets up the account
ranges, controlling account numbers, posting account numbers, and then creates the ledger accounts. You
can then modify the ledger setup to meet your particular needs. However, you will then need to edit the ledger
accounts to match any changes made in the 1-8 General Ledger Setup window.
You can select from four different pre-built charts of accounts:
General Contractor Accounts (Four-Digit or Five-Digit)
Subcontractor Accounts (Four-Digit or Five-Digit)
Home Builder Accounts
Remodeler Accounts
After setting up the chart of accounts, you can edit account numbers, delete unnecessary accounts, and set
up controlling accounts for subsidiary accounts or departments in the 1-7 Ledger Accounts window. If you
change a controlling or posting account number in 1-8 General Ledger Setup, you must also change the
ledger account number.
CAUTION: You cannot delete a chart of accounts after you set it up and save it, and you cannot edit it
after you have entered a transaction. Call Customer Support or your business partner if you need more
information.
About posting periods
Use the Posting Period window to select the period where you want to post your transactions.
In any accounting transactions window, such as 4-2 Payable Invoice/Credits, you can post individual
transaction records to a different posting period. For example, if you need to post a transaction to period 1 of a
new fiscal year, but you are still currently in period 12 of the current fiscal year, use this window to post the
transaction to period 1 of the new fiscal year.
24 Sage 100 Contractor
Ledger and Subsidiary Accounts
NOTE: If you want to change the default posting period for all transactions, you can only change it using
1-6 Period and Fiscal Year Management > Change Period.
Period 1 of the next fiscal year becomes available only after you advance your current fiscal period to period
12. Advance your current period to period 1 to make periods 2 through 12 available for the next fiscal year.
To use Posting Period:
Select the period to which you want to post transactions and click [Select].
Important Posting Period features
The following bullet points describe some of the features related to posting periods:
n
n
n
n
n
Accounting transaction windows contain a Change the posting period button that displays the posting
period to which you are posting transactions. By changing the posting period, you can post transactions to
the specified period until you change the period again or close the window. When the window opens again,
the posting period is set to the current default posting period.
Users at different workstations can work in the same window and post to different periods. For example,
while Andy and Melissa are entering invoices in the Accounts Payable Invoices window, Andy finds a few
invoices that need posting to a previous period. While Melissa continues entering invoices in the current
fiscal period, Andy can change the fiscal period and enter those invoices.
When you change the posting period to something other than the default current posting period, Sage 100
Contractor changes the color of the Posting Period button to yellow.
At the end of the period, open 1-6 Period and Fiscal Year Management > Change Period and advance
the current default posting period to the next one.
When advancing to the next posting period, the program performs a complete audit of the books. If you
discover audit errors, you can view them and possibly repair the ledger balances at that time rather than at
the end of the fiscal year.
IMPORTANT: We strongly recommend that you recalculate balances to repair discrepancies if they are
discovered during audits at the end of each posting period. Repairing audit errors as you advance to the
next posting period is much more efficient than waiting until year-end to repair a year’s worth of audit
errors.
n
n
n
You can restrict users from posting transactions to previous or future periods.
If you have an archive from a previous year, you can post transactions to the archive; however, you must
open the archive company first. Sage 100 Contractor does not post entries simultaneously to period 12 of
an archive company and period 0 of the current company.
When using Sage 100 Contractor across a network, changing the current period using 1-6 Period and
Fiscal Year Management > Change Period affects all workstations that access Sage 100 Contractor.
Product Overview 25
Chapter 3: General Ledger
About inventory valuation methods
NOTE: This functionality is available only if you have the Inventory Add-On Module.
IMPORTANT: We recommend that you consult with your accountant and tax advisor before selecting
an inventory valuation method in Sage 100 Contractor.
Inventory valuation methods handle the accounting aspects of an inventory account. Your inventory valuation
method determines the value of used inventory, which impacts the inventory general ledger account. The
actual physical movement of inventory is not dictated by your inventory valuation method selection. In other
words, inventory parts can be used in any order regardless of the valuation method used.
Sage 100 Contractor provides three different inventory valuation methods:
Weighted Average Cost (WAC)
Last-in First-out (LIFO)
First-in First-out (FIFO)
About starting balances
You can enter the starting balances for asset and liability accounts by posting a journal transaction—usually
to period zero. As journal transactions can contain up to 999 lines, it is possible to enter most starting
balances in a single journal transaction. Enter each account balance on a separate line.
Larger companies may not be able to enter the balances in one transaction. If you need to enter two journal
transactions, use a clearing account to create a balanced entry.
At the end of the first transaction, enter the clearing account number and the amount necessary to balance the
transaction. In the second journal transaction, finish entering the starting balances. Then at the end of the
second transaction, enter the clearing account number and the amount necessary to balance the transaction.
After you complete the entry of the starting balances, the clearing account returns to a zero balance.
About dedicated accounts
Sage 100 Contractor does not let you post journal transactions directly to the Accounts Receivable,
Accounts Payable, Service Receivables, or Inventory ledger accounts; you can only post to those
accounts through invoices. Therefore, entering the starting balances is a two-part process.
During the first part of the process, the Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable, Service Receivables,
and Inventory balances are posted to clearing accounts. Later, the individual open invoices are posted
against the clearing accounts, thereby moving the balances into the proper accounts.
Similarly, you cannot directly post to the Inventory ledger account. Normally, you move inventory into the
accounting system through payable invoices. For startup purposes, however, it is necessary to post a journal
transaction to an Inventory clearing account. Later, the inventory is posted against the clearing account and
allocated to specific inventory locations and parts, thereby moving the balances into the Inventory ledger
account.
26 Sage 100 Contractor
Ledger and Subsidiary Accounts
In this portion of the setup process, post the starting balances to the clearing accounts. If you are using a prebuilt general ledger structure, Sage 100 Contractor already has the necessary clearing accounts established.
At the fiscal year-end, you can delete the setup clearing accounts, as they are no longer needed.
IMPORTANT: After posting the invoice and allocations for inventory, your clearing accounts should
have a zero balance. If not, review your data to find out why.
Working With Ledger Accounts
About account ranges
You can set up the ranges for the ledger accounts. The Account Range boxes determine the overall range of
accounts for the entire chart of accounts. If you are creating a chart of accounts manually, indicate the lowest
and highest account numbers in the range. Then set the individual accounts ranges within the chart of
accounts. The range for a chart of accounts usually begins with one (100, 1000, or 10,000) and ends with eight
(800, 8000, or 80,000). You can create ledger accounts that use up to ten digits. The range of the largest chart
of accounts that you can create is 1,000,000,000 to 9,999,999,999.
When an account is set up, its account number cannot exceed the range limit. Suppose the Current
Liabilities range of accounts is from 200 to 249. You cannot create a current liability using an account number
below 200 or above 249.
NOTE: You cannot use decimals in the account numbers.
About controlling accounts
A controlling account is a ledger account in the general ledger that summarizes the balances for a group of
similar subsidiary accounts. With specific, dedicated controlling accounts, the program uses the accounts
you designate to automatically post certain transactions to the correct ledger accounts.
When you select a pre-built chart of accounts, Sage 100 Contractor assigns the account numbers to the
ledger accounts. You can change the account numbers during setup; each account number must fall within
the correct range.
Under Controlling Accounts, Sage 100 Contractor uses the accounts you designate to automatically post
certain transactions to the correct ledger accounts. For example, when you post a receivable invoice, you do
not need to supply the accounts receivable ledger account. After posting a transaction to the general ledger,
Sage 100 Contractor locks the account numbers for the accounts under Controlling Accounts. The account
numbers will appear shaded.
You can change the account numbers on the Receivables, Payables, Equipment, and Inventory tabs
whether or not you have posted transactions. If you change the account number on the Receivables,
Payables or Equipment tabs, you will have to move the balances to the new account through a journal
transaction.
Product Overview 27
Chapter 3: General Ledger
Subsidiary Accounts
About subsidiary accounts
Using subsidiary accounts, you can arrange financial information into related categories under a single ledger
account, providing quick access to specific information. A ledger account that uses subsidiary accounts is
known as the controlling account. Asset and liability accounts primarily use subsidiary accounts, though you
can also use subsidiary accounts with income and expense accounts.
Suppose that you want to track telephone expenses. You can split the telephone account into subsidiary
accounts such as Basic Service, Long Distance, Cellular, and Paging. The Telephone ledger account
then provides you with the overall expenses as well as a breakdown of the expenses by the subsidiary
accounts.
Sage 100 Contractor automatically sets up subsidiary accounts for accounts receivable, accounts payable,
and service receivables using the job, vendor, and client numbers as the subsidiary account numbers.
However, Sage 100 Contractor does not provide access to these subsidiary accounts through the Ledger
Accounts window because you can view the subsidiary account balances in the Job, Vendor, and Client
windows. Sage 100 Contractor also sets up subsidiary accounts for Equipment Assets, Equipment
Depreciation, and Equipment Loans using the equipment numbers as the subsidiary account numbers.
Similarly, you view the subsidiary account balances for equipment in the Equipment window.
Setting up subsidiary accounts takes careful planning. Like ledger accounts, you cannot change the
subsidiary account number after posting a transaction to a subsidiary account. It is important to note that you
can always add subsidiary accounts to an existing controlling account.
You cannot make a ledger account into a controlling account if that ledger account that has had any activity or
carried a balance. You can, however, create a new controlling account, set up subsidiary accounts, and
transfer the balance from the ledger account into the subsidiary accounts of the new controlling account.
Company Departments
About Company Departments
Company departments help organize income and expense data and provide a means to evaluate the profit and
loss for a company. Departments and subsidiary accounts both arrange data in meaningful ways, but with a
significant difference in how the data is used. While a single controlling account uses a set of subsidiary
accounts tailored to the controlling account, income and expense controlling accounts share departments.
With departments in place, you can analyze your income and expenses. For example, to determine which
departments are profitable, you can generate a departmental income statement. You can also view a
department balance for either all ledger accounts or for a specific ledger account.
After you set up the controlling accounts and create your list of departments, you can add the departments to
the controlling accounts. Because Sage 100 Contractor simultaneously updates departments to all controlling
accounts, you can add departments, or change the department names or numbering structure at any time.
28 Sage 100 Contractor
Checks and Bank Charges
IMPORTANT: Before you create departments, you must designate ledger accounts to accept
departments.
You cannot transform a ledger account into a controlling account if that ledger account has had any activity or
carries a balance. The ideal time to create departments is at the start of a new fiscal year after all account
balances have been cleared. If necessary, however, you can create departments for a ledger account in the
middle of the fiscal year. To do this, create a new controlling account to handle departments, and transfer the
balance from the ledger account into the departments in the new controlling account.
Departments and subsidiary accounts both provide tools to evaluate the profit and loss for companies. Both
arrange data in meaningful ways; however, there are significant differences in how the data is used. A single
controlling account uses a set of subsidiary accounts tailored to the controlling account. In contrast, income
and expense controlling accounts share the same set of departments, and each controlling account that uses
departments has the same set of subsidiary accounts.
Checks and Bank Charges
About checks and bank charges
Using 1-1 Checks/Bank Charges, you can produce general ledger checks, transfer funds between cash
accounts, enter bank charges, and cancel check numbers. When entering a check, you can break down costs
by creating separate line items, and you can even post each item to a different ledger account. To pay a
vendor, however, you create the check through 4-3 Vendor Payments.
Suppose you want to issue a check to a telephone company for last month’s bill. To indicate to Sage 100
Contractor that a check will be printed for the transaction, you type a placeholder consisting of four zeros
(0000) in the Check# box. Then when selecting check records for printing, you indicate the check number at
which you want to begin printing. As Sage 100 Contractor prints checks, it substitutes the placeholder in the
posted record with the appropriate check number.
You can also enter transactions that do not require printed checks. For example, you might issue a hand
written check and will not need to print a check. In this case, you enter the check number you issued in the
Check# box.
In the grid, you can itemize the expenses and post them to different expense accounts. When you indicate a
direct expense account, equipment expense account, or WIP account Sage 100 Contractor requires you to
create a cost record.
About posting to period 0
When you want to enter the startup balances and invoices for a new company or when you want to adjust the
beginning balances for a company, post to period 0. Period 0 is not part of the fiscal year. Therefore, Sage 100
Contractor does not include transactions posted to period 0 in any year-to-date reports.
TIP: Sage 100 Contractor posts the transactions to the selected fiscal period until you change the
period again or close the window.
Product Overview 29
Chapter 3: General Ledger
When you post to the asset or liability accounts in period 0, Sage 100 Contractor adjusts the beginning
balances. If you post to income or expense accounts in period 0, Sage 100 Contractor adjusts the beginning
balance of the Retained Earnings ledger account because income and expense accounts do not have
beginning balances.
Posting to period 0 does not affect the data in your archive company. Change archive company totals by
opening the archive company and making changes directly. When you change data in an archive, back up the
archived data. (We recommend making two backup copies.) The archived records are your permanent
records.
Deposits and Interest
About deposits and interest
You can enter deposits and accrued interest for checking or savings accounts in the 1-2 Deposits/Interest
window. When you enter a deposit, enter individual checks or accrued interest as separate line items. If you
have cash receipts for receivable or service invoices, enter these transactions using the 3-3-1 Cash Receipts
window.
About deposits on jobs
Some contracts require a client to supply a deposit before work can begin. When you receive the deposit, you
need to decide how to enter the deposit, as well as when and how to apply the deposit when invoicing the
client. This often depends on the terms agreed upon in the contract. The following outlines the most common
methods for handling job deposits:
You can enter the check for the job deposit in the 1-2 Deposits/Interest window. If you only receive a few
deposits each fiscal year, deposit the check to the checking account and credit the Deposits on Jobs
account. If you receive numerous deposits, create a subsidiary account for each deposit using the job number
as the subsidiary account number. This enables you to track deposits independently.
You can enter the job deposit as a receivable credit in the 3-2 Receivable Invoices/Credits window, debiting
the Deposits on Jobs account and crediting the accounts receivable account. You can enter the deposit as
an open credit, assigning it invoice status 1-Open, and invoice type 2-Memo.
Later, you can apply the credit as you enter receivable invoices or you can apply the credit as you enter
receipts in the 3-3-1 Cash Receipts window. The credit affects the statement balance, but does not affect the
contract balance.
TIP: By entering the job deposit as a credit, you can supply the client with a copy of the credit. This
allows the client to see how you applied the job deposit to invoices. Another way to inform the client
about the job deposit is to send the client a statement detailing the activity for the job.
Transferring Funds Among Accounts
You can transfer funds between accounts in the 1-1 Checks/Bank Charges or the 1-2 Deposits/Interest
window. When you transfer funds directly from one account to another, Sage 100 Contractor creates a single
record for the transfer. The record of the transfer appears in the check reconciliation of both accounts until you
30 Sage 100 Contractor
Deposits and Interest
clear it from one account or the other. After clearing the transaction for one account, it does not appear in the
reconciliation for the other account. As this might prove confusing, it is a good idea to use a clearing account
when transferring funds.
While using a clearing account requires a few extra steps, this type of transfer has a distinct advantage over
the direct method. To transfer the funds using a clearing account requires you to enter two transactions. When
reconciling bank statements, each account then has a transaction to clear. If you decide to use a clearing
account for this purpose, create a clearing account in the Cash Accounts range in the general ledger.
About clearing accounts
Some transactions can become quite complex. With clearing accounts, you can create transactions that
prove you have posted the amounts correctly. In addition, clearing accounts provide a means of posting
transactions or balances to accounts that normally do not allow direct posting.
NOTE: Clearing accounts do not carry a balance for any length of time. If you want to hold a transaction
in an account, use a suspense account.
Before posting a transaction, make sure the clearing account does not contain a balance. Posting a
transaction to a clearing account moves a balance into the account. To move the balance from the clearing
account, post a transaction or series of transactions against the clearing account. When the account balance
reaches zero, you have completely posted the balance.
Suppose that you have transferred money from a general checking account to a payroll checking account.
Using a clearing account, you would create a transaction in each account.
Window of entry
Debit
Credit
Checks/Bank Charges
Clearing
General Checking
Deposits/Interest
Payroll Checking
Clearing
To create a clearing account:
1 Open 1-7 General Ledger Accounts.
2 In the data control box, enter the ledger account number in the cash accounts range of 1000 to 1999.
3 In the Short Name box, enter a brief description of the clearing account.
IMPORTANT: If an account uses departments or subsidiary accounts, the departments or subsidiary
accounts must be set up before posting transactions. In the Subsidiary list, click 1-Subaccounts or 2Departments.
4 As required, in the Subsidiary list, click 1-Subaccounts or 2-Departments.
You can assign a cost type to ledger accounts, providing an additional way to verify transactions are
posted to the proper accounts. When you post a transaction that has cost types, Sage 100 Contractor
Product Overview 31
Chapter 3: General Ledger
compares the transaction’s cost type with the ledger account cost type. If the cost types do not match,
Sage 100 Contractor provides a warning, but does not prevent posting the transaction.
5 In the Cost Type list, click the cost type you want to assign the ledger account.
6 On the File menu, click Save.
To enter clearing account transfers
1 Open 1-1 Checks/Bank Charges. In the Account# box, enter the source account.
2 In the Check# box, enter the bank transaction number or a dummy transaction number.
3 In the Date box, enter the date of transfer.
4 In the Description box, enter a brief statement about the transfer.
5 In the Vendor box, enter the vendor number.
6 In the Status list, click 1-Open.
7 In the grid, do the following:
a In the Account cell, enter the clearing account to which you are transferring funds.
b If the account selected has subsidiary accounts, enter the number in the Subaccount cell.
c In the Debit Amount cell, enter the amount of the transfer.
8 On the File menu, click Save.
9 Open 1-2 Deposits/Interest. In the Account# box, enter the destination account number.
10 In the Deposit# box, enter the bank transaction number or a dummy transaction number.
11 In the Date box, enter the date of the transfer.
12 In the Description box, enter a brief statement about the transfer.
13 In the Status list, click 1-Open.
14 In the grid, do the following:
a In the Account cell, enter the clearing account from which funds originate.
b If the account selected has subsidiary accounts, enter the number in the Subaccount cell.
c In the Credit Amount cell, enter the amount of the transfer.
15 On the File menu, click Save.
TIP: You can verify the complete transfer of funds by viewing the clearing account balance in 1-7
General Ledger Accounts.
32 Sage 100 Contractor
Deposits and Interest
To enter direct transfers
1 Open 1-1 Checks/Bank Charges.
2 In the Account# box, enter the source account.
3 In the Check# box, enter the bank transaction number or a dummy transaction number.
4 In the Date box, enter the date of transfer.
5 In the Description box, enter a brief statement about the transfer.
6 In the Vendor box, enter the vendor number.
7 In the Status list, click 1-Open.
8 In the grid, do the following:
a In the Account cell, enter the account to which you are transferring funds.
b In the Debit Amount cell, enter the amount of the transfer.
9 On the File menu, click Save.
NOTE: You can also use 1-2 Deposits/Interest to transfer funds. Because you are making a deposit,
enter the destination account in the Account# box. Then in the Account column, enter the account
number from which the funds originate.
About suspense accounts
Suppose your company receives a corporate tax refund, and you want to deposit the check, but you do not
know how to correctly post the transaction. The correct approach is to deposit the check and credit it to a
suspense account in the Cash Accounts range. The amount remains in the suspense account until you
determine where to post the credit.
Suspense accounts provide a temporary location where you can post a transaction until you determine the
proper accounts. Similar in function to a clearing account, suspense accounts allow transactions to pass
through the account. When you post transactions to a suspense account, however, the transactions can
remain for an extended time until you determine the proper accounts.
It is a good idea to use a suspense account in the account range to which you will eventually post the
transactions. For example, you are not sure how to post a transaction related to equipment. You can use a
suspense account in the Equipment range of ledger accounts.
You can transfer funds between accounts in the 1-1 Checks/Bank Charges or the 1-2 Deposits/Interest
window. When you transfer funds directly from one account to another, Sage 100 Contractor creates a single
record for the transfer. The record of the transfer appears in the check reconciliation of both accounts until you
clear it from one account or the other. After clearing the transaction for one account, it does not appear in the
reconciliation for the other account. As this might prove confusing, it is a good idea to use a clearing account
when transferring funds.
Product Overview 33
Chapter 3: General Ledger
While using a clearing account requires a few extra steps, this type of transfer has a distinct advantage over
the direct method. To transfer the funds using a clearing account requires you to enter two transactions. When
reconciling bank statements, each account then has a transaction to clear. If you decide to use a clearing
account for this purpose, create a clearing account in the Cash Accounts range in the general ledger.
About clearing accounts
Some transactions can become quite complex. With clearing accounts, you can create transactions that
prove you have posted the amounts correctly. In addition, clearing accounts provide a means of posting
transactions or balances to accounts that normally do not allow direct posting.
NOTE: Clearing accounts do not carry a balance for any length of time. If you want to hold a transaction
in an account, use a suspense account.
Before posting a transaction, make sure the clearing account does not contain a balance. Posting a
transaction to a clearing account moves a balance into the account. To move the balance from the clearing
account, post a transaction or series of transactions against the clearing account. When the account balance
reaches zero, you have completely posted the balance.
Suppose that you have transferred money from a general checking account to a payroll checking account.
Using a clearing account, you would create a transaction in each account.
Window of entry
Debit
Credit
Checks/Bank Charges
Clearing
General Checking
Deposits/Interest
Payroll Checking
Clearing
About suspense accounts
Suppose your company receives a corporate tax refund, and you want to deposit the check, but you do not
know how to correctly post the transaction. The correct approach is to deposit the check and credit it to a
suspense account in the Cash Accounts range. The amount remains in the suspense account until you
determine where to post the credit.
Suspense accounts provide a temporary location where you can post a transaction until you determine the
proper accounts. Similar in function to a clearing account, suspense accounts allow transactions to pass
through the account. When you post transactions to a suspense account, however, the transactions can
remain for an extended time until you determine the proper accounts.
It is a good idea to use a suspense account in the account range to which you will eventually post the
transactions. For example, you are not sure how to post a transaction related to equipment. You can use a
suspense account in the Equipment range of ledger accounts.
Journal Transactions
About journal transactions
Use the 1-3 Journal Transactions window to review most accounting records. You can also enter adjusting
journal entries and change the status of bank account records. You cannot, however, enter transactions or
34 Sage 100 Contractor
Deposits and Interest
adjusting journal entries for the Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Service Receivables,
Inventory.
Best practices in accounting procedures require that you do not void transactions that have been processed
by the bank. Therefore, it is not possible to void transactions with a status of 2-Cleared.
NOTE: You can create a template for journal transactions from the File menu from an existing record or
from scratch.
Recurring Transactions
About recurring journal transactions
Every business has transactions that recur on a regular basis.
You can set up any transaction that you post on a regular basis for the same amount as a recurring
transaction. You can even set a reminder to prompt users in a specific security group when it is time to post
recurring transactions.
NOTE: You control the posting of recurring transactions to the general ledger. Sage 100 Contractor
does not automatically post recurring transactions.
Use the posting date to determine when to post a recurring transaction. After you post a recurring transaction,
Sage 100 Contractor advances the posting date based on the cycle assigned to the transaction.
The transaction date does not control or affect the period to which you post the transaction. If you need to post
a recurring transaction to a different period, change the posting period.
Examples of recurring transactions
You can set up recurring transactions for identical amounts that you post on a regular basis, such as rent. or
expense allocations.
Transaction
Description
Recurring
Payments
Regular payments such as rents, vehicle insurance, janitorial
services, and subscriptions or dues.
Pre-paid
Expenses
Payments you need to expense over several periods, rather than a
single period, such as a quarterly vehicle insurance payment that
you need to expense monthly.
Create a recurring transaction to post the monthly expense rate,
rather than the quarterly rate.
Product Overview 35
Chapter 3: General Ledger
Transaction
Description
You can depreciate items such as office equipment on a monthly
basis.
Depreciation
After obtaining the annual depreciated amount from your company
accountant, calculate the monthly depreciation. Then set up a
transaction to post the monthly depreciation. You can depreciate
the value of equipment used on a job in the 8-6 Equipment
Depreciation window.
NOTE: You cannot set up recurring transactions for direct expenses, equipment expenses, inventory,
or service receivables.
Bank Reconciliation
About bank reconciliation
IMPORTANT: When your cursor is in the grid area of the 1-5 Bank Reconciliation window, no
function keys except F1 are available. You may launch the calculator (F3) after displaying the 1-5 Bank
Reconciliation window by clicking in the Statement Cutoff Date text box and then pressing F3.
The 1-5 Bank Reconciliation window, similar to a check register, displays transactions that have not
cleared. As you compare the bank statement to the transactions in 1-5 Bank Reconciliation, clear the
transactions listed on the bank statement.
You can display transactions using a specific date. In the Statement Cutoff Date box, enter the statement
ending date to display all transactions through the specified date. Sage 100 Contractor does not display
transactions entered after the indicated date.
Sage 100 Contractor displays transactions in transaction number order. If a check number falls out of
numbered sequence, Sage 100 Contractor displays an asterisk (*) next to the transaction number.
After clearing transactions, save the changes. Cleared items do not appear in the 1-5 Bank Reconciliation
window.
The Statement Beginning Balance box displays the balance as of the last reconciliation. The amount in the
Statement Beginning Balance box does not change until you have cleared transactions and saved the
changes.
When you display records for a checking account, the Statement Ending Balance box displays the balance
as of the last reconciliation. As you change the status of transactions, the amount in the Statement Ending
Balance box changes. A P displayed with a transaction in the Record# column indicates that the transaction
is from a prior year.
After clearing the transactions, the ending balance in 1-5 Bank Reconciliation should match the ending
balance of your bank statement. After reconciling the account with the statement and you save the changes,
Sage 100 Contractor rolls the amount in the Statement Ending Balance box to the Statement Beginning
Balance box.
36 Sage 100 Contractor
Deposits and Interest
NOTE: When saving a reconciliation as Final, the records are updated permanently. You cannot undo a
reconciliation once you have clicked [Final].
Sage 100 Contractor lets you save a trial reconciliation that is only partially completed. You can then return
later to finish the reconciliation.
TIP: The default location when saving the Bank Reconciliation Report as a .pdf file is \MB\your
company\Reports. You can save it to a different location.
About clearing outstanding bank transactions
Before entering outstanding transactions, you may need to clear existing transactions. Such transactions are
usually the result of entering the beginning and period balances.
For the first time reconciliation for a new company, work on only one account at a time. For each bank
account, enter the open bank transactions that are part of the startup ledger balances. If you have written
checks or made deposits that are not included in the startup ledger balances, do not enter them at this time.
Wait until you have finished entering all start up data.
Because the effect of the outstanding bank transactions are already encompassed by the ledger account
balances set up earlier, post the transactions to a clearing account in the period prior to the current period.
Suppose you are setting up during period 7. Post each open transaction to period 6. Then post the journal
transaction to the end of period 6.
Working on the outstanding items for one bank account at a time helps prevent startup errors. After entering
the checks and deposits, enter the journal transaction to zero out the clearing account. Compare your results
to the last reconciliation. Then proceed to the next bank account. You can use the same clearing account to
enter the balances for each bank account.
About reconciliation errors
When you cannot reconcile an account with the bank statement, you need to determine the cause of the error.
You can display all open records when you eliminate the statement cutoff date. This allows you to
immediately search for transactions assigned to an incorrect date or period.
Common reconciliation errors
The following table lists some common reconciliation errors.
Type of
Error
Correction
Incorrect If you posted a transaction with an incorrect amount, the transaction amount between the
posting
reconciliation report and bank statement differs.
Incorrect Checks occasionally clear the bank for a different amount. Look at the magnetic coding at the
bank
base of the check to determine the amount paid by the bank. Compare this amount to the amount
posting
appearing on the bank statement and to the actual amount for which the check was written.
Product Overview 37
Chapter 3: General Ledger
Type of
Error
Correction
If a transaction appears on the bank statement but does not appear in the 1-5 Bank
Incorrect
Reconciliation window, you might have posted the transaction with incorrect dates. To locate
dates
the transaction, use 1-3 Journal Transactions and search for the missing transaction.
Missing
entries
When charges or credits appear on the bank statement but do not appear in your records, post
the charges and reopen 1-5 Bank Reconciliation.
Returned If the bank returns a check due to insufficient funds, reverse the check and post the charge for
items
insufficient funds.
Forged
items
While rare, it is possible that someone has altered a check amount. Another possibility is that
someone has stolen check forms and forged checks.
It is important to identify forgery and alert the bank, thereby eliminating additional problems and
preserving your ability to recover lost funds.
Sage 100 Contractor includes separate year-end processes:
A process for closing payroll
A process for advancing the fiscal year
A process for archiving data in General Ledger
For many companies, the fiscal year end is the same as the calendar year end on December 31, while other
companies have a fiscal year end other than December 31. Throughout this guide, we provide steps for both
your fiscal year end and your calendar year end.
The fiscal and calendar year end can be a busy time. To keep your ledgers current and accurate, audit your
books monthly. Sage recommends performing an additional audit several weeks before your year end to
resolve any errors before beginning transactions for the next fiscal year. However, as of version 19.2, if you
are on period 12 of your current fiscal year, you can begin entering transactions for period 1 of the new fiscal
year even if you are still resolving auditing errors.
After you enter accounting adjustments, resolve any audit errors, and archive your data, make at least two
backup copies of your data for your permanent records.
The time required to complete your year-end processes depends on many factors, such as the size of your
company, any audit errors, and any accounting adjustments. If all of the following conditions are true, you may
be able to finish your year end in a few hours:
You have already backed up your data.
You have been keeping up with accounting period audits.
You only have repairable period audit errors.
38 Sage 100 Contractor
Deposits and Interest
About 1-6 Period and Fiscal Year Management
The 1-6 Period and Fiscal Year Management window provides options for advancing to the next fiscal year
and archiving data from your previous fiscal accounting year. You use this window to advance from one fiscal
period to the next.
If you are on period 12 of your current fiscal year, use this window to advance to the first period of the next
fiscal year.
TIP: Period 1 of the next fiscal year is available while you are still on your current year. You can begin
entering transactions for period 1 of the next fiscal year by selecting the next available fiscal year from
the Posting Period window.Periods 2-12 become available when you advance to the next fiscal year by
clicking [Change Period].
NOTE: This window replaces the "close year" function in previous releases. Beginning with version
19.2, Sage 100 Contractor no longer requires you to close your fiscal year.
What happens when you advance the fiscal year?
Beginning with version 19.2, Sage 100 Contractor no longer requires you to close your books at the end of the
fiscal year.
When you advance the fiscal year (from period 12 of the current year to period 1 of the next fiscal year), Sage
100 Contractor audits your accounting records to verify that valid, balanced transactions support the account
balances. If no errors are present, Sage 100 Contractor advances the accounting period to period 1 of the next
fiscal year. Periods 2-12 of the new fiscal year become available.
If you are on period 12 of your current fiscal year, you can begin entering transactions for period 1 of the new
fiscal year by selecting Period 1 from the Posting Period window or by changing the company period in 1-6
Change Period.
Sage 100 Contractor does not archive your data automatically when you advance the fiscal year. You can
archive your data after advancing the fiscal year by clicking [Archive Fiscal Year] from within the 1-6 Period
and Fiscal Year Management window.
IMPORTANT: Make sure you have posted all the transactions for the year you are archiving. After
archiving, you can post an entry to period 0 in the current books, but you must also open the archive and
make the entry for the previous year.
Change Posting Periods
About the Change Period window
Use the Change Period window to change the default current posting period for the entire program. If you are
on period 12 of your current fiscal year, the window allows you to select period 1 of the next fiscal year. This
feature replaces the "close year" requirement for previous Sage 100 Contractor releases. Instead of closing
your fiscal year, select period 1 of the next fiscal year. You can then archive your data at your earliest
convenience.
Product Overview 39
Chapter 3: General Ledger
Click the arrow key to the right of the Change Period to box Posting Period window to select the default
period and fiscal year.
When you advance to the next posting period or a future posting period, for example from period 1 to period 2
or 2 to 9, the program performs an audit automatically. The audit results are logged in the Audit History
window. After the audit has been completed, you click the button to change the period.
To change the posting period, under Period Selection, type a period number or click the arrow button to open
the Posting Period window from which you can select a posting period.
TIP: No audit is performed when you go backward, for example, from period 2 to period 1.
Standard posting procedures and reporting
If you do not have standard posting procedures, it is a good idea to establish them for your company. For
example, post any corrections to the current fiscal period unless there are other reasons not to do so. Set a
date when you change the period each month. You can post to prior accounting periods after changing the
period, but it is essential to change prior periods so that reports are accurate.
Suppose you have issued financial reports to a lender based on information from period 3. Now in period 5,
you find that you need to make a correction related to data in period 3. Posting the corrections to period 3
changes the data in that period, which impacts the financial reports you have already produced and sent to the
lender. To avoid any problems this might cause, it is better to post the corrections to the current fiscal period.
Audit the Books
About the Audit Books window and auditing the books
When you audit the books of a company, Sage 100 Contractor verifies that the accounts are balanced and
that valid transactions support the balances.
You can audit the books at any time by opening 1-6 Period and Fiscal Year Management > Audit Books
and clicking the Audit Books button. When you audit the books, the program does not make any changes,
but it does log any errors using the Audit History function.
When you advance to a new period in the future, the program audits the books automatically as part of the
process to change the default posting period.
When you start a new company or suspect data corruption, it is a good idea to audit the books and recalculate
balances. If unbalanced data exists, the program alerts you so that you can correct the errors as early as
possible.
TIP: Additional entries cannot fix imbalances and errors. If recalculating balances does not fix the
errors, you may have accounting errors that can only be fixed with the help of Customer Support.
About audit errors
When you advance to the next posting period, click the Audit Books button, or archive a fiscal year, Sage
100 Contractor audits the books to verify that valid, balanced transactions support each account balance. If
the books are out of balance, then the program notifies you that there are audit errors.
40 Sage 100 Contractor
Deposits and Interest
Sage 100 Contractor tracks audit errors in a log. You can access the log from the View Audit History link on
the 1-6 Period and Fiscal Year Management window.
Period Audit Errors
Some audit errors refer specifically to periods. If period audit errors exist, the Audit report displays them
prominently. For example, a period audit error will contain the word Period in the row.
You can resolve most period audit errors by recalculating the ledger balances. To recalculate the ledger
balances, open 1-6 Period and Fiscal Year Management > Recalculate Balances, and then click
Recalculate Balances.
Audit Errors Requiring Customer Support Assistance to Repair
Any remaining audit errors cannot be repaired by clicking Recalculate Balances on 1-6 Period and Fiscal
Year Management > Recalculate Balances. These audit errors might originate in accounts receivable, jobs,
vendors, service clients, equipment, or other areas of the program where transactions originate.
CAUTION: Resolving remaining audit errors after a repair requires assistance from Customer Support.
The Knowledgebase article How do I get technical support for Sage 100 Contractor? provides contact
information and hours of operation. Be prepared to provide your company name, telephone number, and
the company contact person. At that time, a Customer Support technician may request additional reports
to help determine the cause of the error.
Additional audit error reports are now included with Sage 100 Contractor to assist Customer Support
technicians in identifying the transaction sources of audit errors.
Recalculate Balances
About the Recalculate Balances window and repairing the balances
Clicking Recalculate Balances recalculates and repairs the ledger balances, audits, and may resolve period
audit errors. For example, if you notice “Period” errors on the error report, clicking Recalculate Balances often
resolves them.
Resolving remaining audit errors after a repair requires assistance from Customer Support. You can contact
them at 800-866-8049. Be prepared to provide your company name, telephone number, and the company
contact person. At that time, a Customer Support technician may request additional reports to help determine
the cause of the error.
During the repair, Sage 100 Contractor recalculates account and subsidiary account balances. In addition,
Sage 100 Contractor recalculates balances for jobs, vendors, service clients, and equipment.
To repair the ledger balances:
1 Open 1-6 Period and Fiscal Year Management.
2 Click the Recalculate Balances button.
Product Overview 41
Chapter 3: General Ledger
IMPORTANT: After completing the ledger balance repair, Sage 100 Contractor audits the books.
Resolving remaining audit errors after a repair requires assistance from Customer Support. The
Knowledgebase article How do I get technical support for Sage 100 Contractor? provides contact
information and hours of operation. Be prepared to provide your company name, telephone number, and
the company contact person. At that time, a Customer Support technician may request additional reports
to help determine the cause of the error. There are specific audit error reports to help Customer Support
technicians identify the transactions related to some audit errors.
Audit History
About the Audit History window
You open the Audit History window from 1-6 Period and Fiscal Year Management by way of the View
Audit History link located at the bottom-left of the window. Every time you initiate an audit, the program logs
audit history in the window’s grid.
The Audit History window displays three columns, Date, User Name, and Audit Results. The results
displayed can be:
Audit successful. No errors were found.
Repair successful. Errors were found and repaired when the balances were recalculated.
[n] errors detected. A number of errors that couldn’t be repaired and were logged.
The Audit History window also provides menu commands for saving your audit history in several file formats
and for printing the audit history file.
Archive Fiscal Year
The following tasks are performed during this step in the wizard.
Preparation
General Maintenance
Archive your data: Archives 12 periods of data in one company
You can click [Next] only when all tasks have been completed successfully.
To archive your data:
1 From the introductory window, click [Next] then click [Preparation] to begin.
A progress bar shows next to each task as it is running.
When completed, each task displays one of the following icons:
The green
icon indicates that the task ran successfully.
An orange
icon indicates that the task has issues that should be reviewed before continuing.
42 Sage 100 Contractor
Deposits and Interest
A red
icon indicates that the task “failed” and you cannot continue until the issue is resolved. Click
View Results link to display detailed information about the error.
2 Click [Next].
3 Select one or more maintenance options you want to perform prior to archiving then click [Next].
4 Type a name for the company archive in the Enter name for the company archive box. The box cannot
contain any special characters.
NOTE: If the archive folder already exists, it must be empty. Click [Yes] to continue the process or
click [No] to go back to the window.
5 Click [Archive Data] to begin the archive process.
6 Click [Close] to finish the archiving process.
Product Overview 43
Chapter 4: Accounts Receivable
Working with Accounts Receivable
Using Sage 100 Contractor’s robust accounts receivable system, you can receive payments, customize
invoices, statements, overdue reminders, and more to present your clients with professional and personalized
documents. You can also use the sales information in the client database to track customers from initial
contact to job completion.
Sage 100 Contractor provides call sheets and aging reports to improve collection efficiency. For example, you
can produce aging reports at any time, which can reflect the end of any prior fiscal period to match financial
reports for the same period.
The billing options available are contract, progress (American Institute of Architects, or AIA, format; custom
and generic) unitary, and time and materials billing, plus loan draws.
Each billing option offers records of prior and current billing application; prior ones are maintained in full detail
so that you can examine earlier transactions for amounts carried forward.
Invoices, Credits, and Statements
The 3-2 Receivable Invoices/Credits window lets you enter transactions that affect receivable accounts.
You can create invoices or credit invoices, track retention, or view a history of payments for a specific invoice.
You can also create a simple invoice based on the percentage of work completed for the contract. This type of
billing is suitable for subcontractors or small projects.
The Receivable Invoices window also provides the ability to enter taxable and non-taxable items on an
invoice at the same time. When you enter a tax district number in the Tax District text box, you can select the
items to tax in the Taxable column. If you leave the Tax District text box blank, Sage 100 Contractor
assumes each item is non-taxable.
About receivable invoice status
The status of a receivable record indicates its location in the process.
IMPORTANT: You can change the status of records assigned status 1-Open, 2-Review, or 3-Dispute
to another of the first three status settings. However, you cannot assign status 4-Paid or 5-Void.
Status
Description
1-Open
Indicates a record posted to the general ledger.
2-Review
Indicates the management or bookkeeping staff should
review the record.
3-Dispute
Indicates a record disputed by the client.
Product Overview 45
Chapter 4: Accounts Receivable
Status
Description
4-Paid
Indicates a record paid in full.
5-Void
Indicates a voided record.
NOTE: When an invoice or credit is fully paid, Sage 100 Contractor automatically assigns status 4Paid. If you void the record, Sage 100 Contractor automatically assigns status 5-Void.
About receivable invoice types
Type
Description
Use type 1-Contract when the invoice affects the billing
for the contract.
1-Contract
A receivable invoice assigned type 1-Contract increases
the job balance, and a credit invoice with this type reduces
the job balance.
Use type 2-Memo when the invoice does not affect the job
billing for the contract.
2-Memo
For example, when you enter a job deposit as a credit
invoice, assign it 2-Memo so that the credit does not affect
the invoiced to date amount.
You can also use this type with bad debts. Entering a
credit invoice assigned 2-Memo does not reduce the
invoiced to date amount, but clears the debt.
Entering receivable invoices
You can review the record totals before saving the invoice or credit. On the Options menu, click Calculate.
You can provide part numbers on an invoice. Sage 100 Contractor only includes the parts on the invoice, and
does not use the part information elsewhere.
When you enter a tax district number in the Tax District text box, you can select which items to tax. In the
Taxable column, type Yes if the item is taxable, or No if the item is non-taxable.
To enter a receivable invoice
1 Open 3-2 Receivable Invoices/Credits.
2 Do the following:
a In the Invoice# text box, enter the invoice number.
b In the Date text box, enter the date of the invoice.
46 Sage 100 Contractor
Invoices, Credits, and Statements
c In the Job text box, enter the job number.
d If the job uses phases, enter the phase number in the Phase text box.
e In the Description text box, enter a brief statement about the invoice.
f In the Due Date text box, enter the invoice due date.
g In the Discount Date text box, enter the due date by which you must receive payment for the client to
receive the discount.
h In the Status list, click the invoice status.
i In the Type list, click the invoice type. The contract affects the invoiced balance when Type 1-Contract
is selected. Type 2-Memo does not affect the invoiced balance.
3 In the grid, do the following:
a In the Description cell, enter a brief statement about the item.
b In the Quantity cell, enter the quantity of items.
c In the Price cell, enter the price for a single item.
d In the Account cell, enter the ledger account number.
4 Repeat step 3 for each item.
5 In the Discount text box, enter the discount for early payment.
6 On the File menu, click Save.
7 In the Retention text box, enter the amount of retention.
Voiding receivable invoices
If you discover an invoice was entered incorrectly, determine the best method to correct the error. For
example, if the error is in the header information, you can edit the information contained in any of the text
boxes, except in the Job and Tax District text boxes, and re-save the record.
When the invoice contains an incorrect job number, tax district, ledger account, or amount, void the invoice
and then re-enter it with the correct information. By voiding and re-entering the invoice, you create a clear audit
trail.
There are also circumstances when you cannot void the original record. For example, you cannot void a credit
invoice that has been applied in full, or an invoice posted to period 0. Because you cannot void these types of
transactions, it is necessary to enter an adjusting invoice.
Before voiding an invoice, reverse all the payments posted to it. You can then enter the invoice correctly and
reapply the payments.
You can void a receivable invoice with an assigned status of 1-Open, 2-Review, or 3-Dispute.
Product Overview 47
Chapter 4: Accounts Receivable
When voiding an invoice that contains discretionary taxes, Sage 100 Contractor also voids the tax amount. If
the voided invoice reduces the discretionary taxes below the billing maximum, Sage 100 Contractor continues
to calculate the discretionary taxes until the tax maximum is met.
To void a receivable invoice
1 Open 3-2 Receivable Invoices/Credits.
2 Using the data control, select the record.
3 If an amount appears in the Paid text box, reverse the payments.
4 On the Edit menu, click Void Invoice.
Creating invoices based on contract balances
You can create a receivable invoice for a job based on the amount of work completed. Using the original
contract amount or the new contract amount and the amount you have invoiced to date, Sage 100 Contractor
determines the balance remaining on the contract.
When you supply the percentage of the contract that is completed, Sage 100 Contractor computes the
amount to bill. This method is similar to progress billing, but does not provide a detailed breakdown by cost
code of the progress. Instead, the invoice contains a single line describing the percentage of work completed
and the invoice amount. This method of billing is best suited for subcontractors.
To create an invoice based on the contract balance
1 Open 3-2 Receivable Invoices/Credits.
2 Enter the invoice.
3 On the Options menu, click Contract Summary.
4 Choose the type of invoice you want to create by selecting the Percentage of Contract or Percentage of
New Contract option.
5 In the Percent Complete text box, enter the total amount of the contract that is completed.
6 The Amount to Bill text box displays the computed amount. You can edit both figures if necessary.
7 Click OK.
NOTE: Sage 100 Contractor automatically increments the new contract amount as change orders are
approved. The amount billed does not change, but the percent billed changes since it is determined from
the new contract amount.
About receivable credits
IMPORTANT: You cannot reverse a credit invoice after applying it to an invoice. If you apply a credit
invoice to the wrong invoice, make adjusting invoice entries to correct the error.
48 Sage 100 Contractor
Invoices, Credits, and Statements
Many situations could cause you to enter a credit invoice. Suppose a client provides a prepayment on a job, or
overpays an invoice. In either case, it is necessary to reduce the accounts receivable.
When you save a credit invoice, Sage 100 Contractor reduces the job balance. However, the credit invoice
retains status 1-Open until you apply it against other invoices in the 3-3-1 Cash Receipts window. After you
have applied the credit balance to other invoices, Sage 100 Contractor assigns the credit invoice status 4Paid.
You can also apply a credit invoice to an invoice at the time you save the record. If the invoice is fully paid by
means of the credit invoice, Sage 100 Contractor changes the status of the invoice to 4-Paid. If the invoice
still has a balance after applying the credit, the invoice status is not changed. Likewise, if the entire amount of
the credit is applied, the status of the credit invoice changes to 4-Paid. If a credit invoice still has a balance
after applying it to an invoice, the status of the credit invoice remains unchanged. You can then apply the
remaining credit invoice balance to other invoices in the 3-3-1 Cash Receipts window.
Recalculating invoices or credits
After making changes, you can recalculate the new totals.
To calculate the balances, on the Options menu, click Calculate.
About receivable credits
IMPORTANT: You cannot reverse a credit invoice after applying it to an invoice. If you apply a credit
invoice to the wrong invoice, make adjusting invoice entries to correct the error.
Many situations could cause you to enter a credit invoice. Suppose a client provides a prepayment on a job, or
overpays an invoice. In either case, it is necessary to reduce the accounts receivable.
Here are some points to consider:
When entering cash receipts, you can apply the credit invoice.
You can review the record totals before saving the invoice or credit. On the Options menu, click
Calculate.
You can provide part numbers on an invoice. Sage 100 Contractor only includes the parts on the invoice,
and does not use the part information elsewhere.
When you enter a tax district number in the Tax District text box, you can select which items to tax. In
the Taxable column, type Yes if the item is taxable, or No if the item is non-taxable.
When you save a credit invoice, Sage 100 Contractor reduces the job balance. However, the credit invoice
retains status 1-Open until you apply it against other invoices in the 3-3-1 Cash Receipts window. After you
have applied the credit balance to other invoices, Sage 100 Contractor assigns the credit invoice status 4Paid.
To enter a credit invoice
1 Open 3-2 Receivable Invoices/Credits.
2 Do the following:
Product Overview 49
Chapter 4: Accounts Receivable
a In the Invoice# text box, enter the credit invoice number.
b In the Date text box, enter the date of the invoice.
c In the Job text box, enter the job number.
d If the job uses phases, enter the phase number in the Phase text box.
e In the Description text box, enter a brief statement about the invoice.
f In the Due Date text box, enter the invoice due date.
g In the Discount Date text box, enter the due date by which payment must be received for the discount to
apply.
h In the Status list, click the invoice status.
i In the Type list, click the invoice type.
3 In the grid, do the following:
a In the Description cell, enter a brief statement about the item.
b In the Quantity cell, enter the quantity of items as a negative amount.
c In the Price cell, enter the price for a single item.
d In the Account cell, enter the ledger account number.
4 Repeat step 3 for each item.
5 On the File menu, click Save.
You can also apply a credit invoice to an invoice at the time you save the record. If the invoice is fully paid by
means of the credit invoice, Sage 100 Contractor changes the status of the invoice to 4-Paid. If the invoice
still has a balance after applying the credit, the invoice status is not changed. Likewise, if the entire amount of
the credit is applied, the status of the credit invoice changes to 4-Paid. If a credit invoice still has a balance
after applying it to an invoice, the status of the credit invoice remains unchanged. You can then apply the
remaining credit invoice balance to other invoices in the 3-3-1 Cash Receipts window.
To enter a credit invoice and apply it to an invoice
1 Open 3-2 Receivable Invoices/Credits.
2 Do the following:
a In the Invoice# text box, enter the credit invoice number.
b In the Date text box, enter the date of the invoice.
c In the Job text box, enter the job number.
50 Sage 100 Contractor
Invoices, Credits, and Statements
d If the job uses phases, enter the phase number in the Phase text box.
e In the Description text box, enter a brief statement about the invoice.
f In the Reference# text box, enter the receivable invoice number to which you want to apply the credit.
g In the Due Date text box, enter the invoice due date.
h In the Discount Date text box, enter the due date by which must be received for the discount to apply.
i In the Status list, enter the invoice status.
j In the Type list, enter the invoice type.
3 In the grid, do the following:
a In the Description cell, enter a brief statement about the item.
b In the Quantity cell, enter the quantity of items as a negative amount.
c In the Price cell, enter the price for a single item.
d In the Account cell, enter the ledger account number.
4 Repeat step 3 for each item.
5 On the File menu, click Save.
About statements
NOTE: If you have purchased the Service Receivables Add-on Module, invoices from Service
Receivables are also included on the Client Contract Statement.
A statement summarizes the activity of invoices, payments, credit invoices, and retention for a job.
Statements help keep clients informed of the financial activity for a job. It is a good idea to print the
statements at the end of each month and send them to your clients.
When printing a statement, Sage 100 Contractor automatically generates a receivable invoice using the
finance rate from the job record. The statement only includes the finance amount in the statement if the
Calculate Finance Charges check box has been selected. Service receivable finance charge invoices,
however, are based on the finance rate defined for client in 3-6 Receivable Clients.
You can create the finance charges by printing the statements, or you can click the Preview report on
screen button to review it before printing it. You can also print a single statement for a client with whom you
have multiple job contracts. The Client Contract Statement lists the invoices by job and provides the total
amount and remaining balance of each invoice.
NOTE: In some states, it is illegal to charge finance charges on top of finance charges. To exclude
finance charges from a statement, in the 3-4 Report Printing window, clear the Calculate Finance
Charges check box. You can create a separate finance charge statement manually in 3-2 Receivable
.
Product Overview 51
Chapter 4: Accounts Receivable
Accounts Receivable Retention
Many job contracts include retention. When you create a receivable invoice, Sage 100 Contractor withholds
retention at the rate specified in the job file. If you do not set up a default rate in the job file, you can withhold a
flat amount on each individual invoice.
Posting an invoice declares the gross amount of the invoice as income. However, a percentage of the gross
amount is withheld as retention, so the client is actually billed for the net amount (gross invoice amount –
retention = net invoice amount). Therefore, retention is already declared as income but is not yet due.
Consequently, Sage 100 Contractor does not include retention in the invoice aging, and does not apply
finance charges to it.
When you are ready to bill the client for retention, it is not necessary to create a new invoice. The retention has
already been declared income, so you only need to release the retention that has been withheld. You can
release retention on each invoice individually, or you can release the retention for the entire job at one time.
Having released the retention, you can then send the client a statement reflecting the amount that is due your
company.
Changing retention rates for jobs
In the 3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable) window, you can change the retention rate for a job contract simply
by entering the new rate in the Retention Rate text box. Sage 100 Contractor will calculate retention for all
new invoices using the new rate, while existing invoices maintain the previously calculated retention.
You can also apply the new retention rate to all existing job invoices. When you increase the retention rate,
Sage 100 Contractor calculates the new amount of retention based on the gross invoice amount. If the invoice
balance is smaller than the calculated retention, Sage 100 Contractor adjusts the retention accordingly. For
example, the retention is increased from 5% to 10% for a job and the change is applied to all job invoices. A
$1,000 invoice is 95% paid and the remaining $50 balance is for retention. Because the invoice is already 95%
paid, Sage 100 Contractor cannot recalculate retention at the 10% rate on this invoice. Consequently, Sage
100 Contractor does not change the retention for the invoice.
Applying a decreased retention rate can also affect previous invoices. While retention is decreased, the net
balance due on invoices can increase. Suppose you decrease the retention from 10% to 5% for a job and
apply the decrease to all job invoices. The net amount due for a $1,000 invoice was originally $900, but is
changed to $950. If client had paid $900, the client now owes an additional $50, and the last $50 is withheld as
retention.
To change the retention rate for a job
1 Open 3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable), and then select the job.
2 In the RetentionRate text box, enter the new rate.
3 If the new retention rate only applies to new invoices, go to step 5.
4 On the Update menu, click Recalculate Retention.
5 In the New Due Date for Invoices text box, enter the due date you want to assign the invoices.
52 Sage 100 Contractor
Invoices, Credits, and Statements
6 Under Select Recalculation Option, do one of the following:
Select to update Only invoices with Retention, or
Select to update All invoices.
7 Click OK.
8 On the File menu, click Save.
Entering retention as a flat rate for accounts receivable invoices
You can add a retention rate to the entire job which applies a single retention rate to all the job invoices. You
can also enter retention to individual invoices as a flat rate.
To enter retention as a flat rate for accounts receivable retention:
1 Open 3-2 Receivable Invoices/Credits.
2 Locate the invoice to which you want to add retention.
3 Under the grid, locate the Retention box, type an amount, and the press Enter key.
4 Select File > Save.
Releasing retention for jobs
To release retention for a job:
1 Open 3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable), and then select the job.
2 Under the Terms area, select the Retention Rate value, and then click the Delete key.
3 On the Update menu, click Recalculate Retention.
4 On the Recalculate Retention window in the New Due Date for Invoices box, type a new due date.
5 Under the Recalculation Option area, do one of the following:
Select to update Only invoices with Retention, or
Select to update All invoices.
6 Click OK.
7 On the File menu, click Save.
TIP: You can verify that retention has been released by clicking the Invoices button (bottom of the
window) and reviewing the Net Due amount.
Product Overview 53
Chapter 4: Accounts Receivable
Releasing retention for jobs and printing statements
When you bill a customer for retention for a job that is 100 percent complete, it is not necessary to create a
new invoice. The retention is included on the invoices created from 3-7 Progress Billing applications. This
three-part procedure shows you how to release retention, print a progress billing report, and then print a job
statement to request final payment.
IMPORTANT: All past due accounts receivable invoices must have been collected before completing
this procedure.
Part 1—To close the current bill, release retention, and print a progress billing report
1. Open 3-7 Progress Billing.
2. Open the last application with a Status 3-Posted for the job.
3. Click Next.
4. To the message, Reminder: A new record will be created and this one will become Closed. Do
you want to continue? click Yes.
5. Be sure to note the amount in the Retention Rate box.
6. From the Update menu, select Release Retention.
7. To the message, This will reset all retention rates to zero and recalculate the application. Do
you want to continue? click Yes.
8. On the Calculate grid, choose a method to calculate the Progress Billing and click OK.
NOTE: The Retention Total amount becomes the Current Due amount.
9. From the File menu, select Save.
10. From the File menu, select Recall.
11. From the Options menu, select Submit Application.
12. From the File menu, select Print.
13. Print the appropriate Progress Billing report, reports 21—42, and send this report to your customer to
show the retention amount is now due.
14. Close the 3-7 Report Printing window.
NOTE: The final application remains in Submitted status because there is not an invoice amount to
post.
Part 2—To recalculate the retention and due dates
IMPORTANT: If you complete this part and have not received payments for amounts outside of
retention, the current balance due will reflect retention and any outstanding amounts. This could be
perceived that current receivables are overstated.
1. Open 3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable), and select the job.
2. In the Terms section of the window, clear the Retention Rate.
54 Sage 100 Contractor
Cash Receipts and Electronic Receipts
3. From the Update menu, select Recalculate Retention.
4. On the Recalculate Retention window, enter the New Due Date for Invoices and select the
appropriate Recalculation option.
5. Click OK, and to the message to confirm the number of open invoices found, click OK again.
6. From the File menu, click Save.
7. Then, on the 3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable) window, click the Invoices button and review the Net
Due amount to verify the retention has been released.
Part 3—To print a 3-4 Statement for detailed billing information
1. Open 3-4 Statements.
2. Select the 21-Job Statements report.
3. In the Job# box, type the job number.
4. Select the Include Paid Invoices check box.
5. Select the Include Payment History check box.
6. From the File menu, click Print.
7. On the Statement Variables window, type the Statement Date, and click OK.
8. The statement prints showing all outstanding amounts due, including the released retention.
9. Close the 3-4 Report Printing window.
Many job contracts include retention. When you create a receivable invoice, Sage 100 Contractor withholds
retention at the rate specified in the job file. If you do not set up a default rate in the job file, you can withhold a
flat amount on each individual invoice.
Posting an invoice declares the gross amount of the invoice as income. However, a percentage of the gross
amount is withheld as retention, so the client is actually billed for the net amount (gross invoice amount –
retention = net invoice amount). Therefore, retention is already declared as income but is not yet due.
Consequently, Sage 100 Contractor does not include retention in the invoice aging, and does not apply
finance charges to it.
When you are ready to bill the client for retention, it is not necessary to create a new invoice. The retention has
already been declared income, so you only need to release the retention that has been withheld. You can
release retention on each invoice individually, or you can release the retention for the entire job at one time.
Having released the retention, you can then send the client a statement reflecting the amount that is due your
company.
Cash Receipts and Electronic Receipts
About cash receipts
In the 3-3-1 Cash Receipts window, you can enter payments for invoices, discounts for early payment of
invoices, and overpayments. You can also reverse payments using this window.
Product Overview 55
Chapter 4: Accounts Receivable
If you have a merchant account with Sage Payment Solutions, you can use the 3-3-2 Electronic Receipts
window to enter credit card and ACH payments electronically for your clients.
For information about electronic receipts, see See "About electronic receipts" on page 56
Applying receipts
To process receipts, you display client invoices in the 3-3-1 Cash Receipts window, select the invoice being
paid, and then enter the amount of the payment and any applicable discount or overpayment. If the payment
includes a credit invoice, you enter a negative amount for that invoice.
If a client pays more than the net amount of an invoice but less than the invoice balance, Sage 100 Contractor
applies the payment to the retention. For example, suppose you created an invoice for $1000 minus 10%
retention, resulting in a net total of $900. The client, however, sends a $950 payment. After entering the
payment in cash receipts, the total balance due is $50 and the Retention column shows a balance of $50. It is
important to note that this is not a substitute for releasing retention.
Entering overpayments
When a client pays more than the total balance of an invoice, you can enter the additional money as an
overpayment. The total amount of the Paid and Discount cells must equal the amount in the Balance cell
before Sage 100 Contractor allows you to enter the overpayment. When you save the cash receipts, Sage 100
Contractor reduces the job balance by the amount of the overpayment. In addition, the invoice now carries a
negative balance and acts as a credit invoice.
Suppose a client informs you that he is going on vacation for a few weeks. The client wants to make sure you
have enough money to continue building while he is gone, so instead of paying the $5,000 he was billed, he
pays $10,000. For the invoice, enter $5,000 in the Paid cell and $5,000 in the Overpayment cell. After saving
transactions, the invoice now carries a –$5,000 balance. The next time you invoice the client, you can apply
the credit.
Applying discounts
Sometimes clients receive a discount for early payment. Sage 100 Contractor automatically determines
whether a discount is available based on the due date you indicated on the invoice. When a discount is
available, it is shown in the Discount Available text box. If a discount is not available, you can still apply a
discount to an invoice.
About reversing payments and discounts
The Cash Receipts window also allows you to reverse payments and discounts. To reverse payments, you
enter a negative amount in the Paid column and in the discount column, if the client took a discount.
If the reversal is for a credit invoice, you enter a positive amount in the Paid column.
About electronic receipts
If you have a merchant account with Sage Payment Solutions, you can use the 3-3-2 Electronic Receipts
window to enter credit card and ACH payments electronically for your clients.
56 Sage 100 Contractor
Cash Receipts and Electronic Receipts
NOTE: Before you can process electronic receipts, you must enter your Sage Payment Solutions
merchant ID and merchant key, as well as the general ledger account associated with your merchant
account, on the Electronic Receipts Setup tab in the 7-2 Company Information window.
Processing electronic receipts is very similar to processing cash receipts using the 3-3-1 Cash Receipts
window, with a few notable differences:
You process an electronic receipt for one client at a time. Therefore:
You need to enter only the Client number in the transaction header.
You display invoices for the selected client in the grid.
If you use the company option to store client information in the Sage Exchange Vault:
You can select Save payment information to save payment information that you enter for a
transaction and client securely in the Sage Exchange Vault.
If you processed a payment for the client previously, you can choose to use the same payment
method as before.
If you also saved the client's payment information in the vault:
If the last payment method was a credit card, the option Use last credit card is displayed instead
of Use last payment method. If you select this option, when you click Process and Post, the
credit card details stored in the vault for this customer appear on the Sage Exchange integration
screen. You can change the credit card information on the Sage Exchange screen.
If the last payment method was ACH, the option Use last bank account appears instead. If you
select this option, when you click Process and Post, the banking information stored in the vault
for this customer appear on the Sage Exchange integration screen. You can change the banking
information on the Sage Exchange screen.
CAUTION: If you do not want to use the same payment method used previously for the
customer, you must clear the Use last credit card or Use last bank account option before you
submit the payment to Sage Payment Solutions. If one of these options is selected when you
click Process and Post, you will not be able to change the payment method in Sage Exchange.
Rather than clicking Save to store receipt transactions, you use the following icons or Options menu
items:
You click Process and Post to process a receipt electronically through Sage Payment Solutions,
where it will be deposited to your bank account, and post the transaction to your Sage 100 Contractor
General Ledger.
You click Post to post a transaction to your Sage 100 Contractor general ledger that you entered
directly through the Sage Virtual Terminal or using another payment processing service.
Applying receipts
To process receipts, you display client invoices the 3-3-2 Electronic Receipts window, select the invoice
being paid, and then enter the amount of the payment and any applicable discount or overpayment. If the
payment includes a credit invoice, you enter a negative amount for that invoice.
Product Overview 57
Chapter 4: Accounts Receivable
If a client pays more than the net amount of an invoice but less than the invoice balance, Sage 100 Contractor
applies the payment to the retention. For example, suppose you created an invoice for $1000 minus 10%
retention, resulting in a net total of $900. The client, however, sends a $950 payment. After entering the
payment in cash receipts, the total balance due is $50 and the Retention column shows a balance of $50. It is
important to note that this is not a substitute for releasing retention.
Entering overpayments
When a client pays more than the total balance of an invoice, you can enter the additional money as an
overpayment. The total amount of the Paid and Discount cells must equal the amount in the Balance cell
before Sage 100 Contractor allows you to enter the overpayment. When you save the cash receipts, Sage 100
Contractor reduces the job balance by the amount of the overpayment. In addition, the invoice now carries a
negative balance and acts as a credit invoice.
Suppose a client informs you that he is going on vacation for a few weeks. The client wants to make sure you
have enough money to continue building while he is gone, so instead of paying the $5,000 he was billed, he
pays $10,000. For the invoice, enter $5,000 in the Paid cell and $5,000 in the Overpayment cell. After saving
transactions, the invoice now carries a –$5,000 balance. The next time you invoice the client, you can apply
the credit.
Applying discounts
Sometimes clients receive a discount for early payment. Sage 100 Contractor automatically determines
whether a discount is available based on the due date you indicated on the invoice. When a discount is
available, it is shown in the Discount Available text box. If a discount is not available, you can still apply a
discount to an invoice.
About Sage Payment Solutions
Using Sage Payment Solutions with Sage 100 Contractor saves you time, helps you get paid faster, and
eliminates the need to enter payment information twice. Simply enter your customer's check or credit card
payment details once in Sage 100 Contractor, and the payment will be processed in Sage 100 Contractor and
Sage Payment Solutions, in one easy step.
With the integration between Sage 100 Contractor and Sage Payment Solutions, you can process check and
credit card transactions without storing your customers’ sensitive card information in your database. Sage
Exchange transmits check and credit card details through a secure connection to Sage Payment Solutions,
where they are stored in a PCI-compliant vault, protecting you from exposure to non-compliance penalties and
credit card fraud.
In addition to providing integrated payment processing, Sage Payment Solutions also offers gift and loyalty
card programs, merchant cash advances and loans, non-profit and healthcare payment solutions, and more.
To learn more about Sage Payment Solutions, visit http://na.sage.com/us/sage-payment-solutions.
Electronic receipt processing workflow
1. Open a Sage Payment Solutions account, linking it to the bank account to which you want to Sage
Payment Solutions to deposit funds.
2. When you have received your Merchant ID and Merchant Key from Sage Payment Solutions, enter
58 Sage 100 Contractor
Jobs
these credentials on the Electronic Receipts Setup tab in the 7-2 Company Information window. Also
on this tab:
Enter the Sage 100 Contractor ledger account that represents the bank account used to receive
deposits from Sage Payment Solutions.
Specify whether to allow client credit card and bank account information to be securely stored in the
Sage Exchange Vault.
3. Use the 3-3-2 Electronic Receipts window to record and post credit card receipts and ACH checks in
your Sage 100 Contractor general ledger and to transfer the payment details to Sage Exchange.
Alternatively, you can use the Electronic Receipts window to keep your Sage 100 Contractor ledger up
to date by recording and posting receipts that you entered directly in the Sage Exchange Portal.
4. Use the 1-3 Journal Transactions window to:
View the journal entry created for an electronic receipt.
View details of an electronic receipt.
Print a copy of an electronic receipt.
Jobs
When you create a job in the 3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable) window, Sage 100 Contractor creates a
record containing job-related information such as important contract dates, job financial information, and jobrelated contacts. In addition, the 3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable) window provides a variety of tools to help
you manage contracts, such as pre-liens and lien releases. You may also create phases or bid items to divide
work into more manageable sections.
Billing information such as the client, job architect, engineer, or project lender, may also be included as part of
the job record. For example, when you supply the client number, Sage 100 Contractor includes the client
information on invoices printed for that job. If you include the architect or engineer’s name in the job record
when using progress or unitary billing, Sage 100 Contractor uses that information when creating a progress or
unitary bill. If you include the lender, Sage 100 Contractor uses the lender information when creating a loan
draw document. You can also set job level security for each job.
You may manage all your jobs directly from your Project Work Center. You may also create a desktop
shortcut to Project Work Center and place it on the Sage 100 Contractor Desktop. This gives you the
power to access all your job-related data from one place.
Phases
NOTE: Job phases, in contrast to bid items, affect estimates and some billing items and follow through
the entire job.
IMPORTANT: Phase 0-None is merely a place holder representing the fact that you are not using
phases. To use phases, you must begin with phase 1 or higher.
Using phases in a job affects all its aspects, for example:
Product Overview 59
Chapter 4: Accounts Receivable
Job schedules
The job budget
All document control
Purchase orders
Subcontracts
Change orders
Proposals
Project management reports and analysis
Job costs
Change orders
Payables
Billing
Phases organize jobs and can represent different sections of a job, such as different buildings or lots. You can
also use phases to distinguish different types of work, such as change orders or site work. Because phases
flow through the entire job, they do not restrict which billing methods you can use.
Suppose a contract is for the construction of five houses. To track costs that benefit the entire project, create
a phase for the project costs. Then create a phase for each lot. The list of phases might look like following:
Phase #
Description
100
Project costs
200
116 Maple Street
300
124 Maple Street
400
130 Maple Street
500
140 Maple Street
600
160 Maple Street
Phases can include the billing amount and model number. The billing amount represents the total amount you
are billing for the phase. When working on subdivisions, you can track which model home to build on each lot
by assigning the appropriate model number to each phase.
You can also include a unit of measure and quantity measured in each phase. To continue the example above,
the plans provide the total square footage for each house; therefore, enter square feet as the units and the total
square footage of the house as the quantity.
Bid Items
IMPORTANT: Bid items, in contrast to job phases, only affect estimates and some billing items and do
not follow through the entire job.
60 Sage 100 Contractor
Jobs
Bid items provide a way to divide estimates into smaller parts. You use bid items to segment estimates into
smaller units and/or to satisfy external requirements for bidding and billing a job. Bid items affect these line
items: Daily Field Reports, Proposal, and Unitary Billing.
Bid items can be entered in either 9-5 Takeoffs or in 3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable). There are four bid
item types: 1-Base Bid, 2-Allowance, 3-Alternate, and 4-Change Order. Bid items may follow the general
schema of the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI), such as 1-General Conditions, 2-Site Work, 3Concrete, and so on, or they may be specific to your business needs.
Bid items can provide a solution when a client or lender requires you to submit a proposal based on bid items.
Some contractors even use bid items internally as another way to track project data. The bid item categories
can differ from job to job and are not necessarily determined by types of work performed. After the list of bid
items is set up for a job, you can use the bid items when creating an estimate budget and proposal. In addition,
you can create unitary bills by bid item. You can also use the Item Code column to reference alphanumeric
codes, which are required by many projects.
You can provide overhead and profit rates for each bid item. When you calculate a takeoff the first time, Sage
100 Contractor applies the appropriate overhead and profit rates to the extended costs of the assemblies and
parts listed under each bid item. You can update or change the overhead and profit rates from the Bid Items
window at any time.
Examples of bid items
Some jobs require contractors to use bid items as a means of breaking apart costs into different categories.
Bid items can vary greatly from job to job. Some jobs might only use a few bid items, while others might use
well over 100 bid items.
The following example illustrates a short list of bid items for the repair of a water system:
Row
Item#
Item Code
Description
1
0
None
1—Base Bid
2
1000
Tie in to 8” water main
3
2000
6” water line
4
3000
4” water line
5
5000
Fire hydrant
6
6000
Water service with meter
Some jobs require a more extensive list of bid items. The following example illustrates a more comprehensive
list for the construction of an elementary school:
Row
Item#
Item Code
Description
1
0
None
1—Base Bid
2
1000
General requirements
Product Overview 61
Chapter 4: Accounts Receivable
Row
Item#
Item Code
Description
3
2000
Rough grading/utilities
4
3000
Site concrete
5
5000
Paving
6
6000
Landscaping
7
7000
Foundation slabs
8
8000
Wood framing
9
9000
Insulation
Paygroups for Jobs
Companies that work different prevailing-wage jobs at the same time can use paygroups to manage the wage
and benefit requirements for each job. For each prevailing-wage job, you can set up a table of paygroups and
employee positions.
When you enter a job number on a timecard, Sage 100 Contractor looks at the job record to determine if it
contains a table of paygroups. Sage 100 Contractor then compares the employee’s position number from the
employee record with the position number assigned to each paygroup in the job record. When Sage 100
Contractor matches the employee’s position with a position assigned to a paygroup, it inserts the paygroup in
the timecard line.
Because Sage 100 Contractor uses employee positions to determine the correct paygroup, it is important to
assign a different employee position to each paygroup in the table. Otherwise, Sage 100 Contractor uses the
first paygroup it finds with the correct position, ignoring other paygroups that contain the same employee
position.
In some companies, employees perform different types of work over the course of a job, and a single
paygroup cannot cover the different wages and benefits paid based on the type of work performed. Therefore,
it is necessary to set up the list of job-specific paygroups differently.
Receivable Clients
Use the 3-6 Receivable Clients window to store information about past, current, and future clients as well as
manage the sales process and track client related issues. To help manage sales, you can keep track of
referrals, appointments, and call back dates. You can even keep track of when you last mailed a brochure to a
client. In addition, you can set up customized lists to provide information about the lead source, region,
company size, and to which mailing list they have been assigned.
Using information from the client database, you can create all kinds of client-related documents and reports.
For example, the Greeting text box, in which you can enter a personalized greeting such as the owner’s
nickname, provides a way to personalize documents. When creating the form design, you can insert a field
62 Sage 100 Contractor
Receivable Clients
representing the information in the Greeting text box. Then when you print the document, Sage 100
Contractor replaces the field with the information from the Greeting text box.
Tax Districts and Tax Entities
Most states and many cities impose taxes on sales. The seller must add the tax to the selling price and then
pay the taxes to the government. In the construction trades, contractors are usually not responsible for
collecting taxes. However, certain types of work require contractors to collect and remit sales taxes to the
appropriate government agency. The Tax Districts window provides the flexibility necessary to manage,
compute, and report the individual sales taxes levied by state, county, and municipal governments.
When you create an invoice, Sage 100 Contractor determines the sales taxes from the indicated tax district. A
tax district is comprised of a group of tax entities to which you report the taxes collected within that particular
region. Before you can create a tax district, you must create the tax entities.
After you have set up the various tax entities, you can build different tax districts from them. For a given tax
district you can include five tax entities, indicate which cost types are taxable, and indicate whether profit is
taxable. To calculate taxes, Sage 100 Contractor separately computes the tax for each entity contained in the
tax district, but on the invoice provides a total of the taxes.
Suppose a contractor works in a given state. In the state the sales tax rate is 7.25 percent, and in addition, a
given county has a 0.25 percent sales tax rate. Before creating a tax district, the tax entities, titled (State) and
(Name) County, are set up, each with its specified rate. The contractor then creates tax district 1-(Name)
County, CA, which contains the tax entities (State) and (Name) County. When setting up job records for
projects in the county, the contractor can include the tax district. Later when entering invoices, Sage 100
Contractor automatically uses tax district 1-(Name) County, CA and computes the appropriate state and
county taxes.
You can also set up tax entities to compute discretionary surtaxes. When calculating the taxes for a job, both
the sales tax and the discretionary surtax apply until the total of the taxable items on the billing invoice(s)
equal or exceed the maximum. At that time, the discretionary surtax no longer applies, and only the sales tax
continues to apply.
Sales tax requirements differ from region to region. In one region you might not have to report any sales tax,
while in another region you might need to report taxes on everything but subcontract work. Before setting up
the tax districts, consult the local tax agencies to determine the correct tax rates.
Lead Management
Use the Sales and Marketing tab in the 3-6 Receivable Clients window to manage clients and sales leads.
You can provide information such as the date when you received the sales lead, indicate the source of the
lead, and determine which mail list to use for that particular client.
Using the client information, you can create custom reports to examine your customer base, create targeted
customer newsletters or marketing campaigns, or even create a mailing list for holiday cards.
Product Overview 63
Chapter 4: Accounts Receivable
Progress Billing
About progress billing for jobs
The 3-7 Progress Billing window provides a system for creating progress billings, with each new application
building on the previous submitted application for a job. Then under each job, Sage 100 Contractor assigns
each application its own application number. Most progress bills are printed on AIA certificates.
Creating a progress bill requires that you provide some basic information in the Progress Billing Setup
window. You can provide the name of the architect and the architect’s job number for the project, as well as
the income posting account, tax district number, retention rates, and a maximum for retention.
To create an application, import the cost codes or divisions from the job’s budget or proposal. You can then
select several ways to automatically update the cost information from the job cost records. When you select
the Percent from Costs option, Sage 100 Contractor displays the actual job costs and calculates the percent
of work completed by comparing the job costs against the budget. You can instead select either the From
Cost Amounts or From Billing Amounts option to display only the amounts for each cost code.
When you create an application, Sage 100 Contractor assigns it status 1-Open. After you have submitted the
application, submit the record in Sage 100 Contractor by clicking the Submit button. Sage 100 Contractor
then changes the application’s status to 2-Submitted. When the billing is approved, post the billing by clicking
the Post button. Sage 100 Contractor creates an invoice, posts it to the general ledger, and then changes the
application’s status to 3-Posted. When you want to create the next application, click the Next button. Sage
100 Contractor assigns the posted application status 4-Closed, moves the costs from the Current Quantity
column to the Previous Quantity column, and advances the number in the Application# text box.
You can also update the costs of the change work to the progress bill. You can either incorporate the changes
to the costs in the cost codes or divisions, or include the total amount of the change order as a separate line
item.
Loan Draw Requests
About loan draw requests
The 3-8 Loan Draw Requests window provides a system for creating loan draw applications. For each job,
you create a series of applications with each new application building on the previous application submitted to
the lender. Under each job, Sage 100 Contractor assigns each application its own application number.
To create the first loan draw application, import the cost codes from the job’s budget or proposal. You can then
select from several ways to automatically update the cost information from the job cost records. When you
select the Percent from Costs option, Sage 100 Contractor displays the actual job costs and calculates the
percent of work completed by comparing the job costs against the budget. You can instead select the From
Cost Amounts or From Billing Amounts option to display only the amounts for each cost code.
64 Sage 100 Contractor
Unitary Billing
If the lender requires specific classes that differ from your cost codes, you can manually enter the lender’s
classes. However, there is no relationship between the lender’s classes and your cost codes. Therefore, you
will have to update the loan draw applications manually.
When you create an application, Sage 100 Contractor assigns it status 1-Open. After you have submitted the
application to the lender, submit the record in Sage 100 Contractor by clicking the Submit button. Sage 100
Contractor then changes the application’s status to 2-Submitted. When you want to create the next
application, click the Next button. Sage 100 Contractor assigns the submitted application status 4-Closed,
and then creates the next application in the series.
In the 6-4-1 Change Orders window, you can also automatically update the costs of the change work to the
loan draw application. You can either incorporate the changes to costs in the individual cost codes, or include
the total amount of the change order as a separate line item.
Unitary Billing
About unitary billing for jobs
With certain types of work, it is more difficult to estimate the amount of work necessary to complete the job.
For example, with grading or excavation work it proves easier for a contractor to bill for the number of units of
earth moved. The Unitary Billing window provides a system for creating a series of unit-based applications,
with each new application building on the previous application for a job.
Creating a unitary bill requires that you provide some basic information in the Unitary Billing Setup window.
You can provide the name of the architect and the architect’s job number for the project, as well as the income
posting account, tax district number, and the retention rate.
To create an application, import the bid items from the job’s unitary proposal. You can then enter the number of
units of work completed. If change orders are issued, you can also enter the units of change. When you
calculate the application, Sage 100 Contractor determines the billing amount based on the units of change and
the units of work completed.
When you create an application, Sage 100 Contractor assigns it status 1-Open. After you have submitted the
application, submit the record in Sage 100 Contractor by clicking the Submit button. Sage 100 Contractor
then changes the application’s status to 2-Submitted. When the billing is approved, post the billing by clicking
the Post button. Sage 100 Contractor creates an invoice, posts it to the general ledger, and then changes the
application’s status to 3-Posted. When you want to create the next application, click the Next button. Sage
100 Contractor assigns the posted application status 4-Closed, moves the costs from the Current Quantity
column to the Previous Quantity column, and advances the number in the Application# text box.
Time and Materials
About time and materials billing
You can bill clients on a cost-plus basis, which is the cost for time and materials plus overhead and profit.
Sage 100 Contractor uses the job cost records as the basis for the billing amounts on the time and materials
(T&M) invoices.
Product Overview 65
Chapter 4: Accounts Receivable
When setting up a job for T&M billing, you can:
Assign separate overhead and profit markup rates to each cost type.
Assign a shown markup rate to each cost type.
Assign a hidden markup rate to each cost type. When you calculate T&M invoices, Sage 100 Contractor
adds the hidden markup to the job cost. The other markups shown, overhead and profit, are computed on
top of the new billing amount. The hidden markup does not appear on the T&M invoice.
Assign wage rate and equipment rate tables to the job. You can use the tables in place of using labor and
equipment costs plus hidden markup. In addition, you can set a minimum daily charge, which is the
minimum number of hours per laborer , or you can set the minimum units per piece of equipment to
charge.
Suppose you own a backhoe and determine it is necessary to charge a minimum of three hours to recover the
costs of ownership, maintenance, and mobilization. At a job site, you only use the backhoe for one hour.
When you allocate the equipment use, Sage 100 Contractor bills the client for three hours instead of one.
Consider the following additional points:
If equipment records contain rental billing rates, Sage 100 Contractor creates the job cost with the rental
billing rate in the Billing Amount text box and with the Override check box selected. The program uses
this amount when calculating the T&M Invoices even if an Equipment Rate table is selected for the T &
M job.
If you want to use the T & M Equipment Rate table you must either: (1) clear the Override check box on
the job cost record and exclude billing rates from the equipment record before the job cost records are
created; or (2) enter the job cost record directly into 6-3 Job Cost record.
If equipment records do not contain billing rates when you calculate the T & M invoices, Sage 100
Contractor replaces the billing amount with the rate from the Equipment Rate table. If an Equipment
Rate table is not assigned to the T&M job, Sage 100 Contractor replaces the billing amount with the cost
plus hidden markup.
Recurring Receivables
About recurring receivables
You use the 3-11 Recurring Receivables window to set up recurring transactions for receivable invoices that
you post regularly the same amount.
You can set up any transaction that you post on a regular basis for the same amount as a recurring
transaction. You can even set a reminder to prompt users in a specific security group when it is time to post
recurring transactions.
NOTE: You control the posting of recurring transactions to the general ledger. Sage 100 Contractor
does not automatically post recurring transactions.
Use the posting date to determine when to post a recurring transaction. After you post a recurring transaction,
Sage 100 Contractor advances the posting date based on the cycle assigned to the transaction.
66 Sage 100 Contractor
Recurring Receivables
The transaction date does not control or affect the period to which you post the transaction. If you need to post
a recurring transaction to a different period, change the posting period.
To prevent the duplication of invoice numbers, Sage 100 Contractor assigns a unique invoice number to each
recurring receivable transaction. The invoice number is the combination of a record number and an invoice
sequence number.
Product Overview 67
Chapter 5: Accounts Payable
Working with Accounts Payable
This section of Sage 100 Contractor, 4-Accounts Payable, contains the following subsections:
4-1 Payable Reports—You can run reports to gather and analyze data about your payables. For more
information, see
4-2 Payable Invoice/Credits—You can enter transactions, create invoices or credit invoices that affect
vendors, track and release retention, view a history of payments for specific invoices, and print and post
two-party checks. For more information, see
4-3 Vendor Payments—You can print (single-party or two-party) checks, vouchers, and lien waivers for
payable invoices and apply credit invoices to invoices. For more information, see
4-4 Vendors (Accounts Payable)—You can access to vendor information for payable invoices, 1099
balances, ordering materials, and subcontract management. Create a vendor record for each business
that sends you invoices and each business to which you owe money or make regular payments. For
more information, see
4-5 Vendor 1099—The program tracks and maintains balances for the 1099 reports. Including the
vendor number on a vendor check or general ledger check, increases the 1099 balance for that vendor.
Voiding the check, decreases the 1099 balance by the check amount for that vendor.
4-6 Recurring Payables—You can set up recurring payable transactions that have a consistent amount
from invoice to invoice and post them on a regular basis. This feature allows you to retain complete
control of when to post transactions.
4-7 Credit Card Management—You can set up the accounting to manage your business credit cards as
part of your regular accounting. Features include setting up accounts, entering receipts, reconciling
statements, and paying your credit card bill.
Using the Accounts Payable tools in Sage 100 Contractor, you can manage payable invoices with an
accounts payable system that is fully integrated with purchase orders, subcontracts, change orders, job
costing, and inventory functions. For example, you can enter a purchase order number to complete your
invoice entry in one step. The payable invoice window automatically fills in and performs job costing to ensure
that you’re not overcharged or receiving items that you have not approved.
The system automatically posts recurring invoices for expenses such as rent, loan payments, and vehicle
purchases. You can track Workers’ Compensation, liability insurance, and license expiration dates of
subcontractors. You can even track individual subcontracts, enabling you to manage retention and prevent
payment in case there is a dispute.
You can select from a wide variety of check and voucher formats or create your own. Choose multiple check
stubs or special check reports to list all invoices paid and automatically generate lien releases with checks or
vouchers. You can make partial payments and designate multiple payees on any invoice, and then you can
decide which credits to apply to a payment prior to running checks. You can run aging reports “as of” the end of
any prior period to match financials even after the period has been closed. The extensive reporting options
include compliance reports and 1099 forms.
Product Overview 69
Chapter 5: Accounts Payable
Most businesses use credit cards for purchases and payments and Sage 100 Contractor helps you manage
your credit card accounts. You can create and edit card issuer accounts and then and manage your receipts
and charges. Then you can follow those tasks with reconciling your statements and monitoring your
payments.
Payable Invoices/Credits
About payable invoices
In the 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits window, you can enter transactions that affect vendor accounts. You
can create payable invoices or credit invoices, track and release retention, or view a history of payments for a
specific invoice.
Another critical tool for managing vendors is the ability to print and post two-party checks. From the 4-2
Payable Invoices/Credits window, you can access the Secondary Payees window to manage such
invoices. Secondary payees are most often involved with subcontractor invoices because they have subvendor suppliers who have lien rights to the project. It is critical to ensure that these suppliers get paid. The
use of two-party checks provides this assurance.
A number of other features enhance record entry. When you select the Manufacturer Details option, Sage
100 Contractor includes the manufacturer’s name and part number in the description of each part. To help
manage inventory, select the Allow Freight/Variance option to post variances in material or freight costs.
When you have finished entering records, use the batch list to verify the invoice totals against the actual
invoice totals. The Use PO Sales Tax option is enabled automatically. If you enter an invoice using
information from a purchase order, the sales tax is calculated automatically.
Some states do not require subcontractors to carry Workers’ Compensation insurance. In these states, the
subcontractors use the general contractor’s insurance policy for the duration of the job, and the general
contractor deducts the cost of coverage from payments to the subcontractor. Check with your state for
compliance requirements as the laws vary in each state. When entering a payable invoice for a subcontractor,
you can calculate the cost of coverage and add it to the invoice as a credit.
Use the Remove Paid/Void Invoices option to remove paid or voided invoices meeting the following criteria:
The status is Paid or Void.
The invoice does not have a job number.
Associated payments have been posted prior to the current year.
About payable credits
There are many circumstances when you might have to enter a credit invoice. Suppose you return materials to
a vendor. With the return of the materials, it is necessary to reduce the accounts payable.
When you save a credit invoice, Sage 100 Contractor reduces the vendor balance. However, the credit
invoice retains status 1-Open until you apply it against other invoices in the Vendor Payments window. After
you have applied the credit balance to other invoices, Sage 100 Contractor assigns the credit invoice status 4Paid.
70 Sage 100 Contractor
Payable Invoices/Credits
You can also apply a credit invoice to an invoice at the time you save the record. If the invoice is fully paid by
means of the credit invoice, Sage 100 Contractor changes the status of the invoice to 4-Paid. If the invoice
still has a balance after applying the credit, the invoice status is not changed. Likewise, if the entire amount of
the credit is applied, the status of the credit invoice changes to 4-Paid. If a credit invoice still has a balance
after applying it to an invoice, the status of the credit invoice remains unchanged. You can then apply the
remaining credit invoice balance to other invoices in the Vendor Payments window.
IMPORTANT: You cannot reverse a credit invoice after applying it to an invoice. If you have applied a
credit invoice to the wrong invoice, make reversing entries to correct the error.
Sales and Use Taxes
Using the purchase order sales tax
When you enter a new invoice using information from a specific purchase order, the sales tax defaults from
the selected purchase order to the new invoice in the 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits window. The sales tax
appears in the grid and calculates into the total. If changes are made to the Quantity or Price columns in the
grid, the Sales Tax and Total amounts are recalculated automatically.
If necessary, you can overwrite the imported sales tax amount in the grid manually. If you do that, however,
Sage 100 Contractor no longer computes the sales tax for the record automatically if you make any
subsequent changes to the Quantity or Price.
NOTE: Each line item on a purchase order is not independently designated as taxable or non-taxable.
The entire purchase order is subject to one designation and the sales tax from the purchase order will be
imported to the invoice accordingly.
You can choose to clear the Use PO Sales Tax option and then calculate and add the sales tax to the invoice
manually.
To deactivate the Use PO Sales Tax option:
1 Open 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits.
2 On the Options menu, click Use PO Sales Tax.
About use taxes for payable invoices
Some states levy a use tax on out-of-state purchases. Sage 100 Contractor adds two lines to the invoice. The
first line for the use tax debits the same ledger and subsidiary accounts indicated on the first row. For
example, if the first row debits the Materials ledger account, the use tax also debits the Materials ledger
account.
The second line for the use tax debits a negative amount to the Sales Tax Payable account, increasing the
balance. The Sales Tax Payable account is set up on the Receivables tab in the 1-8 General Ledger Setup
window.
Product Overview 71
Chapter 5: Accounts Payable
Work in Progress and Percentage Complete Accounting
About work in progress (WIP)
Many contractors refer to any project in the process of completion as a work-in-progress (WIP). You can print
a WIP report for any job to determine the WIP adjustment for percentage complete accounting. Using this
adjustment, you can post a transaction that allows you to compare the revenue generated during a given fiscal
period to the expenses incurred during the same fiscal period.
WIP also refers to a method of accounting used with speculative projects. Because the contractor owns the
project, the contractor must declare improvements to the property as an asset. When the contractor sells the
property, he or she then declares the revenue and expense.
Work in progress accounting
CAUTION: Consult your accountant for detailed information about WIP transactions before proceeding
to use WIP accounting.
Contractors who own and develop projects sometimes use a different method of accounting than those who
develop projects for a client. When a contractor is involved in speculative work, bookkeepers or accountants
often use work-in-progress (WIP) accounting. Because the company owning the project is performing the
work, the company cannot expense the costs incurred during improvement of the property. While
improvements do not generate income, they increase the value of the asset.
In WIP accounting, when you improve the property the costs incurred are posted to WIP accounts, located in
the asset range of the general ledger. Liabilities, such as loans, post to the standard liability accounts until the
sale of the property. Upon completion and sale of the project, the expenses and income are declared.
IMPORTANT:
If you have turned on the WIP Verification for job costs, and are posting job costs to a job that is marked
Post expenses to WIP asset account, you cannot post to a direct expense account. A message
appears: WIP Posting is not = to job costs. You must correct your posting before you can save.
If you have turned on the WIP Verification for job costs, and are posting job costs to a WIP (Asset)
ledger account for a job that is marked for Post expenses to WIP asset account, a message appears:
WIP Posting is not = to job costs. You must correct your posting before you can save.
When you create the asset accounts for a speculative project, designate at least one WIP account in the
asset range. It is far more common, however, to establish a ledger account for each cost type such as labor ,
materials, or equipment. The pre-built ledger account structures supplied with Sage 100 Contractor include
WIP accounts. If your company is working on several speculative projects, set up subsidiary accounts using
the job number as the subsidiary account number.
About percentage complete accounting
Using percentage complete accounting, also referred to as over/under billing, you declare income during the
period that you earn it, determined by the percentage of work completed. The percentage complete accounting
method allows you to compare the expenses and income generated during the same period. Otherwise,
72 Sage 100 Contractor
Vendor Payments
reports such as income statements provide a misleading view of the profitability because it contains the
expenses for the current period and income for previous periods.
Instead of determining the WIP adjustment manually, you can print the 6-1-7 Over/Under Billing Report to
determine the over or under billing for any job currently in progress. Because the report calculates the WIP
adjustment, you only need to post the necessary journal transactions.
Sage 100 Contractor uses the following process to determine the WIP adjustment. To establish the
percentage of work completed, the program divides the accumulated costs by the amount of the current
budget. Then to determine the income earned, it multiplies the revised contract (the amount of the original
contract plus approved change orders) by the percentage of work completed. Finally, the program subtracts
the total amount of the receivable invoices assigned type 1-Contact from the amount of income earned. The
resulting amount is the WIP adjustment.
For example, a contractor is working on a home remodel that was budgeted at $100,000 and contracted for
$150,000. With $50,000 in costs at the time of billing, the project is 50% complete. The contractor has
therefore earned 50% of the contracted amount, which is $75,000. As the contractor has not previously billed
anything for the project, there are no billed invoices to deduct from the earnings. The resulting $75,000 WIP
adjustment is posted in the 1-3 Journal Transactions window.
Usually an Over Billing account is set up in the Payable range of accounts and an Under Billing account is
set up in the Receivable range of accounts. In addition, an Over/Under Billing account is set up in the
Income range of accounts. When you have determined the amount of the WIP adjustment, post a journal
transaction. If the WIP adjustment is a positive amount, debit the receivable account and credit the income
account. If the WIP adjustment is a negative amount, credit the payable account and debit the income
account.
NOTE: Some companies reverse the WIP adjustment in the subsequent fiscal period.
Vendor Payments
About vendor payments
This section of Sage 100 Contractor includes 4-3-1 Select Invoices to Pay and 4-3-2 Pay Vendors. Using
these windows, you can select invoices to pay or print checks, vouchers, lien waivers, or use ACH payments
for payable invoices. You can also apply credit invoices to invoices.
You can open 4-3-1 Select Invoices to Pay window, and then using the Invoices Selection window, set the
criteria by which to populate the window grid with invoices.
After opening the 4-3-2 Pay Vendors window, you can use the Payeecheck boxes to select vendors to pay.
The invoices are totaled by vendor.
You can print several reports directly from text links on the window:
Print Set to Pay Report
Print check transmittals
Product Overview 73
Chapter 5: Accounts Payable
Print lien waivers
Using the Pay By box, you can select to pay by:
Check
Voucher
Credit Card
ACH Payment
About the Invoice Selection window
When you click 4-3-1 Set Invoices to Pay on the menu tree, the program displays the Invoice Selection
window overlaying the 4-3-1 Set Invoices to Pay window. You use the Invoice Selection window to set the
criteria by which the invoices will be displayed in the 4-3-1 Set Invoices to Pay grid area.
The window offers six sets of criteria. The following list describes some examples of what you find:
Under Selection Criteria: Vendor, Job, Due Date, Disc. Date
Under Pay Options: Exclude Vendors with Overdue Certificates, Pay Retentions
Under Sort: Record#, Vendor, Job, Vendor/Job
Under Status: Open, Review, Dispute
Under Sort By: Number, Name
Under Display: All Invoices, Job Invoices Only
NOTES:
Save a specific combination of criteria by clicking Defaults > Save.
If you do not select any criteria, the programs selects all Open invoices.
About 4-3-1 Select Invoices to Pay
When you open 4-3-1 Select Invoices to Pay, the program displays the Invoice Selection window first with
the primary window in the background. This allows you to set the criteria by which you will select invoices.
After you select the criteria and click OK, the program populates the 4-3-1 Select Invoices to Pay window
with invoices.
The window contains five buttons providing tools for working with the selected invoices.
When you click:
Open—Assigns the status of Open to selected invoices.
Review—Assigns the status Review to selected invoices.
Pay—Sets selected invoices to pay their full default amount.
No Pay—Removes the set to pay amount for the selected invoices.
Past—Sets selected invoices to pay with a discount, even if they are past the discount date.
74 Sage 100 Contractor
Vendor Payments
To pay the full invoice balance, select the invoice and click the Pay button. If you do not want to pay the entire
balance of the invoice, enter a different amount. For example, you can make partial payments to vendors and
their second payees by entering a Set To Pay amount for any amount less than the stated invoice.
If an invoice was previously set to pay and you decided not to pay it at this time, then select the invoice, and
click the No Pay button.
When the invoices are displayed, select an invoice and enter the amount to pay and any applicable discount.
If the invoice has already been set to pay, that amount appears on the Set To Pay column. When you set an
invoice to pay, Sage 100 Contractor deducts the available discount from the invoice balance and displays the
result in the Set To Pay column.
If the payment date to receive a discount has passed, Sage 100 Contractor displays past in the Discount
column next to the discount amount and does not deduct the discount from the invoice balance. To take the
discount, select the invoice, and click the Past button instead of the Pay button.
IMPORTANT:
You must save your changes in order for the program to recognize the Set To Pay amount.
If vendors’ certificates are expired, invoices will not appear unless you clear the Exclude Vendors
with Overdue Certificates check box on the Invoice Selection window.
If you select Exclude Vendors with Overdue Certificates and have indicated Yes in the Stop
Pay text box in the Certificates window in 4-4 Vendors (Accounts Payable), the program
excludes the vendors from the invoice selection in 4-3-1 Select Invoices to Pay.
About 4-3-2 Pay Vendors
Using the 4-3-2 Pay Vendors window, you can print checks, vouchers, and lien waivers for payable invoices.
You can also pay by ACH payment or print zero dollar checks.
In addition to printing regular, single-party checks, you can print two-party checks with a secondary payee.
When working with secondary payees, the grid displays the secondary payee name appended to the vendor,
along with the word “and.” This is similar to the way the payee appears on the printed check.
When you open the 4-3-2 Pay Vendors window after setting invoices to pay using 4-3-1 Set Invoices to
Pay, the selected vendors appear in the grid area. When you select a vendor using the Payee check box, the
program displays the amount in the Total Selected for Payment box. Then you select a method of payment.
You can pay by check, voucher, credit card, or ACH payment. You can click the Change the posting period
button in the top right to change the posting period.
Printing Reports and Waivers
The window displays three text links:
Print Set to Pay Report—Opens the 4-3-1 Report Printing window with the 21-Set to Pay Report
selected.
Print Check Transmittals - Opens the 4-3-2 Report Printing window with the 21-Check Transmittal
Report selected.
Print Lien Waivers—Opens the 4-3-3 Report Printing window with the 21-Lien Waiver selected.
Product Overview 75
Chapter 5: Accounts Payable
Printing vendor payment checks
Before printing vendor payment checks, consider these two points:
If applicable and before printing checks, you must print lien waivers. Click the Print lien waivers text
link in the lower-left corner of the window.
If the amount of payment to a vendor results in a zero amount through the application of a credit, you
must print a $0 check. Printing the $0 check is necessary to complete the invoice payment process. In
the Report Printing window, select the Print $0 Checks check box.
CAUTION: Only print accounts payable checks from one company and from one computer at a time.
Printing accounts payable checks from one company and more than one computer at a time may cause
duplicate check numbers and duplicate payments.
To print vendor payment checks:
1 Open 4-3-2 Pay Vendors.
The total invoices of the vendors you have selected using 4-3-1 Set Invoices to Pay appear in the grid area.
2 Click the Select All button, or alternatively select vendors individually.
3 Click the Pay By drop-down arrow, and select either to pay by check, voucher, or credit card.
4 Click OK.
a If you are paying by check, on the 4-3-5 Report Printing window, select the Report Form that suits
your business. Your choices are 21-Open Stub, 22-Formatted Stub, and 23-No Job Stub. Then click
the Print records icon.
When you print checks, Sage 100 Contractor creates ledger transactions. You can also specify the
sorting of the invoices on your check stub. Select the option to sort the invoices in the 4-3-5 Report
Printing window. Sage 100 Contractor prints the invoice numbers on the check stub; however,
sometimes more than one check stub is required to print all the invoices. You can print additional check
stubs with void checks to complete the printing of the invoices. In the Report Printing window, select
the Multiple Checks check box.
b If you are paying by voucher, on the 4-3-4 Report Printing window, select the appropriate Report Form
and click the Print records icon.
c If you are paying by credit card, the program displays the Credit Card Selection window. Specify a
Card Issuer Account, a Credit Card, a Trans#, a Trans Date, and click OK.
About vendor payment reports
The 4-3-2 Pay Vendors window provides text links to these reports.
76 Sage 100 Contractor
Vendor Payments
Report
To
Print Set to
Pay report
Review the invoices for each vendor that you have set to pay. The report
provides the invoice balance, invoice retention, discount available, and the
amount set to pay for each invoice. The report also summarizes the data for
each vendor and provides grand totals.
Lists the invoices that you are paying. When the list of invoices is too long to fit
the checkstub, you can supply the vendor with a check report.
The Minimum Number of Invoices box on the Check Transmittal Minimum
Invoice Number window controls the minimum number of invoices that the
payment references.
Print check
To set a minimum number before writing a check, enter a number in the
transmittals
Minimum Number of Invoices box.
Leave the box blank if you do not need to set a minimum number of invoice
references.
When you print the Check Transmittal Report, Sage 100 Contractor
determines which checks meet the minimum and prints a report for each.
Print lien
waivers
Displays the lien waiver information for the contractor for invoice or invoices
that are set to pay.
NOTE: The check report uses the set-to-pay information; therefore, you must print the check report
before printing the vendor checks.
Lien Waivers and Vouchers
About lien waivers
A lien waiver is a document signed by a contractor, subcontractor, or other supplier of goods or services
stating that the supplier has been paid for the work performed or goods supplied and waiving the supplier's
right to file a claim against the property.
In the 3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable) window, you can track the lien waivers that you receive for each job.
You can also print lien waivers for vendors receiving payment through the 4-3 Vendor Payments window.
IMPORTANT: You must print lien waivers before printing payable checks or vouchers. You can also
save the lien waiver as a PDF file and reprint it later.
Printing lien waivers
You can print lien waivers for subcontractors to sign upon receipt of payment. The waiver details the invoices,
invoice balances, and amount paid. The generic text can be modified so that the lien waiver complies with
your state requirements.
Product Overview 77
Chapter 5: Accounts Payable
IMPORTANT: You must print lien waivers before printing payable checks or vouchers. You can also
save the lien waiver as a PDF file and reprint it later.
To print a lien waiver:
1 Open 4-3-1 Set Invoices to Pay.
2 On the Invoice Selection window under Selection Criteria, select criteria with which to populate the grid
area on 4-3-1 Set Invoices to Pay.
3 On 4-3-1 Set Invoices to Pay for each invoice, enter the amount you want to pay in the Set to Pay box.
4 Click File > Save, and then open 4-3-2 Pay Invoices.
5 Select the check boxes of the invoices for which you want print lien waivers, and then click the text link,
Print Lien Waivers.
6 On the 4-3-3 Report Printing window on the Report Criteria tab, select the report number, report form,
and set the criteria.
7 On the toolbar, click one of the printing options, such as the Print records icon.
Paying by vouchers
Lending institutions use vouchers to control the job expenditures of a contractor’s speculative work. When
you are ready to pay materials suppliers and subcontractors, print and send the vouchers to the lender. The
lender then pays the vendors based on the amounts indicated on the vouchers.
Because the lender is making the payments, vouchers do not affect your cash balance. They do, however,
affect the balance of your Loan Payable account.
To pay by voucher:
1 Open 4-3-2 Pay Vendors.
Invoices that you have selected using 4-3-1 Set Invoices to Pay appear in the grid area.
2 Click the Select All button, or alternatively select invoices individually.
3 Click the Pay By drop-down arrow, and select pay by Voucher.
4 Click [Pay Vendors].
5 On the 4-3-5 Report Printing window, select the appropriate Report Form and click the Print records
icon.
6 Enter a transaction to record the loan disbursement.
7 Select the [Update 1099 Balance] check box to add the voucher to the 1099 balances when printing
vouchers.
8 Click [OK].
78 Sage 100 Contractor
Vendors (Accounts Payable)
TIP: The vouchers work like checks in that you can print vouchers to paper. The program displays these
options: Post ALL vouchers, Post vouchers through voucher#, or Do not post any vouchers.
Vendors (Accounts Payable)
About 4-4 Vendors (Accounts Payable)
Vendor records provide quick access to vendor information for payable invoices, 1099 balances, ordering
materials, and subcontract management. Create a vendor record for each business that sends you invoices
and each business to which you owe money or make regular payments. These vendors may include
subcontractors, architects, engineers, and lenders.
In the 4-4 Vendors (Accounts Payable) window, you can review vendor-related information such as
subcontracts, purchase orders, and invoices. You can also record any additional certificates a vendor is
required to supply.
You would select the Internal Vendor check box to keep track someone you need in the vendor database,
but not someone from whom you get invoices. Flagging a vendor as “internal” cause the program to display a
message if you try to enter a payable invoice for that vendor.
Examples of internal vendors are architects, engineers, or other professionals who are involved with projects
that you work on, but you are not the one contracting with them because you are not the general contractor or
owner. You might, however, want to keep that information in the job record.
Internal vendors may also be fictitious entities, such as a generic lumber supply or generic tile subcontractor.
You might want to use that entity for putting a “type” of vendor on parts for estimating and bid request reasons.
About vendor certificates and expiration dates
You can track the expiration dates for Workers’ Compensation, liability insurance, contractor’s licenses, and
other required certificates and licenses. When you enter a certificate or license, always enter an expiration
date. If you do not have a date, enter one that is obviously expired such as 01/01/1980. Later, you can
determine which vendors have insurance or licenses that have expired.
IMPORTANT: The 4-1-5-31 Vendor Worker's Comp Report requires that the Workers’
Compensation insurance certificate information be in Row 1 of the Certificates window grid.
You can control whether you receive a warning that a certificate has expired when creating a subcontract. You
can also stop payment to a vendor if a certificate has expired.
When selecting vendor invoices for payment, you can exclude vendors with expired licenses. You can also
print documents that you can send to vendors with expired licenses, requesting the new expiration dates to
update your records. When you do not need dates for vendors such as lending institutions, leave the text
boxes blank.
Reports on vendor certificates and expiration dates
You can run insurance reports to view which vendors have current and/or expired certificates. How?
Product Overview 79
Chapter 5: Accounts Payable
4-1-1-41 Insurance Report
4-1-1-42 Insurance Report~by Vendor Type
4-1-1-43 Insurance Report~Alpha
4-1-1-46 Insurance Report~with Notes
4-1-1-47 Insurance Report~by Vendor Type; with Notes
4-1-1-48 Insurance Report~Alpha; with Notes
Setting up Workers Compensation rates for payable invoices
Some states do not require subcontractors to carry Workers’ Compensation insurance. In these states, the
subcontractors use the general contractor’s insurance policy for the duration of the job, and the general
contractor deducts the cost of coverage from payments to the subcontractor. Check with your state for
compliance requirements as the laws vary in each state.
Sage 100 Contractor uses the Workers’ Compensation account indicated on the Payables tab in the General
Ledger Setup window to post payable invoice transactions.
To set up a Workers’ Compensation rate for payable invoices:
1 Open 4-4 Vendors (Accounts Payable).
2 Using the data control, select the vendor.
3 Click the Invoice Defaults tab.
4 In the Work Comp Rate box, enter the rate at which you are charging the subcontractor.
5 On the File menu, click Save.
6 Open 1-8 General Ledger Setup.
7 On the Payables tab, enter the ledger account to which you are posting the charge to subcontractors in the
Workers’ Compensation box.
8 On the File menu, click Save.
TIP: The credit does not appear on the Workers’ Compensation report, which only uses data from
payroll records. To track and report the costs, create a separate Workers’ Compensation ledger account.
Secondary Payees
The Secondary Payees window provides a way to add secondary payees to invoices. Secondary payees are
most often involved with subcontractor invoices because they have sub-vendor suppliers who have lien rights
to the project. It is critical to ensure that these suppliers get paid. The use of two-party checks provides this
assurance.
80 Sage 100 Contractor
Vendors (Accounts Payable)
There are several ways to enter the secondary payees. You can do so when you enter a new subcontractor’s
invoice in the 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits window by entering the name and amount payable to each
supplier in the Secondary Payees window. You can also add one or more secondary payees to existing
vendor invoices.
You will notice upon looking at the Secondary Payees window that it has three main parts: the grid, the
vendor line, and the totals line.
Grid Columns
Description
Secondary
Payee
The name for the second party that will appear on the two-party check.
Amount
The total amount that should be paid on two-party checks to the payee.
Paid
The total amount of payment made to this payee. This column is not editable.
Balance
The Amount minus the Paid as calculated by Sage 100 Contractor. This column is not
editable.
To Pay
The amount scheduled for a two-party check. This column allows you to enter or edit the
amount.
The vendor line appears under the grid. The information in the vendor line reflects information related to the
grid columns for the vendor on the invoice.
Vendor Line
Description
Vendor Name
Displays the vendor name and the invoice information that applies directly to the vendor.
Amount
The amount is reduced as entry is made in the Amount column in the grid. In other words,
the vendor receives whatever funds remain after the secondary payee(s) are paid.
Paid
The total amount of payment that has been made directly to the vendor.
Balance
The Amount minus the Paid. It is likewise adjusted whenever the Amount on this line
changes.
To Pay
The amount scheduled for payment directly to the vendor. This text box allows you to enter
or edit the amount.
The totals line appears under the double line and reflects the entire invoice. The To Pay total reflects the sum
of all To Pay amounts on this window. Upon saving it is sent back to its corresponding field at the bottom of
the 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits window.
Retention values are not reflected on this window. Retention that is entered on 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits
is held against the vendor’s balance. You cannot hold a portion of the invoice retention against a secondary
payee. However, you can pay 90% on one check and the remaining 10% on a later check.
Discounts are not reflected on this screen. They are applied against the vendor’s balance. You cannot apply a
portion of the invoice’s discount against the balance of a secondary payee.
Product Overview 81
Chapter 5: Accounts Payable
After saving the information in the Secondary Payees window and subsequently the 4-2 Payable
Invoices/Credits window, the next logical step could be to print and post the checks using the 4-3 Vendor
Payments window. You will notice that the single invoice appears in the grid as multiple lines with the second
payee lines directly under the vendor's portion. When you sort the grid, these lines stay together.
Here is an example. Suppose you subcontracted the electrical work on the construction of a home. Upon
completion of the job, the subcontractor sends an $8,500 invoice, the amount of the contract. The invoice lists
three suppliers and the associated costs: a materials supplier—$2,000; a lighting supplier—$1,500; and an
equipment supplier for a backhoe to perform ground work—$300. To ensure that each of the subcontractor’s
suppliers is paid, you can print a two-party check for each supplier.
When you print checks from the 4-3 Vendor Payments window, Sage 100 Contractor prints four checks
based on the amounts in the Secondary Payees window. A check to the subcontractor and materials supplier
for $2,000; a check to the subcontractor and lighting supplier for $1,500; a check to the subcontractor and
equipment supplier for $300; and a check to the subcontractor for $4,700, which is the vendor’s portion that is
not attributed to a second payee.
NOTES:
No information on the Secondary Payees window may be edited when the invoice has a status of
4-Paid or 5-Void.
You can add multiple additional secondary payees to an invoice.
You can change amounts to be paid to secondary payees as long as no payment has been made.
You can change the name of the secondary payee as long as no payments have been made.
You can remove secondary payees as long as no payments have been made.
Entering payable invoices that include secondary payees
In your contracting work, you receive a payable invoice from a new vendor for their work. Part of the invoice is
to be paid as a two-party check to one of their suppliers. Use the following procedure to handle this situation.
NOTES:
You must manually click the Wk/Comp button and the Use Tax button in order for the record to
calculate the vendor's workers' compensation rate and use tax rate. You can set up the use tax rate
and the compensation rate on the Invoice Default tab of 4-4 Vendors (Accounts Payable).
Payable invoice status can be: 1-Open, 2-Review, 3-Dispute, 4-Paid, or 5-Void.
Payable invoices can have two different types: 1-Contract and 2-Memo.
Payable invoices can be saved as: Save, Save/Set To Pay, and Save/Autocost.
If you enter an invoice using information from a purchase order, the sales tax will automatically
default into the invoice. You can choose to deactivate the automatic sales tax feature and to enter
the sales tax manually.
To enter a payable invoice that includes a secondary payee
1 Open 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits.
2 Do the following:
82 Sage 100 Contractor
Vendors (Accounts Payable)
a In the Invoice# box, enter the invoice number.
b If the invoice is for a purchase order, in the Order# box enter the purchase order number.
c If the invoice is for a subcontract, in the Contract# box enter the subcontract number. You can turn on an
option to verify the contract balance against the invoice.
d In the Vendor box, enter the vendor number.
e In the Job box, enter the job number.
f If the job uses phases, enter the phase number in the Phase box.
g In the Description box, enter a description.
h In the Invoice Date box, enter the date of the invoice.
i In the Due Date box, enter the invoice due date.
j In the Discount Date box, enter the discount due date. This is the last day by which the vendor can
receive payment for you to receive a discount.
k In the Shipping# box, enter the shipping tag or ticket number.
l In the Reference# box, enter an invoice or credit number to apply this entry to.
m In the Status list, click the invoice status.
n In the Type list, click the invoice type.
3 In the grid, do the following:
a In the Description cell, enter a brief statement about the item.
b In the Price cell, enter the price per unit.
c In the Account cell, enter the ledger account number.
4 Repeat step 3 for each item.
5 Below the grid, in the Discount box, enter the discount for early payment. By default, Sage 100 Contractor
calculates the discount amount using the rate from the vendor record.
6 In the Retention box, enter the amount of retention. By default, Sage 100 Contractor calculates the
retention (if applicable) using the rate from the subcontract, which is found on 6-7-1 Subcontracts.
7 Click the Secondary Payees button. The Secondary Payees window opens.
8 In the Second Payee column, enter the name of the secondary payee.
9 In the Amount column, enter the amount payable to the secondary payee.
10 Click the Save toolbar button, which saves your entries and closes the window.
Product Overview 83
Chapter 5: Accounts Payable
11 When considering Workers’ Compensation rates and use tax:
p
p
If the vendor is set up with a Workers’ Compensation rate, and you want it to be calculated with this
record, click the Wk/Comp button.
If the vendor is set up with a use tax rate and you want it to be calculated with this record, click the Use
Tax button.
IMPORTANT: You have to manually click the Wk/Comp button and the Use Tax button in order for the
record to calculate the vendor's Workers' Compensation rate and use tax rate. You can set up the use
tax rate and the Workers' Compensation rate on the Invoice Details tab of 4-4 Vendors (Accounts
Payable).
12 In 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits, click Save.
Adding secondary payees to existing payable invoices
NOTE: You can add secondary payees as long as the amount does not cause the vendor’s balance to
become negative.
In your contracting work, you receive and enter a payable invoice from a existing vendor for subcontract work.
You enter and save the invoice, which exists in your database with a record number. Subsequently the
contractor informs you that a portion of that invoice should be paid as a two-party check to one of the vendor’s
suppliers. Use the following procedure to handle this situation.
To add a secondary payee to an existing payable invoice
1 Open 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits.
2 Using the data control, locate and open the existing invoice.
3 Click the Secondary Payees button. The Secondary Payees window opens.
4 In the Second Payee column, enter the name of the secondary payee.
5 In the Amount column, enter the amount to be paid to the secondary payee.
6 Click the Save toolbar button, which saves your entries and closes the window.
7 In the 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits window, click Save.
Increasing amounts payable to second payees
IMPORTANT: You can increase the amount payable to secondary payees as long as the amount does
not cause the vendor’s balance to become negative.
In your contracting work, you enter and save a payable invoice from a vendor for their work. The invoice is to
be paid with one check going to the vendor in addition to a two-party check going to one of their suppliers. The
vendor requests that you increase the amount of the two-party check. Use the following procedure to handle
this scenario.
84 Sage 100 Contractor
Vendors (Accounts Payable)
To increase the amount payable to a second payee
1 Open 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits.
2 Using the data control, locate and open the existing invoice.
3 Click the Secondary Payees button.
4 The Secondary Payees window opens.
5 In the Amount column, increase the payable amount.
6 Click the Save button.
7 Open 4-3 Vendor Payments to print and post the checks.
Decreasing amounts payable to secondary payees
IMPORTANT: The amount to be paid to secondary payees cannot be decreased to less than the
amount already paid.
In your contracting work, you enter and save a payable invoice from a vendor for their work. The invoice is to
be paid with one check going to the vendor in addition to a two-party check going to one of their suppliers. The
vendor requests that you decrease the amount of the two-party check. Use the following procedure to handle
this situation.
To decrease the amount payable to a second payee
1 Open 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits.
2 Using the data control, locate and open the existing invoice.
3 Click the Secondary Payee button.
4 The Secondary Payee window opens.
5 In the Amount column, decrease the payable amount.
6 Click the Save button.
7 Open 4-3 Vendor Payments to print and post the checks.
About secondary payees
The Secondary Payees window provides a way to add secondary payees to invoices. Secondary payees are
most often involved with subcontractor invoices because they have sub-vendor suppliers who have lien rights
to the project. It is critical to ensure that these suppliers get paid. The use of two-party checks provides this
assurance.
There are several ways to enter the secondary payees. You can do so when you enter a new subcontractor’s
invoice in the 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits window by entering the name and amount payable to each
Product Overview 85
Chapter 5: Accounts Payable
supplier in the Secondary Payees window. You can also add one or more secondary payees to existing
vendor invoices.
You will notice upon looking at the Secondary Payees window that it has three main parts: the grid, the
vendor line, and the totals line.
Grid Columns
Description
Secondary
Payee
The name for the second party that will appear on the two-party check.
Amount
The total amount that should be paid on two-party checks to the payee.
Paid
The total amount of payment made to this payee. This column is not editable.
Balance
The Amount minus the Paid as calculated by Sage 100 Contractor. This column is not
editable.
To Pay
The amount scheduled for a two-party check. This column allows you to enter or edit the
amount.
The vendor line appears under the grid. The information in the vendor line reflects information related to the
grid columns for the vendor on the invoice.
Vendor
Description
Line
Vendor
Name
Displays the vendor name and the invoice information that applies directly to the vendor.
Amount
The amount is reduced as entry is made in the Amount column in the grid. In other words, the
vendor receives whatever funds remain after the secondary payee(s) are paid.
Paid
The total amount of payment that has been made directly to the vendor.
Balance The Amount minus the Paid. It is likewise adjusted whenever the Amount on this line changes.
To Pay
The amount scheduled for payment directly to the vendor. This text box allows you to enter or edit
the amount.
The totals line appears under the double line and reflects the entire invoice. The To Pay total reflects the sum
of all To Pay amounts on this window. Upon saving it is sent back to its corresponding field at the bottom of
the 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits window.
Retention values are not reflected on this window. Retention that is entered on 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits
is held against the vendor’s balance. You cannot hold a portion of the invoice retention against a secondary
payee; however, you can pay 90% on one check and the remaining 10% on a later check.
Discounts are not reflected on this screen. They are applied against the vendor’s balance. You cannot apply a
portion of the invoice’s discount against the balance of a secondary payee.
86 Sage 100 Contractor
Vendors (Accounts Payable)
After saving the information in the Secondary Payees window and subsequently the 4-2 Payable
Invoices/Credits window, the next logical step could be to print and post the checks using the 4-3 Vendor
Payments window. You will notice that the single invoice appears in the grid as multiple lines with the second
payee lines directly under the vendor's portion. When you sort the grid, these lines stay together.
Here is an example. Suppose you subcontracted the electrical work on the construction of a home. Upon
completion of the job, the subcontractor sends an $8,500 invoice, the amount of the contract. The invoice lists
three suppliers and the associated costs: a materials supplier—$2,000; a lighting supplier—$1,500; and an
equipment supplier for a backhoe to perform ground work—$300. To ensure that each of the subcontractor’s
suppliers is paid, you can print a two-party check for each supplier.
When you print checks from the 4-3 Vendor Payments window, Sage 100 Contractor prints four checks
based on the amounts in the Secondary Payees window. A check to the subcontractor and materials supplier
for $2,000; a check to the subcontractor and lighting supplier for $1,500; a check to the subcontractor and
equipment supplier for $300; and a check to the subcontractor for $4,700, which is the vendor’s portion that is
not attributed to a second payee.
In additional, consider the following points:
No information on the Secondary Payees window may be edited when the invoice has a status of 4Paid or 5-Void.
You can add multiple additional secondary payees to an invoice.
You can change amounts to be paid to secondary payees as long as no payment has been made.
You can change the name of the secondary payee as long as no payments have been made.
You can remove secondary payees as long as no payments have been made.
Retention
About accounts payable retention
Many job subcontracts include retention. When you create a payable invoice, Sage 100 Contractor withholds
retention at the rate specified in the subcontract record. If you do not indicate a retention rate in the
subcontract record, you can withhold a flat amount on each individual invoice.
Posting a payable invoice declares the entire amount of the invoice as an expense. However, a percentage of
the gross amount is withheld as retention, so the client is actually billed for the net amount (gross invoice
amount – retention = net invoice amount). Therefore, retention is already declared as an expense, but is not
paid out yet. Consequently, Sage 100 Contractor does not include retention in the invoice aging.
When you are ready to pay the subcontractor for retention, it is not necessary to create a new invoice. You
can release retention on each invoice individually, or you can release the retention for the entire subcontract at
one time.
Paying retention on payable invoices
When you select the Pay Retentions check box, Sage 100 Contractor includes retention in the invoice
balances displayed in the Balance column.
Product Overview 87
Chapter 5: Accounts Payable
To pay retention on a payable invoice
1 Open 4-3-1 Select Invoices to Pay.
2 In the Invoice Selection window, select the criteria for the invoices you want to pay.
3 Under Pay Options, select the Pay Retentions check box.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Set to Pay text box, enter the amount you want to pay.
6 Or, select the invoice. Then on the Options menu, click Pay.
7 Repeat step 6 for each invoice you want to pay.
8 On the File menu, click Save.
9 Print the vendor checks.
Releasing retention on payable invoices
To release retention on a payable invoice:
1 Open 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits.
2 Using the data control, select the invoice.
3 In the Retention text box, reduce or delete the retention.
4 On the File menu, click Save.
About accounts payable retention
Many job subcontracts include retention. When you create a payable invoice, Sage 100 Contractor withholds
retention at the rate specified in the subcontract record. If you do not indicate a retention rate in the
subcontract record, you can withhold a flat amount on each individual invoice.
Posting a payable invoice declares the entire amount of the invoice as an expense. However, a percentage of
the gross amount is withheld as retention, so the client is actually billed for the net amount (gross invoice
amount – retention = net invoice amount). Therefore, retention is already declared as an expense but is not
paid out yet. Consequently, Sage 100 Contractor does not include retention in the invoice aging.
When you are ready to pay the subcontractor for retention, it is not necessary to create a new invoice. You
can release retention on each invoice individually, or you can release the retention for the entire subcontract at
one time.
Batches
Batch numbers group together invoices that you enter in the Payable Invoices window during a single
session. To verify the accuracy of the invoices entered, you can display a list of the invoices and compare the
88 Sage 100 Contractor
Vendors (Accounts Payable)
entered amounts against the actual invoice amounts.
Sage 100 Contractor maintains a separate series of batch numbers for each user name.
When you open a payable invoice window, Sage 100 Contractor establishes the next batch number in your
series by determining the largest batch number last used and incrementing it by 1. Sage 100 Contractor
assigns the batch number to each new transaction you enter until the window is closed.
When entering a new record, you can change the batch number. For example, you might want to include an
invoice in a prior batch. If you assign a previous batch number to a new invoice, that batch number works for
one invoice, and then it changes back to the new batch number.
After you save an invoice, you cannot change its batch number.
Changing batch numbers
If you assign a previous batch number to a new invoice, that batch number works for one invoice, and then it
changes back to the new batch number.
To change the batch number
1 Open 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits.
2 In the Batch text box, enter the batch number you want to assign to the invoice.
Viewing batch lists for invoices being entered
To view the batch list for invoices being entered
1 Open 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits.
2 On the Options menu, click Batch List.
Viewing prior batch lists
Consider the following points before viewing a prior batch list:
Each user name has its own series of batch numbers. Sage 100 Contractor shows you the batch list for
the user name with which you have logged on to Sage 100 Contractor.
To view the batch list of another user, select an invoice from the batch you want to view. Then on the
Options menu, click Batch List.
To view a prior batch list
1 Open 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits.
2 In the Batch text box, enter the number of the batch you want to view.
3 On the Options menu, click Batch List.
Product Overview 89
Chapter 5: Accounts Payable
About batch totals
Batch numbers group together invoices that you enter in the Payable Invoices window during a single
session. To verify the accuracy of the invoices entered, you can display a list of the invoices and compare the
entered amounts against the actual invoice amounts.
Sage 100 Contractor maintains a separate series of batch numbers for each user name.
When you open a payable invoice window, Sage 100 Contractor establishes the next batch number in your
series by determining the largest batch number last used and incrementing it by 1. Sage 100 Contractor
assigns the batch number to each new transaction you enter until the window is closed.
When entering a new record, you can change the batch number. For example, you might want to include an
invoice in a prior batch. If you assign a previous batch number to a new invoice, that batch number works for
one invoice, and then it changes back to the new batch number.
After you save an invoice, you cannot change its batch number.
Vendor 1099
About Federal 1099 forms
According to the IRS and Federal tax law, payments totaling $600 or more made to independent contractors
over the course of the calendar year must be reported to the IRS. Sage 100 Contractor maintains balances for
the 1099 reports regardless of the 1099 status assigned to a vendor record. When you include the vendor
number on a vendor check or general ledger check, Sage 100 Contractor increases the 1099 balance for that
vendor. If you later void the check, Sage 100 Contractor decreases the 1099 balance by the check amount.
On the 1099 form, the name appearing at the top of the Payee text box must correspond to the identification
number in the Federal Id# text box. For sole proprietors, the federal government uses the owner’s social
security number as the Federal Identification Number. Therefore, the owner’s name must appear above the
business name on the 1099 form.
For vendors assigned status 3-Sole Proprietor, Sage 100 Contractor automatically prints the name from the
Owner Name text box in the vendor record above the company name on the 1099 form.
About 1099 types
You can locate the list of 1099 types on the 4-4 Vendors (Accounts Payable) window under Financial
Information, in a drop-down list with the title 1099.
NOTE: The 1099 is tracked by vendor and not by 1099 type.
1099 Type
Description
0-Undetermined No choice has been made.
1Miscellaneous
90 Sage 100 Contractor
The vendor provides a service, but the vendor is not incorporated.
Sage 100 Contractor prints the vendor’s 1099 balance in box 7 of the 1099 form.
Vendors (Accounts Payable)
1099 Type
Description
2-Rent
The vendor provides a service, but the vendor is not incorporated. Use this type only
when the vendor provides a service to your business by renting office space, yard space,
equipment, and so on.
Sage 100 Contractor prints the vendor’s 1099 balance in box 1 of the 1099 form.
3-Sole
Proprietor
The vendor provides a service but the vendor is not incorporated.
4-Interest
Sage 100 Contractor can print interest for this vendor.
Sage 100 Contractor prints the vendor’s 1099 balance in box 7 of the 1099 form.
The vendor does not provide a service, or the vendor is incorporated.
5-No 1099
Sage 100 Contractor does not print a 1099 for a vendor with this type.
NOTE: When the company has no workforce other than the owner, the federal government does not
provide a federal identification number to the company. Instead, use the owner’s social security number.
For status 3-Sole Proprietor, enter the owner’s social security number in the Federal Id# text box. In
addition, enter the owner’s name in the Owner text box. When you print the 1099, Sage 100 Contractor
prints the social security number and the owner’s name on the 1099.
Recurring Payables
About recurring payables
You use the 4-6 Recurring Payables window to set up recurring transactions for payable invoices that you
post regularly for the same amount.
You can set up any transaction that you post on a regular basis for the same amount as a recurring
transaction. You can even set a reminder to prompt users in a specific security group when it is time to post
recurring transactions.
NOTE: You control the posting of recurring transactions to the general ledger. Sage 100 Contractor
does not automatically post recurring transactions.
Use the posting date to determine when to post a recurring transaction. After you post a recurring transaction,
Sage 100 Contractor advances the posting date based on the cycle assigned to the transaction.
The transaction date does not control or affect the period to which you post the transaction. If you need to post
a recurring transaction to a different period, change the posting period.
To prevent the duplication of invoice numbers, Sage 100 Contractor assigns a unique invoice number to each
recurring payable transaction. The invoice number is the combination of a record number and an invoice
sequence number. For example, when you enter the first recurring payables record, Sage 100 Contractor
assigns it invoice number RP00010001 (RP—recurring payable, 0001—record number, 0001—invoice
Product Overview 91
Chapter 5: Accounts Payable
sequence number). Each time you post the transaction, Sage 100 Contractor advances the invoice sequence
number within the invoice number. The next invoice number in the sequence becomes RR00010002.
Credit Card Management
Accounting for your business credit cards is now tightly integrated into your business accounting. Features
include setting up accounts, entering receipts, reconciling statements, and paying your credit card bills.
4-7-1 Add/Edit Issuer Accounts—Add credit card issuer accounts in your general ledger in the Current
Liabilities range of accounts. Return to this window to edit issuer account information. When you set up
issuer accounts you are prompted to add credit cards as subaccounts for the issuer accounts.
4-7-2 Add/Edit Credit Cards—Add credit cards as subaccounts of the card issuer account. You can
add one card or multiple cards to one issuer account. Return to this window to edit credit card
information.
4-7-3 Enter Credit Card Receipts—Enter the data from hardcopy credit card receipts. You have a
choice of entering a vendor or not. If you enter a vendor, the program creates a paid accounts-payable
invoice and a general ledger transaction. If there is no vendor on the receipt, the program only creates a
general ledger transaction.
4-7-4 Enter Recurring Charges—If you have charges with a constant recurring amount, enter them in
this window. This amount is charged to your credit card on a regular basis.
4-7-5 Reconcile Credit Card Statements—Verify credit card charges and payments. When you review
your statement, the program organizes the information for each credit card by issuer account and by
credit card. Payments are listed at the top of the grid. If there is a question about the charge or payment,
you can click a link to go to the transaction. The program also provides a way to add transactions “on-thefly” right from this window.
4-7-6 Pay Credit Cards—Sends credit card payment information through your general ledger
accounting. Creates a ledger transaction in 1-3 Journal Transactions. You can then print a check in 1-1
Checks/Bank Charges if you use “0000” for the transaction number.
92 Sage 100 Contractor
Chapter 6: Payroll
Working with Payroll
You can automatically calculate all payroll simply by entering the job, cost code, and time worked. Payroll
helps generate accurate labor and job costs by calculating all accruals as well as basic pay items for each line
on every timecard. You can even include liability insurance (based on per $1000) and small tool costs, which
are automatically posted to job costs in your payroll calculations.
You can use advanced features to manage prevailing-wage, union benefits, and qualified benefit plans. You
can set up a benefit system and assign it to a paygroup. For example, you can set variable-rate payroll to
override basic employee calculations as well as calculate rates and benefits only for the assigned localities or
specific unions.
Using Payroll, you can take advantage of benefit-cost offsets in addition to separately classified shop and
site time. Customizable entry windows speed up your daily operations.
5-5 Daily Payroll, which enables daily batch entry of employee time, is ideal for larger companies. You can
import employee time from 6-11-6 Daily Field Reports or the Service Receivables add-on module to verify
payroll hours. 5-5 Daily Payroll also integrates with 8-Equipment Management so that you can allocate
equipment repair time and costs to projects.
Here are more features of Sage 100 Contractor Payroll:
Supports Workers’ Compensation systems, including split rates, hourly calculations, and employee and
employer portions.
Can track hours for reporting under the Affordable Care Act, and calculate ACA hours in payroll records.
Calculates standard 401(k), 408(k), “cafeteria,” and qualified benefit plans.
Includes direct deposit capabilities.
Automatically prints Certified Payroll and minority reports for any timeframe and job.
Calculates union payroll reports.
Supports multi-state and multi-local tax district reporting, including reciprocity.
Supports electronic reporting and filing.
Supports piece work payment.
Applies per diem to any job for accurate job costing of employee reimbursements.
Automatically converts to weekly, biweekly, or semi-monthly timecards.
Product Overview 93
Chapter 6: Payroll
Employees
About 5-2-1 Employees
Using the 5-2-1 Employees window, you create an employee record for each employee who works during the
calendar year. The record stores personal and work-related information, and acts as the source for each
employee’s hourly pay rates, salary rates, or paygroups. In addition, you can accrue sick and vacation time,
provide direct deposit for employees, and automatically recover payroll advances.
On the Compensation tab, you can enter information about Paygroups, Standard Regular Rate,
Commission%, Salary, Accrued Sick, Accrual Rate, and more. Under Mark on W-2, you can select the
check boxes Retirement Plan and Third-Party Sick Pay to include the appropriate values when preparing
the W-2 electronic file.
On the Direct Deposit tab, you enter employees’ direct deposit information and email address for the direct
deposit pay stub.
On the Calculations tab, you can select which payroll calculations to use and customize the calculation rates
for each employee. Each employee record stores its own calculation rates; you can create one payroll
calculation but set up different calculation rates for each employee. When you trial-compute or final-compute
payroll, Sage 100 Contractor uses calculation rates from the employee records to compute the deductions and
benefits for each employee.
On the Additional Contacts tab, you can add multiple additional contacts for each employee.
IMPORTANT: Contacts entered in employee records are not synchronized with Outlook due to security
reasons.
You can also create generic employee records for scheduling resources. A single, generic employee can
represent an entire crew, such as a framing crew. Use the generic employee to assign employee resources to
tasks in a schedule, thereby preventing the over-allocation of labor . For service work, you can use the generic
employee as a placeholder for scheduling work orders in the 11-3 Dispatch Board window.
On the ACA tab, you enter health coverage information for each employee for each month of the year so that
you can track hours required for reporting under the Affordable Care Act (ACA). If you offer employees health
coverage under a self-ensured plan, you also enter information about their spouse, and their dependents on
this tab.
NOTE: You can enter information on this tab only if the system date is January 1, 2015, or later.
IMPORTANT: Do not enter more than one employee record for any one employee. For example, if you
make a mistake on an employee record, do not correct the mistake by making a second record for that
employee.
94 Sage 100 Contractor
Employees
Employee Payroll Calculations
About calculations in payroll records
The Calculations tab in the 5-2-2 Payroll Records window lets you view the deduction and benefit amounts
for a timecard after the trial or final-compute. After setting up a new employee record or adding a new payroll
calculation to an employee record, it is a good idea to review the computed amounts after a trial-compute. The
review ensures that the payroll calculation and the calculation rates in the employee record have been set up
correctly.
For a single timecard, you can also manually enter an amount for a payroll calculation and override what Sage
100 Contractor would otherwise compute. During a trial or final-compute, Sage 100 Contractor looks at the
Override column. When an Override cell contains Yes, Sage 100 Contractor uses the amount you have
entered for that calculation. After you have performed a final-compute for timecards, you cannot change the
computed amounts on those timecards.
Suppose that you advance Rob $500, and set up a calculation to recover the advance at a rate of $50 per
paycheck. One week, Rob works far more than usual and suggests that you deduct $200 from this paycheck.
If you were to change the calculation rate for the payroll advance in Rob’s employee record, you would then
have to change the rate back after the final-compute. Because the $200 deduction is only for one paycheck,
adjust the computed amount on the timecard. On the Calculations tab, locate the Payroll Advance
calculation, enter $200 in the Amount cell, and type Yes in the Override cell.
You can also use the Calculations tab to adjust the deduction or benefit balances for a specific employee.
When you enter a hand-computed check, you can subtract from the balance of one payroll calculation and add
it to another.
About non-union shops and prevailing-wage jobs
When an open-shop contractor receives a contract for a Davis-Bacon job, the contractor is required to provide
his employees the wages and benefits package as stipulated by the governing agency, usually union scale for
the area.
For example, a union local might provide a health care benefit that the open-shop contractor does not. For
work performed on the prevailing-wage job, the contractor is required to pay his employees the money that
would otherwise be paid for a health care benefit if it were a union shop.
The governing agency determines the prevailing wage and benefits package requirements for each job. To
manage the requirements for each prevailing-wage job, use paygroups to set up a separate wage group for
each category of worker. When entering a timecard, you specify the paygroup on each timecard line, and
Sage 100 Contractor uses the wages and benefits package from the paygroup in place of the wages and
benefits package in the employee record.
When your company offers a benefit that is also in the prevailing benefits package, your company receives a
credit, determined by the job’s governing agency. In some cases, you might be required to pay the employee
the difference between the regular benefit and the prevailing benefit. Set up the payroll calculation for the
benefit as a cash add-on, and include the offsetting credit for the new calculation in the employee’s record.
Product Overview 95
Chapter 6: Payroll
When you compute payroll, Sage 100 Contractor uses the offset credit to determine the difference between
the benefit provided and the prevailing benefit. The employee is paid the difference as cash.
For example, you pay a health benefit of $180 per month on behalf of Joe, and $120 per month on behalf of Bill
using Calculation A: Company Health (paid by the employer). The requirements for a prevailing-wage job
include a $2 per hour health benefit. To calculate the required health benefit correctly, you set up a new
calculation, called Calculation B: Davis/Bacon Health (cash add-on) and add it to the employee records.
The new calculation has a calculation type 2-Add to Gross, and a rate of $2 per hour.
The governing agency, after reviewing the health benefit you supply, determines you get a $1 per hour credit
for Joe’s health care benefit and a $0.67 per hour credit for Bill’s health care benefit.
After setting up the paygroups and benefits packages, which includes Calculation B, enter the health care
credit in the Calculations tab of the employee records. In Joe’s employee record, enter the $1 credit in the
Offset cell for Calculation B. Then in Bill’s employee record, enter the $0.67 credit in the Offset cell for
Calculation B.
Joe and Bill work 40 hours on the prevailing-wage job. When entering their timecards, you indicate the
appropriate paygroups. When you compute payroll, Sage 100 Contractor determines the amount to add to
each check, which is the difference between the health benefit you provide and the prevailing health care
benefit [(benefit rate – offsetting credit) * hours worked].
Joe receives an additional $40 [($2 – $1) * 40] on his check; and Bill receives an additional $53.20 [($2 – $0.67)
* 40] on his check. For the certified payroll report, Sage 100 Contractor computes the health benefit at $2 per
hour for both Joe and Bill.
For companies that perform considerable amounts of prevailing-wage work, you can create a table of
paygroups to use with each job. When you enter the job number on a timecard, Sage 100 Contractor
determines which paygroup to use based on the employee’s position.
Payroll Records
About 5-2-2 Payroll Records
In the 5-2-2 Payroll Records window, you can enter timecards for employees as well as hand-computed
records, advances, bonuses, and third-party payments. Payroll records for advances, bonuses, and salaried
employees do not require timecard information. For non-salaried employees, you enter timecards with a
breakdown of the hours spent working each job or repairing equipment.
When you enter a payroll record, Sage 100 Contractor inserts default information from the job and employee
records. You can accept or change any of the default information. After timecard entry, you can compute the
timecards.
You might find this additional functionality beneficial too. The related scope of work recorded in 6-11-6 Daily
Field Report line notes from the employees grid can be imported into 5-2-2 Payroll Records using the
Options > Data Import > Import Daily Field Reports. This provides a way for that information to become
part of your payroll and job costing records.
96 Sage 100 Contractor
Payroll Records
Also, you can choose whether to use an employee's work locale or residence locale as the default in
timecards when the timecard line does not specify a job or when the specified job does not include a locale.
When you click Options > Default Option for Locale Column, a separate window opens where you specify
your choice. Your selection determines the default for the Locale Column in all time-entry windows, including
the 5-5-1 Daily Payroll Entry window and the Sage Construction Anywhere plug-in, as well in as the 5-2-2
Payroll Records window.
To help you determine whether an employee is considered full time under the Affordable Care Act (ACA), two
ACA Hours fields are available if the payroll record uses:
1-Regular, 2-Bonus, or 4-Startup for the Payroll Type.
1-Open, 2-Computed, or 3-Posted for the Status.
Normally, you do not need to enter hours manually in these fields. Sage 100 Contractor calculates ACA hours
automatically for timecard lines that fall within the pay period. If the entire pay period falls within one calendar
month, all the hours for the pay period are accumulated in the first ACA Hours field. However, if the pay period
spans two months, hours for the first month are accumulated in the first ACA Hours field, and hours for the
second month are accumulated in the second ACA Hours field.
A trial-compute allows you to review the amounts computed for each payroll calculation and make any
necessary adjustments. On the Calculations tab, you can review the accuracy of computed amounts or
override the calculation results by supplying different amounts. After you final-compute timecards, the
computed amounts cannot be changed; Sage 100 Contractor posts the job and equipment costs, and updates
the wage and payroll calculation balances in the employee records.
About payroll record errors
Payroll record errors result from inaccurate timecard entry, employee record setup, or payroll calculation
setup. Before attempting to correct the error, determine its cause. In most cases correct the setup problem
first, and then correct the payroll record error.
IMPORTANT: If the wrong payroll posting accounts were set up in the 5-3-3 Employee Positions
window, void the erroneous payroll records. Voiding the payroll records first ensures that reversing
transactions are posted to the same accounts. Then enter the correct posting accounts in the 5-3-3
Employee Positions window. Finally, enter the correct payroll records.
There are two status settings:
1-Open. Sage 100 Contractor has not created cost records, printed paychecks, or posted payroll to the
general ledger. You can edit most information in the record. If the record is a duplicate, you can delete it.
If you have assigned the wrong payroll type, void the record.
2-Computed. If you have not printed a check, void the original record. Then enter a new record with the
correct data. You can trial-compute the record to make sure all the data is correct before the finalcompute.
If you printed a check but did not issue it to the employee, void the original record. Then enter a new record
with the correct data. You can trial-compute the record to make sure all the data is correct before the finalcompute. To maintain an accurate audit trail, cancel the check number of the erroneous check.
Product Overview 97
Chapter 6: Payroll
If you issued the check to the employee, void the original record. Then enter a payroll advance for the net
amount of the check. To maintain an accurate audit trail, enter the original check number in the Check
Number box. Then enter a new record with the correct data. You can trial-compute the record to make sure all
the data is correct before the final-compute.
Sage 100 Contractor recovers the payroll advance from the subsequent paychecks. If you overpaid the
employee due to error, and the subsequent check results in a net $0 amount, print the check to plain paper and
provide a copy to the employee. If you underpaid the employee due to error, print the new paycheck and give it
to the employee. Always provide the employee with a copy of the correct payroll information.
Entering Payroll
About entering payroll records
For each non-salaried employee, you enter a separate record with a breakdown of his or her time on the
Timecard tab. On each timecard line you can enter the hours worked on a specific job, or the hours worked
performing repairs and maintenance on a piece of equipment. Each timecard line also requires a pay type,
which indicates the type of wages to compute the wages for the line. When you final-compute the payroll,
Sage 100 Contractor creates the job and equipment costs based on the timecard lines.
There are two ways to enter payroll records for salaried employees. Most salary records only require the
salary amount and do not need a breakdown of the employee’s hours. If you need to create job or equipment
costs for a salaried employee’s time, you need to classify his or her time on the Timecard tab.
Payroll records for hand-computed checks, advances, and third-party payments do not use timecard
information. A hand-computed check lets you adjust the payroll calculation balances stored in an employee’s
record. You can enter a bonus as a separate record from a timecard, or you can include in on the timecard.
About payroll advances
When you give a payroll advance to an employee, Sage 100 Contractor debits the Payroll Advance ledger
account and records the amount in the Advances Due text box in the employee’s record. Payroll advances
are considered a type of short-term loan and are not subject to payroll deductions.
You can deduct the advance from the employee’s next paycheck, or a flat amount each pay period until the
advance has been recovered. As you recover the advance, Sage 100 Contractor updates the Advances Due
text box to reflect the current amount due. When the amount in the Advances Due text box reaches $0, Sage
100 Contractor stops making a deduction from the employee’s pay.
About employee loans
Some companies provide long term loans or interest-bearing loans to employees. Instead of writing a payroll
check for the advance, write a general ledger check to the employee. Post the amount to the loans receivable
account. If you don't have a subaccount for loans receivable, you can set one up.
If you give several employees long term loans, consider using subsidiary accounts to track each loan
separately. Because loans are posted to different ledger accounts than payroll advances, set up a separate
payroll calculation to recover the loan.
98 Sage 100 Contractor
Payroll Records
Job costing salaried employees
If a salaried employee spends time working on a job or repairing equipment, you can create the appropriate job
or equipment cost records. On the Timecard tab, enter the hours the employee has spent working jobs or
repairing equipment during the pay period. Also, include the hours spent in an overhead or administrative
capacity.
When you compute payroll, Sage 100 Contractor calculates the gross hourly wage (employee salary / total
hours = gross hourly wage). If a salaried employee works more than 40 hours in a week, the calculated gross
hourly wage is lower. Therefore, to compute a gross hourly wage based on a 40-hour week, enter a timecard
line for negative hours and attribute them to a dummy job (created strictly for this purpose). The dummy job
allows you to enter all hours worked without affecting the costs attributed to the jobs or equipment.
Suppose Robert, a salaried administrator, worked eight hours as a carpenter on a job. He also worked 32
hours as an administrator. The first timecard line contains the job, cost code, payroll line type, hours, and
Workers’ Compensation code. The second timecard line contains the payroll line type, non-job or equipment
related hours worked, and the Workers’ Compensation code. When you final-compute the payroll record,
Sage 100 Contractor attributes the cost of eight hours labor to the job and 32 hours labor to administration.
To job cost a salaried employee:
1 Open 5-2-2 Payroll Records.
2 In the Employee box, enter the employee number.
3 In the Period Start box, enter the date when the payroll period begins.
4 In the Period End box, enter the date when the payroll period ends.
5 In the Check Date box, enter the date when the check is to be issued.
6 In the Check# box, type 0000.
When you print the check, Sage 100 Contractor assigns the check number to the record.
7 If you have already issued the check, enter the check number in the Check# text box.
8 In the Payroll Type list, click 1-Regular.
9 In the Quarter box, enter the payroll quarter.
10In the State text box, enter the tax state.
11 In the Salary box, enter the salary.
12 In the Timecard tab, do the following:
a In the Date cell, enter the date on which the employee worked.
b If the employee worked on a job, enter the job number in the Job cell.
c If the employee repaired equipment, enter the equipment number in the Equipment cell.
Product Overview 99
Chapter 6: Payroll
d If the job is in a local payroll tax district, enter the local payroll district number in the Locality cell.
e If the job requires certified payroll, type Yes in the Certified cell.
f If the job uses phases, enter the phase number in the Phase cell.
g If the employee worked on a job or repaired equipment, enter the cost code number in the Cost Code
cell.
h In the Pay Type cell, enter the payroll line type.
i In the Compensation Code cell, enter the Workers’ Compensation code number.
j If you are using departments, enter the department number in the Department cell.
13 Repeat step 12 for each payroll item.
14 On the File menu, click Save.
TIPS:
To compute payroll records correctly, enter the timecard line containing the negative hours first.
This ensures deductions, benefits, or other calculations that use calculation maximums compute
properly.
When a salaried employee is subject to a local payroll tax, enter the local payroll tax district on the
Timecard tab.
Payroll Bonuses
About bonus checks
IMPORTANT: Sage 100 Contractor does not support the higher bonus rate of 35% for supplemental
wages which exceed one million dollars in a year.
You can enter bonus checks in two ways.
As a separate paycheck. Sage 100 Contractor computes Federal Income Tax based on the federal
bonus tax rate.
Include it in a regular paycheck. Sage 100 Contractor computes Federal Income Tax and State Income
Tax using the standard tax tables.
Hand-computed Checks
About hand-computed checks
IMPORTANT: When adjusting any calculation balances, it is important to consider the impact to the
employee’s taxable wages. Additional adjustments to the wages may be necessary.
Use hand-computed payroll checks to make small adjustments to the calculation balances stored in an
employee record. When you assign pay type 3-Hand Computed to a payroll record, Sage 100 Contractor
limits entry to the Calculations tab.
100 Sage 100 Contractor
Payroll Records
To adjust the balance of an employer cost, enter a negative sum to deduct from the balance, or enter a
positive sum to add to the balance. The adjustment does not affect the employee’s net wages.
To adjust employee costs, transfer the sum from one calculation balance to another. Depending on which
balance you are adjusting, you can offset the net check amount to Federal Income Tax, State Income Tax,
or Payroll Advance.
Use Federal Income Tax to adjust federal taxes such as Social Security or Medicare.
Use State Income Tax to adjust state taxes such as state disability insurance.
Use Payroll Advance to change the amount of the net paycheck.
Suppose that you have over-deducted $10 for Social Security from Dick’s gross wages. On the Calculations
tab, you enter –$10 in the Amount cell for the Employee Social Security calculation. Then in the Amount
cell of FIT, enter $10. Sage 100 Contractor deducts the $10 from the Employee Social Security balance and
adds it to the FIT balance. Rather than moving the balance to FIT, you could enter the amount in Payroll
Advance. Sage 100 Contractor would then add $10 to the employee’s next paycheck.
About third-party sick pay
In some states, a third party pays for employees receiving sick pay or disability insurance. In most instances,
the employer is responsible for reporting the deductions and wages. If your company is responsible for
reporting the sick pay wages, you can enter payroll records using pay type 6-Third Party.
When you post a payroll record with pay type 6-Third Party, Sage 100 Contractor:
Adds the employee costs to the calculation balances stored in the employee’s record.
Adds the employer costs to the calculation balances stored in the employee’s record.
Posts the employer costs to the general ledger.
For more information about third-party sick pay, see IRS publication 15A, The Employer’s Supplemental Tax
Guide.
Employee Record Calculations
About calculations in employee records
When setting up a new employee record, Sage 100 Contractor inserts the package of default payroll
calculations, including the calculation rates and maximums, on the Calculations tab. Each employee record
has its own set of payroll calculation rates, maximums, and totals. You can edit the calculation rates and
maximums in one employee record without affecting others. When you compute payroll, Sage 100 Contractor
reads the calculation rates and maximums from the Calculations tab.
Before editing the individual calculation rates and maximums, familiarize yourself with how payroll
calculations are set up. Most calculations that refer to tax tables do not allow editing. Sage 100 Contractor
determines the tax table number, but does not display the data in the Calculations tab.
You can manage the marital status settings, allowances, and withholding amounts for federal and state tax
calculations. For example, Steve works in Kansas and Nebraska. In Kansas, Steve claims married-joint
status, but in Nebraska, he claims married-separate status. In the Marital column, you can enter the
appropriate marital status for the Kansas and Nebraska income tax calculations.
Product Overview 101
Chapter 6: Payroll
You can also control whether a payroll calculation is active or inactive. When you type No in the Active cell for
a calculation, Sage 100 Contractor does not include that payroll calculation in the compute for timecards. For
example, John was given a $500 payroll advance, and the Payroll Advances calculation in John’s employee
record was set up to recover $100 per paycheck. But John has said that the next few weeks are difficult and
that he would like to suspend the repayment for a little while. In John’s employee record, type No in the Active
cell of the Payroll Advance calculation. When you are ready to resume recovering the advance, type Yes in
the Active cell of the Payroll Advance calculation.
Contractors who work on prevailing-wage jobs are required to match the difference between prevailing wages
and benefits, and actual wages and benefits paid to each employee. For each employee who works the
prevailing-wage job, you can enter the credit in the Offset column. When you compute payroll, Sage 100
Contractor applies the credit. To manage payroll for prevailing-wage jobs, set up paygroups.
NOTE:
Some states use additional tax tables to collect county taxes with the state taxes. To calculate the
correct taxes, enter the tax rate or table number in the Table# cell of the calculation.
You can withhold an additional flat amount for federal taxes or state taxes. To withhold a flat amount for a
calculation, enter the amount in the Add W/H cell of the calculation.
Compute Payroll
About computing payroll records
You can perform a trial-compute or a final-compute of the payroll records. During a compute, Sage 100
Contractor calculates the wages, deductions, benefits, and employer costs for each timecard.
After a trial-compute, you can review the individual payroll records, check the accuracy of the payroll
calculations, and make any last-minute adjustments. Before the final-compute, you can override a payroll
calculation in a specific record and provide the amount you want Sage 100 Contractor to use.
When a final-compute is completed, Sage 100 Contractor changes the status of the records to 2-Computed
and creates the job costs. In the employee records, Sage 100 Contractor updates the quarterly and year-todate totals for gross wages, Social Security, and Medicare. Sage 100 Contractor also updates the quarterly
totals of the payroll calculations.
After you have done the final-compute of the payroll, you can print payroll checks and post the records. If the
posting period has changed between the time of the final compute and posting to the general ledger, Sage 100
Contractor updates the posting period of the job cost records.
Job costs are created as part of the final compute of the payroll. At that time, however, neither the check
number nor the accounting period of the check transaction is available. The job cost records are updated later
with the check number when the check is printed. Then the accounting period and the ledger transaction link
are updated when the check is posted to the general ledger.
102 Sage 100 Contractor
Direct Deposit
Direct Deposit
About direct deposit
Direct deposit allows your employees to have their paychecks deposited directly into their bank account.
Banks require electronic delivery of payroll information by companies wanting to provide employees with
direct deposit. Sage 100 Contractor supports the creation of a file in automatic clearing house (ACH) format.
You can then send this file to your bank. Your bank will extract records from the file and create files that are
routed through ACH providers to the various employee banks.
NOTES:
Contact your bank to determine any delivery requirements, including encryption, additional file
format requirements, or other requirements. After establishing and agreeing on a method of delivery
with your bank, you can create the file and deliver it in the agreed-upon method.
Whenever any changes are made to your direct deposit file format by changing any of the formatting
options, you should contact your bank and request a retest to be sure your bank is ready for the
changes.
After creating the Direct Deposit File, Sage 100 Contractor prompts you to print a Direct Deposit
File Report that shows your Direct Deposit File information. If you do not print that report at that
time and need to reprint the report, use Options > Reprint Direct Deposit Report.
Two documents can be created during a direct deposit run: the Direct Deposit File and the Direct Deposit
File Report.
Direct Deposit File. The Direct Deposit file is created in Automated Clearing House (ACH) format and
is saved as a .txt file used by the bank. By default it is saved in the x:\MB7\companyname\Direct
Deposit folder (where x: is your network drive). The next time you save your direct deposit file, Sage 100
Contractor defaults to the directory where the file was last saved. The exact location of your direct file
appears on the Direct Deposit File Report.
Direct Deposit File Report. The generated report is saved in the \MB7\companyname\Reports folder
as an .rtf or .pdf.
Printed checks have a unique check number and an electronic deposit number that correspond to the payroll
record number. Sage 100 Contractor users with checks pre-printed with check numbers should process check
runs in sequence.
Printing direct deposit payroll checks creates and prints a non-negotiable check and supplies the employee
with a record of the payroll. You have three options for printing direct deposit checks in 5-2-4 Payroll Checks.
Direct deposit is limited to employee payroll. Sage 100 Contractor does not support electronic payment or
electronic transfer of funds for such things as:
Federal, state, or local taxes
Child care support payments
Wage garnishment
Product Overview 103
Chapter 6: Payroll
About setting up direct deposit
Before you begin to set up and process direct deposit, consider the following:
Obtain the account and routing numbers from each employee for the bank accounts into which they want
their paycheck deposited.
Determine if your bank requires a pre-notification.
Contact your bank to determine any delivery requirements, including encryption, additional file format
requirements, or other requirements specific to an individual bank.
Setting up direct deposit involves entering information in two windows, 7-2 Company Information and 5-2-1
Employees.
Under Payroll Direct Deposit Setup in the 7-2 Company Information window, you set up the parameters
that control the movement of information between your company and your bank. This is where you enter your
company bank account number, routing number, and account type, which is either checking or savings. There
are also three check boxes located under Account Type that specify the format of the file type sent to the
bank.
CAUTION: Whenever any changes are made to your direct deposit file format by changing any of the
formatting options, you should contact your bank and request a retest to be sure your bank is ready for
the changes.
You can set up direct deposit of paychecks using the Direct Deposit tab in 5-2-1 Employees. The employee
must provide you with the following information for each account to which he or she wants funds deposited:
account type, routing number, account number, rate type, and rate. You can deposit funds in up to four
different bank accounts for an employee.
IMPORTANT:
Sage 100 Contractor does not support an employee receiving a combination of direct deposit and a
physical paycheck.
Account status is set by the payroll administrator. It is not provided by the employee.
Posting Payroll to the General Ledger
About posting payroll
You can enter timecards, compute payroll, and even print payroll checks without posting the payroll records.
When you are ready, you can post individual payroll records or all payroll records for a specified pay period.
When you post payroll, Sage 100 Contractor:
Debits gross payroll:
Job costs post to the direct expense account. If you have selected the Post Payroll to WIP check box
in the job record, payroll posts to a WIP account. If the WIP account uses subsidiary accounts, payroll
posts to a subsidiary account that uses the job number as the account number.
104 Sage 100 Contractor
Payroll Calculations
Equipment repair or maintenance costs post to the equipment/shop account.
All remaining costs post to the overhead or administrative account, which is determined by the employee
position.
Debits payroll expenses to the ledger accounts as indicated in the payroll calculation.
Credits net payroll to the checking account entered in the Payroll Posting window.
Credits the ledger accounts as indicated in the payroll calculation.
If you do not specify which records or pay periods to post, Sage 100 Contractor posts all payroll records
assigned 2-Computed or 4-Reverse. After posting is complete, Sage 100 Contractor changes records with
status 2-Computed to status 3-Posted, and records with status 4-Reverse to status 5-Void.
Payroll Calculations
About payroll calculations
Payroll calculations provide the rules for computing deductions, benefits, and employer costs. You can set up
payroll calculations manually, or you can create the set of standard calculations supplied by Sage 100
Contractor.
CAUTION: Setting up payroll calculations can be complex. If you need assistance, consult your
business partner.
After you have set up the calculations, you can add them to the employee records. Each employee record
maintains its own list of calculation rates, calculation maximums, and quarterly totals for the payroll
calculations. On the Calculations tab in the 5-2-1 Employees window, you can edit the calculation rates and
maximums for one employee record without affecting the others.
When you compute payroll, Sage 100 Contractor reads the calculation rates and maximums from the
employee record, and uses those rates with the payroll calculations. Depending on the type of calculation you
want to set up, Sage 100 Contractor: (1) makes certain calculation selections for you that you cannot change;
and (2) makes certain suggestions about what you may change:
Federal and state taxes (Social Security, Medicare and FUTA): Sage 100 Contractor contains the
tax tables necessary for computing federal and state income taxes. For each state that your employees
work in, set up a payroll calculation to compute the state income tax. While some states do not levy an
income tax, the calculation is still necessary to maintain accurate wage information.
To compute taxes correctly, some states require additional setup in the employee records. For details on
setting up tax calculations for specific states and municipalities, see Appendix D—Tax Setup
Information
NOTE: Do not set up more than one calculation for Tax Type 3 (Employer Social Security) or Tax
Type 4 (Employer Medicare). Doing so will cause audit errors.
Local payroll tax districts. Many counties and municipalities levy income taxes. You can specify the
correct local payroll-tax districts and then assign the locales to the appropriate job and employees.
Product Overview 105
Chapter 6: Payroll
Calculated amounts that add to or deduct from pay for specific reasons. In some cases, it is
necessary to create different payroll calculations for the same purpose. For example you may need
different methods to calculate wage garnishments, retirement plans or union deductions.
Building Payroll Calculations
Creating standard payroll calculations. To get started, we recommend that you take advantage of the
standard calculations that Sage 100 Contractor can automatically create for you. If you choose to create
the set of standard calculations, you will need to review and possibly adjust and/or manually add
additional calculations later. See "About pre-built standard payroll calculations" on page 106
Setting up payroll calculations. You can set up payroll calculations manually by defining each type of
calculation that you will need. There are many parameters for each calculation that must be carefully
reviewed before setup.
About pre-built standard payroll calculations
Sage 100 Contractor comes with a set of standard payroll calculations. We recommend that you use these
standard payroll calculations as a starting point.
You can use the pre-built standard calculations only for a new company that does not already have the
calculations set up. It is important to review and modify the standard calculations after you set them up to
ensure they meet your regional requirements.
Sage 100 Contractor creates the following calculations:
Social Security—Employee
Medicare—Employee
Federal Income Tax—Employee
Social Security—Employer
Medicare—Employer
Federal Unemployment—Employer (FUTA)
Per Diem
Advances
Workers’ Compensation
Liability Insurance
State Income Tax—Employee
State Disability Insurance—Employee
State Unemployment Insurance—Employee
Creating standard payroll calculations
IMPORTANT:
If you choose to create the standard calculations, you must do so before setting up any calculations manually.
106 Sage 100 Contractor
Payroll Calculations
Even though some states do not have state income tax, the state income tax calculation must be set up in the
5-3-1 Payroll Calculations window so that the Workers’ Compensation report prints correctly. Also, the
state income tax calculation must be set up so that W-2 forms calculate correctly.
To create standard payroll calculations
1 Open 5-3-1 Payroll Calculations.
2 On the menu bar, click Options, then click Create Standard Calculations.
3 Carefully review each standard payroll calculation.
4 Some of the account numbers may need to be modified. If you used the Sage 100 Contractor standard 4digit or 5-digit chart of accounts and have not made modifications, the account numbers will be correct. If
you have used or created another chart of accounts or modified one of the standard ones, you will need to
review each of the account numbers carefully.
5 For each state tax calculation, you must enter the state abbreviation in the State text box.
6 For the State Disability Insurance and the State Unemployment Insurance calculations, you must enter the
Default Rate, Default Maximum, and Max Type.
7 Set up any additional calculations.
Setting up payroll calculations
The taxes to which calculations are subject vary by state or region. Verify the selections with your
accountant, or if it is a benefit, the benefit plan administrator.
CAUTION: Verify that all your calculations are correct before running a trial-compute of your payroll. If
you are unsure about the results, contact Customer Support or your business partner for assistance.
To set up payroll calculations
1. Open 5-3-1 Payroll Calculations.
2. In the data control box, enter the number you want to assign the new calculation.
3. In the Description box, enter a brief statement about the calculation.
4. In the Tax Type list, click the type of earning, accrual, or deduction that you are setting up.
5. Depending on the tax type you selected, make additional selections as required for:
Calculation Type. If you selected None as the Tax Type, you need to specify the type of earning,
accrual, or deduction.
Calculation Method. This list is available if you selected None or 19 - Employee
RPP Contributions as the Tax Type. Click the method to use to compute the earning, accrual, or
deduction,
Based On. This list is available if you selected None as the Tax Type and 7 - %Other Calculation
for the Calculation Method. Click the type of amount on which to base the payroll calculation.
Product Overview 107
Chapter 6: Payroll
Default Rate.Enter the standard calculation rate.
IMPORTANT: When you use calculation method 17-Tables for federal or state income taxes,
Sage 100 Contractor sets the rate. The rate does not appear in the payroll calculation or the
employee record.
Default Max. Enter the calculation maximum.
Max Type. Click the type of maximum for the calculation.
6. Specify the accounts that will be affected by this payroll calculation:
a. In the Job Expense, Shop Expense, Overhead Expense, and Admin Expense boxes, enter the
ledger account numbers to debit for each type of expense.
b. In the Credit Account box, enter the liability account number to credit.
c. In the Credit Subaccount box, enter the ledger subaccount number to credit.
NOTE: If you want to use the employee number as the subsidiary account number, click Use
employee# as subaccount.
IMPORTANT: The Credit Account and Credit Subaccount are typically liability accounts. You
must specify a Credit Account, but a Credit Subaccount is only necessary dependent upon
your general ledger setup.
7. Under Subject to, verify the deductions to which the calculation is subject.
8. Under Tax Area:
a. If the calculation is for a specific state, enter the state abbreviation in the Tax State box.
b. If the calculation is for a specific local payroll tax district, click the district number in the Tax Locale
list.
9. Under Reporting:
a. To include the calculation on a union report, select the union from the Union list.
b. To include the payroll calculation on certified payroll reports, select the type of benefit in the Benefit
list.
c. To report the calculation total in box 11, 12, 13, or 14 on W-2 forms, enter the box number in the W-2
Box field.
d. To include a special code on the W-2, enter the code in the W-2 Code box.
10. Select the following check boxes that apply to the payroll calculation:
Use in Paygroup Benefits
Display on Check
Disposable Earnings
Default to New Employees
11. On the File menu, click Save.
108 Sage 100 Contractor
Payroll Calculations
About calculations in employee records
When setting up a new employee record, Sage 100 Contractor inserts the package of default payroll
calculations, including the calculation rates and maximums, on the Calculations tab. Each employee record
has its own set of payroll calculation rates, maximums, and totals. You can edit the calculation rates and
maximums in one employee record without affecting others. When you compute payroll, Sage 100 Contractor
reads the calculation rates and maximums from the Calculations tab.
Before editing the individual calculation rates and maximums, familiarize yourself with how payroll
calculations are set up. Most calculations that refer to tax tables do not allow editing. Sage 100 Contractor
determines the tax table number, but does not display the data in the Calculations tab.
You can manage the marital status settings, allowances, and withholding amounts for federal and state tax
calculations. For example, Steve works in Kansas and Nebraska. In Kansas, Steve claims married-joint
status, but in Nebraska, he claims married-separate status. In the Marital column, you can enter the
appropriate marital status for the Kansas and Nebraska income tax calculations.
You can also control whether a payroll calculation is active or inactive. When you type No in the Active cell for
a calculation, Sage 100 Contractor does not include that payroll calculation in the compute for timecards. For
example, John was given a $500 payroll advance, and the Payroll Advances calculation in John’s employee
record was set up to recover $100 per paycheck. But John has said that the next few weeks are difficult and
that he would like to suspend the repayment for a little while. In John’s employee record, type No in the Active
cell of the Payroll Advance calculation. When you are ready to resume recovering the advance, type Yes in
the Active cell of the Payroll Advance calculation.
Contractors who work on prevailing-wage jobs are required to match the difference between prevailing wages
and benefits, and actual wages and benefits paid to each employee. For each employee who works the
prevailing-wage job, you can enter the credit in the Offset column. When you compute payroll, Sage 100
Contractor applies the credit. To manage payroll for prevailing-wage jobs, set up paygroups.
NOTE:
Some states use additional tax tables to collect county taxes with the state taxes. To calculate the
correct taxes, enter the tax rate or table number in the Table# cell of the calculation.
You can withhold an additional flat amount for federal taxes or state taxes. To withhold a flat amount for a
calculation, enter the amount in the Add W/H cell of the calculation.
Adding payroll calculations to employee records
When setting up a new employee record on 5-2-1 Employees, Sage 100 Contractor inserts the package of
default payroll calculations, calculation rates, and maximums on the Calculations tab. You can insert
additional payroll calculations at any time.
To add payroll calculations
1 Open 5-2-1 Employees.
2 Click the Calculations tab.
Product Overview 109
Chapter 6: Payroll
3 In the Calculation column, in an empty cell, click once, and then click the down arrow button to display the
Payroll Calculations Lookup window.
4 Select and insert the calculation(s).
TIP: Alternatively, you can right-click in an empty cell of the Calculation column and select from the
menu of Pick Lists. Press the F5 key to open the Payroll Calculations Lookup, or F8 to open the
Payroll Calculations Lookup window as a Picklist.
About tax tables for setting up federal and state tax calculations
Sage 100 Contractor contains the tax tables necessary for computing federal and state income taxes. For
each state you work in, create a payroll calculation for state income tax. The calculation is necessary to
maintain the correct gross wage totals for each employee, and to ensure accurate state quarterly reports,
state tax reports, and W-2 forms.
IMPORTANT:
Although some states do not have state income tax, state income tax calculations must be set up:
In the 5-3-1 Payroll Calculations window, so that reports based on state wages are accurate and print
correctly.
In the 5-2-1 Employees window for employees, so that payroll calculations compute correctly.
If you work in a state that does not levy an income tax, you still need to create a payroll calculation. For those
states, a tax is not calculated, but Sage 100 Contractor stores the state wage for state reports. In addition,
some calculations use the state wage to compute additional deductions such as state unemployment or
disability. For those types of calculations, it is important to select the State Income Tax check box.
Otherwise, the payroll calculation may not compute the deduction correctly.
About calculation types
The calculation type determines how a payroll calculation affects a timecard. For example, when you assign a
payroll calculation 1-Deduct from Employee, Sage 100 Contractor deducts the result of the calculation from
the employee’s wages.
For most payroll calculations, the program determines the calculation type and the taxes that a calculation is
subject to based on the tax type.
If you select tax type 0-None, however, you can select the calculation type.
Calculation type 1-Deduct from Employee
Payroll Taxes. For each payroll tax, set up a payroll calculation.
If your company performs work in different states, set up a payroll calculation for every state in which your
employees work, regardless of whether the state levies an income tax. In addition, set up a payroll calculation
for each local payroll tax district, such as city and county.
110 Sage 100 Contractor
Payroll Calculations
At the calendar year-end, verify the tax rates and maximums for each calculation. Sage 100 Contractor
provides Federal and State tax updates each year.
Payroll Advance. Create a calculation for payroll advances. Sage 100 Contractor automatically recovers the
advance for you.
Tool Purchases. Some companies allow employees to purchase personal tools from vendors using the
company account. You can set up a payroll calculation to deduct the employee’s purchases from his or her
paycheck.
When you post the vendor’s original invoice for the tool purchase, post it to the Small Tools account in the
Overhead Expense range of accounts. To then deduct the tool purchases from an employee’s paycheck, set
up the payroll calculation to post a credit to the Small Tools account. Because the amount deducted from an
employee’s paycheck varies based on the cost of the tools purchased, select calculation method 18-Variable
(manual calculation).
While you can deduct the cost of tools from the employee’s paycheck, it is a better practice for employees to
reimburse tool purchases through personal checks, made payable to your company.
Health Insurance. Create a payroll calculation to deduct the employee’s portion of the cost for medical
insurance. Usually this is a fixed amount per month.
If you need to deduct the health insurance each pay period, convert the monthly amount to a per-period
amount. From the monthly amount, compute the annual amount and divide by the number of pay periods in a
year. If your company pays its employees weekly, for example, divide the annual amount by 52. Then enter
the per-period amount in each employee’s record on the Calculations tab.
When employees cannot earn paychecks regularly, due to weather or other circumstances, set up the Health
Insurance calculation with a maximum type of 6-Dollars/Month. Then on the Calculations tab in the
employee records, enter an accelerated rate and a monthly maximum for the payroll calculation.
Garnishments. (Child support, Previous Year Income Taxes, Court Judgments, and so on) Create a payroll
calculation for each type of garnishment. If similar garnishments require different methods of calculation,
create a separate calculation for each garnishment.
Suppose you need to garnish the wages of two employees for child support, and a third employee’s wages for
back taxes. The first employee’s garnishment is for a set dollar amount each pay period and the second
employee’s garnishment is for a percentage of the net pay. Set up two separate calculations for child support
garnishments, though both can post to the same payable account. Then set up a third calculation for the
garnishment of back taxes, which posts to a different payable account.
If you want to post each garnishment to a different ledger account, create the separate ledger accounts in the
Current Liabilities range of accounts. Select the Employee Number as Subaccount check box to post the
garnishment to a subsidiary ledger account using the employee’s record number as the subsidiary account
number.
Some methods of computing garnishments might be too complex for Sage 100 Contractor to automatically
calculate, such as a percentage of the net pay with a minimum or maximum amount. In this case, set up a
payroll calculation with a variable calculation method.
Product Overview 111
Chapter 6: Payroll
Pension Plans. Some businesses set up pension plans such as a 401(k), to which employees contribute. In
general, 401(k) deductions are not subject to Federal and state income taxes. Check with your state agencies
to determine what is taxable.
Many pension plans allow employees to contribute a flat amount or a percent of the employee’s paycheck.
You may need to create two payroll calculations and assign the appropriate calculation to each employee
based on how he or she wants to contribute.
To create a pension plan deduction, set up the payroll calculation with tax type 19-Elective Deferral and
calculation type 1-Deduct from Employee. Because each employee can choose the flat amount or percent
of his or her paycheck to contribute, enter the employee’s amount or rate in the Calculations tab of each
employee record.
To post the credit, set up a separate ledger account in the Current Liabilities range of accounts. Select the
Employee Number as Subaccount check box to post each employee’s contribution to a subsidiary ledger
account using the employee’s record number as the subsidiary account number. The subsidiary accounts help
you manage the individual employee contributions, and know what amount to pay on behalf of each employee.
Calculation type 2-Add to Gross
Cash benefits for prevailing wage. Non-union contractors working Davis-Bacon or prevailing-wage jobs
must pay employees a cash equivalent to the union wage and benefits. After setting up the paygroups, set up
a payroll calculation for each benefit, such as vacation, pension, and health and welfare.
Because the benefit is being paid as cash, set up the calculation using calculation type 2-Add to Gross, and
post the credit to the ledger account number of the payroll checking account. Sage 100 Contractor adds the
result of the calculation to the employee’s gross wage.
TIP: You can include cash benefits in the Certified Payroll report. In the Benefit list, click the type of
benefit the calculation represents.
Calculation type 3-Employer Cost
NOTE: Calculations type 3-Employer Cost can be used can be used to accrue virtually any type of
employer cost.
Payroll Taxes. For each payroll tax, set up a payroll calculation.
If your company performs work in different states, set up a payroll calculation for every state in which your
employees work, regardless of whether the state levies an income tax. In addition, set up a payroll calculation
for each local payroll tax district, such as city and county.
At the calendar year-end, verify the tax rates and maximums for each calculation. Sage 100 Contractor
provides Federal and State tax updates each year.
Workers’ Compensation Insurance. When you set up a payroll calculation for Workers’ Compensation,
Sage 100 Contractor uses the rates set up in the Workers’ Compensation window. Select 17-Tables as the
calculation method.
112 Sage 100 Contractor
Payroll Calculations
Liability Insurance. You can set up the liability insurance calculation to use the rates from the Workers’
Compensation window. Select 17-Tables as the calculation method, and credit the account to which you post
the insurance payments.
Generally, liability insurance covers field employees and sometimes the owner, but not office employees. For
each exempt employee, change the payroll calculation’s rate to 0 on the Calculations tab of the employee
record.
Some companies compute the liability insurance as a percent of gross pay. In the Tax Type list, click 0None. In the Calculation Method list, click 1-Percent Gross Pay. The rate is usually the same as the
payroll rate on the insurance policy.
Health Insurance. Set up a payroll calculation to deduct the employer’s portion of the cost for medical
insurance. The amount is usually a fixed rate per month.
To deduct the health insurance each pay period, convert the monthly amount to a per-period amount. First,
convert the monthly amount to an annual amount, then divide by the number of pay periods in a year. If your
company pays its employees weekly, for example, divide the annual amount by 52.
Pension Plans. Some businesses set up pension plans, such as a 401(k), to which employers contribute. In
the Tax Type list, click 0-None. In the Benefit list, click 2-Pension to include the matching amount on
Certified Payroll reports.
To create a pension deduction, set up the payroll calculation as follows: tax type 0-None and calculation type
3-Employer Cost. Because each employee can choose to contribute either a flat amount or percent of his or
her paycheck, you might have to create two calculations.
To post the credit, you can post to the same account used to post the employees’ deductions for the pension
plan, or you can set up a separate ledger account in the Current Liabilities range of accounts. Whether you
post the employer portion of the pension plans to subsidiary accounts depends on your particular needs.
Union shops or open shops that perform Davis-Bacon or prevailing-wage work should not use subsidiary
accounts to track the individual matching amounts. To make the payment, each subsidiary account would
have to be referenced on the check. Instead, you can use the certified payroll reports to track the amounts
paid. If you are using paygroups, you need to enter the pension rates in the Paygroup Benefits window.
Select the Employee Number as Subaccount check box to post each employee’s contribution to a
subsidiary ledger account using the employee’s record number as the subsidiary account number. The
subsidiary accounts help you manage the individual employee contributions, and know what amount to pay on
behalf of each employee.
Tool Use: You can recover the cost of small tools by setting up a calculation for a flat rate per hour that
applies to all working field employees. To determine the hourly rate, look at the amount your company spent
purchasing small tools for a time, such as the previous year. Then divide that amount by the number of hours
worked by field employees during the same time. For employees that do not work in the field, change the rate
to 0 in the Calculations tab in the employee records.
Calculation type 4-Add/Deduct
Vehicle use. Some companies provide a vehicle to an employee as a benefit.
Product Overview 113
Chapter 6: Payroll
Set up the payroll calculation with calculation type 4-Add/Deduct (taxable). The calculation adds the dollar
value to the gross wages, computes the taxes, and then deducts the dollar value from the gross wages. The
calculation results in an increase to the taxable wage.
Union Vacation. Contractors are responsible for computing the taxes for vacation pay and filing the
necessary reports. When dealing with two or more unions, you might need to create a separate payroll
calculation to compute the union vacation for each union local.
Set up the payroll calculation with calculation type 4-Add/Deduct (taxable). The calculation adds the dollar
value to the gross wages, computes the taxes, and then deducts the dollar value from the gross wages. The
calculation results in an increase to the taxable wage.
To include the calculation in the default set of paygroup benefits, select the Use in Paygroup Benefits check
box.
Calculation type 5-Accrued Hours
You can use calculation type 5-Accrued Hours to create a calculation that builds up hours. For example, you
could use this calculation to keep track of hours used to determine an employee’s vacation time.
A payroll calculation that uses calculation type 5-Accrued Hours does not post to the general ledger or create
job costs.
About calculation methods
The calculation method tells Sage 100 Contractor how to use the calculation.
For example, if a calculation uses a per hour calculation method, Sage 100 Contractor multiples the number of
hours worked by the rate assigned to the calculation.
Percent Gross Pay (unadjusted): Computes a percent of the gross wages.
Percent Total Taxable Wages: Computes a percent of the wages subject to Medicare (Taxable wages
= gross pay + taxable add-ons – non-taxable deductions). You can use this calculation method for
employer calculations that are not subject to taxes, and employee deductions that are subject to all taxes
and do not use calculation types 2-Add to Gross or 4-Add/Deduct (taxable). Do not use calculation
method 2-Percent Total Taxable Wages for a deduction that is not subject to all taxes, such as a 401(k).
Percent Gross + Paygroup Benefits: Computes a percent of the wages subject to Medicare (Taxable
wages = gross pay + taxable add-ons – non-taxable deductions). You can only use this calculation for
paygroup benefit packages because Sage 100 Contractor only looks at the taxable add-ons and nontaxable deductions in the paygroup. Calculation method 3-Percentage Gross + Paygroup Benefits
requires the calculation to have a calculation number larger than the calculation that adds the benefit to
the gross wage. Sage 100 Contractor executes each payroll calculation in the order established by the
calculation numbers.
Percent Regular Pay (regular hours only): Computes a percent of the regular pay based on regular
hours only, and does not include any pay from hours marked as overtime or premium. For example, if an
employee works an eight-hour day plus two hours of overtime, Sage 100 Contractor computes the
percent based on eight hours of regular pay.
114 Sage 100 Contractor
Payroll Calculations
Percent Regular Pay (all hours): Computes a percent of the regular pay based on all hours worked,
including overtime and premium hours. For example, if an employee works an eight-hour day plus two
hours of overtime, Sage 100 Contractor computes the percent based on ten hours of regular pay.
Percent Disposable Income (net): Computes a percent of the net pay after taxes. If two or more wage
attachments apply to the same employee and you use 6-Percent Disposable Income (net) as the means
of calculation, you may need to combine the calculations to withhold the correct amount.
Percent Other Calculation : Computes an amount based on the result from another calculation.
Calculation method 7-Percent Other Calculation requires you to select the prior calculation on which you
are basing this calculation. In the Based on list, click the calculation you want to use. The based on
calculation on must have a calculation number smaller than the current, payroll calculation number. Sage
100 Contractor executes each payroll calculation in the order established by the calculation numbers.
Per Hour (all hours): Multiplies the rate by the number of hours worked.
Per Hour (regular hours only): Multiplies the rate by the number of regular hours worked. This
excludes overtime and premium hours.
Per Day: Computes an amount based on the number of days worked.
Per Pay Period: Computes a flat amount each pay period.
Regular/Overtime/Premium (0*, 1*, 1*): Computes overtime and premium wages for add-ons or
benefits using overtime and premium wage rates indicated in the employee record. Sage 100 Contractor
calculates overtime wages at the rate, and calculates premium wages at the rate.
Regular/Overtime/Premium (0*, 1.5*, 2*): Computes overtime and premium wages for add-ons or
benefits using overtime and premium wage rates indicated in the employee record. Sage 100 Contractor
calculates overtime wages at 1.5 times the rate, and calculates premium wages at 2 times the rate.
Regular/Overtime/Premium (1*, 1.5*, 1.5*): Computes regular, overtime, and premium wages using
regular, overtime, and premium wage rates indicated in the employee record. Sage 100 Contractor
calculates overtime wages at 1.5 times the rate, and calculates premium wages at 1.5 times the rate.
Regular/Overtime/Premium (1*, 1.5*, 2*): Computes regular, overtime, and premium wages using
regular, overtime, and premium wage rates indicated in the employee record. Sage 100 Contractor
calculates overtime wages at 1.5 times the rate, and calculates premium wages at 2 times the rate.
Regular/Overtime/Premium (1*, 2*, 2*): Computes regular, overtime, and premium wages using
regular, overtime, and premium wage rates indicated in the employee record. Sage 100 Contractor
calculates overtime wages at 2 times the rate, and calculates premium wages at 2 times the rate.
Tables: Computes taxes using rates from a tax table. Sage 100 Contractor contains the necessary
federal and state tax tables, but does not display the rates and maximums.
Variable (manual calculation): Allows you to enter a rate in the payroll record before the final-compute.
About payroll calculation defaults
IMPORTANT: The Default Rate, Default Max and Max Type boxes in 5-3-1 Payroll Calculations are
defaults. When you create standard payroll calculations, these amounts are automatically created for
many of the calculations. This information from 5-3-1 Payroll Calculations is not used to compute
payroll; however, Max Type is used when the records are computed.
Product Overview 115
Chapter 6: Payroll
Default Rate
When entering the default rate, ask yourself: Will a default rate help me when entering new employees?
Some calculations apply to all employees and have fixed rates, such as Social Security and Medicare taxes.
Other calculations apply to all employees but may have varying rates, such as health insurance premiums and
other benefits. Some other additional calculations apply to only a subset of employees and may have fixed
rates too.
When entering default rates, it is very important to remember that this field is only a default. The actual rate
used when payroll records are computed comes from either the individual employee record or the paygroup.
If there is a common rate, you may want to enter it so that it will then default to the employee record when
entering a new employee. You may feel, however, that it is “safer” to require yourself to directly enter the rate
for each employee to ensure having the correct rate every time rather than having an incorrect default
accepted.
Moreover, some default calculations apply to only a subset of employees and may have varying rates, such
as child support and other wage garnishments. There is no common rate for this group because this
calculation doesn't apply to most employees, and therefore the common rate is actually zero.
Default Max
When considering the default maximum, use the same criteria as you use for the default rate. Ask yourself
this question: Will a maximum rate help me when entering new employees?
Max Type
Wage-based maximum types mean that the calculation stops computing when the employee’s wages reach
the maximum level.
This kind of maximum is usually used in connection with tax calculations because they are usually published
in this style by the government agency. For example, the IRS states something like this: Social Security tax
is 6.2% on all wages up to $87,000.
Per Quarter and Per Year types are based on wages that are subject to Medicare.
Per Check and Per Month types are based on unadjusted gross wages.
Dollar-based maximum types mean that the calculation stops computing when the amount of the
calculation reaches the maximum level.
This kind of maximum is useful when a dollar amount needs to be calculated without regard to the employee’s
earnings. For example, you may want to calculate an employer-matching 401(k) at 50% of what the employee
contributes, but the matching is not to exceed $1,000 per year.
Per Year types are based on all computed payrolls to date.
Per Quarter types are based on all computed payrolls assigned to the same quarter number that is on
the current payroll record.
116 Sage 100 Contractor
Payroll Calculations
Per Month types are based on all computed payrolls that have a check date in the same month as the
current payroll record.
IMPORTANT: It is important to enter the correct check date on the payroll records prior to
computing so that Sage 100 Contractor is aware of the month to which the current payroll is
assigned.
Per Check types are based solely on the current payroll record.
Updating employee calculations using 5-3-1 Payroll Calculations Options menu
The 5-3-1 Payroll Calculations Options menu provides two menu commands with subcommands for
updating employees’ payroll calculations under Update Employees. The option for Update Maximum Only
does not add the calculation to employees that do not have it already.
Update Default Rate and Maximum
ALL Employees—Updates employees’ payroll calculation with the Default Rate and Max from the currently
displayed calculation (if it does not already exist for the employee).
‘Current’ Employees—Updates “current” employees’ payroll calculation with the Default Rate and Max from
the currently displayed calculation (if it does not already exist for the employee).
Employees with this Calculation—Updates employees’ payroll calculation with the Default Rate and Max
from the currently displayed calculation that already have it.
Update Maximum only
ALL Employees—Updates employees’ payroll calculation with the Max only from the currently displayed
calculation (if it does not already exist for the employee).
‘Current’ Employees—Updates “current” employees’ payroll calculation with the Max only from the currently
displayed calculation (if it does not already exist for the employee).
To update employee calculations for Default Rate and Maximum:
1 Open 5-3-1 Payroll Calculations.
2 Using the data control, select a payroll calculation.
3 On the menu bar, click Options > Update Employees > Update Default Rate and Maximum, and
select one of the following:
ALL Employees
‘Current’ Employees
Employees with this Calculation
4 On the File menu, click Save.
To update employee calculations for Maximum only:
1 Open 5-3-1 Payroll Calculations.
Product Overview 117
Chapter 6: Payroll
2 Using the data control, select a payroll calculation.
3 On the menu bar, click Options > Update Employees > Update Maximum Only, and then select one of
the following:
ALL Employees
‘Current’ Employees
4 On the File menu, click Save.
Workers' Compensation
About Workers Compensation
In the 5-3-2 Workers’ Compensation window, you can set up the table for workers’ compensation codes,
rates, and experience modifiers. Sage 100 Contractor uses the table in conjunction with the workers’
compensation payroll calculation to compute the premium for each code category. How you set up the
workers’ compensation codes depends on the requirements for each state.
Some states use two-tiered codes, where two rates apply to a single category of work.
Some states require the employer to pay for general liability insurance. Often the liability rates are based
on the risk groups, but are not affected by the experience modification.
Some states use a dollar per hour rate instead of a percent; some use both.
Some states do not require subcontractors to carry workers’ compensation insurance. Often the general
contractors carry the liability insurance burden for the subcontractor.
The states of Ohio and New York may include a workers’ compensation value in the Maximum Wage
column.
Use the compensation codes from the insurer's policy or report whenever possible. Companies with multiple
policies may find that the policies share compensation codes. If this occurs, you may need to create a
separate numbering system for Sage 100 Contractor to use. Then include each state’s compensation code at
the end of the description.
After you have set up the table, you can assign the workers’ compensation codes to the cost codes and
employee records. When you enter a timecard, Sage 100 Contractor first looks to the cost code. If Sage 100
Contractor does not find a compensation code, Sage 100 Contractor then looks to the employee record.
It is a good idea to write the expiration dates of your workers’ compensation policies on your company
calendar. Also, write a reminder on the calendar one month prior to the policy expiration so you can get quotes
for the next policy term. When you renew the policies, adjust the rates and experience modifications in the 53-2 Workers’ Compensation Codes window.
A few states have special requirements for calculating workers’ compensation. For more details, see
Appendix D: Tax Setup Information and help topics about these state’s specific workers’ compensation
requirements.
118 Sage 100 Contractor
Employee Positions
Workers’ compensation for subcontractors
Some states do not require subcontractors to carry workers’ compensation insurance. In these states, the
subcontractors may use the general contractor’s insurance policy for the duration of the job, and the general
contractor deducts the cost of coverage from payments to the subcontractor. Check with your state for
compliance requirements, as the laws vary in each state.
You can set up the vendor record of a subcontractor with the employer’s compensation rate. When entering
the payable invoice, you can charge the subcontractor for coverage based on the invoiced amount. The
charge appears as a credit on the subcontractor’s invoice.
The credit does not appear on the Workers’ Compensation report, which only uses data from payroll
records. To track and report these costs, it is a good idea to create a separate Workers’ Compensation
ledger account.
Employee Positions
About employee positions
Employee positions determine how you post payroll costs to the general ledger. Create employee positions
that represent the type of work performed by employees such as office workers, job supervisors, and laborers.
The list does not need to be complex. However, you must create at least one employee position.
After creating the employee positions, assign them to employee records. When you post a payroll record,
Sage 100 Contractor looks at the position in an employee’s record, and the ledger accounts in the employee
positions table:
When a timecard line contains a job number, payroll posts to the ledger account in the Job Wages cell.
When a timecard line contains an equipment number (for maintenance or repair), payroll posts to the
ledger account in the Equipment Wages cell.
When a payroll record does not contain timecard lines, or a timecard line does not contain a job number or
equipment number, Sage 100 Contractor posts to the ledger account in the Other Wages cell.
You can also add a department to each position. When you post a payroll record, Sage 100 Contractor first
looks to the job record for a department number. If Sage 100 Contractor does not find a department number in
the job record, it next looks to the cost code. If the cost code does not contain a department number, Sage 100
Contractor then looks to the employee position.
Paygroups
About paygroups
Use paygroups to manage wages and the benefit packages for union shops, or open shops working DavisBacon projects. You can include the paygroups in the employee record or in the job record to provide the
correct paygroup when entering timecards. The paygroup then becomes the source for wages and benefits on
the timecard lines.
Product Overview 119
Chapter 6: Payroll
For union shops, set up a paygroup for each combination of pay scale and benefits package that you
need to report. Then assign the appropriate paygroup to each employee record. During timecard entry,
Sage 100 Contractor assigns the paygroup from the employee record to each timecard line.
When working with multiple unions, it is a good idea to provide the union number at the beginning of the
paygroup description. Place the important information at the beginning of the description. For example,
80% Apprentice instead of Apprentice—80%.
In open shops, the requirements between the prevailing-wage projects can vary, and employees can
work under a variety of pay categories. For each prevailing-wage project, set up the appropriate
paygroups for each combination of pay scale and benefits package that you need to report. Then in the
job record, you can list only the paygroups for that job. When you enter a job number on a timecard line,
Sage 100 Contractor looks for a list of paygroups. If the job record contains a list of paygroups, it then
uses the employee’s position to determine the appropriate paygroup and inserts it on the timecard line.
When creating the paygroups, organize the paygroups by job or geographic area. When numbering the
paygroups, skip a few numbers between groups in case you need to add other paygroups later. You may also
want to include a job or area description in the paygroup name. This allows quick identification of the correct
paygroup when entering timecards.
Each union or prevailing-wage project has specific requirements as to how the benefits are calculated. To
manage the different benefit packages, you can assign an independent set of payroll calculations to each
paygroup. It is important to review each benefit you provide and determine if it meets the requirements set
forth by the governing agency. If not, you will need to create a new payroll calculation.
Local Payroll Tax
About local payroll taxes
Many counties and municipalities levy income taxes. In the Local Payroll Taxes window, set up the table of
local payroll tax districts and their rates. You can then assign the locales to the appropriate job and employee
records. If an employee lives in a locale, add the locale to the employee’s record. If a job site is located in a
locale, add the locale to the job record.
There are a variety of ways to set up the districts:
Some districts base the taxes on whether the employee lives inside or outside the locality. The resident rate
applies to employees that work and live in the same locality, while the non-resident rate applies to employees
who work in the locality but live elsewhere.
During the payroll computation, Sage 100 Contractor compares the locale in the job record to the locality in the
employee record. If the districts match, Sage 100 Contractor computes taxes at the resident rate. If the
district numbers differ, Sage 100 Contractor computes taxes at the non-resident rate.
In some regions, employees are subject to several taxes, such as city and county income taxes. As Sage 100
Contractor only lets you assign one locality to a job record, employee record, or timecard line, you can
combine districts in the Local Payroll Tax window to form a new district. You can then assign the combined
district as needed.
120 Sage 100 Contractor
Federal and state Filing
When a local payroll tax applies to employees regardless where they work, you can set up the district to work
like state income tax.
When employees work multiple states but there are no local payroll tax districts, use the districts to control
how Sage 100 Contractor computes state income tax for each timecard line.
Each locality requires a corresponding payroll calculation. In most circumstances, each payroll calculation
uses calculation method 17-Tables, and refers to the table of localities for the rates.
Federal and state Filing
About Sage 100 Contractor integration with Aatrix
What is Aatrix®?
Aatrix is a leading provider of tax-form filing and compliance services. It is in business to help you complete
state and federal payroll reports directly from your software. Now that Aatrix has been integrated into Sage
100 Contractor, you have the ability to fill out report forms, print, and then send them to federal and state
entities.
In addition, if you enroll with Aatrix and set up an account, you can file reports electronically through Aatrix
while working within Sage 100 Contractor.
Whether you print and send your tax reports or you files the reports electronically, with Aatrix integration there
is no longer any need to create these tax reports manually.
What do I get if I register Aatrix through Sage 100 Contractor?
If you choose to register, you can fill out and print Aatrix report forms, and then send them to federal or state
entities.
If you choose not to register, you can still use Aatrix in “Evaluate” mode; however, the forms you print will
have a “DEMO” watermark. You cannot file them with federal and state entities.
How do I register?
As soon as you open the Sage 100 Contractor windows, 5-4-1 Federal Tax Forms by Aatrix® or 5-4-2 State
Tax Forms by Aatrix®, you are prompted to register Aatrix through your Sage 100 Contractor so that it is
associated with your Sage Service Plan.
As a benefit for our customers, registering Aatrix through Sage 100 Contractor allows you to use Aatrix forms.
We recommend that you register immediately to take advantage of this valuable service.
Can I file electronically when I register?
Registering through Sage 100 Contractor allows you to use all the Aatrix report forms for your tax reports and
then print them. Registering the Aatrix software through Sage 100 Contractor does not enroll you with an
Aatrix account for filing electronically. To use electronic filing, you have to register for an Aatrix account.
Product Overview 121
Chapter 6: Payroll
How do I enroll with Aatrix so that I can file electronically?
For more information about enrolling with Aatrix and setting up an account for efiling, visit
https://efile.aatrix.com/
What is the Aatrix fee structure for electronic filing?
For more information about Aatrix fees, visit https://partner.aatrix.com/sage100contractor/.
Can I file W-2s electronically?
For more information about filing W-2s electronically, visit http://efile.aatrix.com/SMB029/info.aspx.
How do I use Aatrix with Sage 100 Contractor?
Basically, open either 5-4-1 Federal Tax Forms and eFiling by Aatrix or 5-4-2 State Tax Forms and
eFiling by Aatrix. Select a state (state forms only), a report, set criteria, and then click Run Report or View
History.
When you click Run Report, you can review the report and enter any missing information. Then you go to the
next step to save and print the form. If you have an account with Aatrix, then you can file electronically by
forwarding the completed reports to the Aatrix eFile® center for electronic filing.
When you click View History, you can review and work with reports through the Open Report window.
How can I get acquainted with Aatrix integration before I use it for my company?
You can open the Sample Company and then open either 5-4-1 Federal Tax Forms and eFiling by Aatrix or
5-4-2 State Tax Forms and eFiling by Aatrix. Select a state (state forms only), a report, set criteria, and
then click Run Report or View History. This will also give you a chance to open the Aatrix Help, which
provides details information about how the Aatrix processes works.
What technical support options do I have if I run into a problem with Aatrix?
If you have a problem with Aatrix or Sage 100 Contractor, call 800-849-8049 (Sage Customer Support for
Sage 100 Contractor).
About 5-4-1 Federal Tax Forms and eFiling by Aatrix®
The 5-4-1 Federal Tax Forms and eFiling by Aatrix window is an integration portal into Aatrix. When you move
beyond this window, for example, by clicking View History or Run Report, you are working in the Aatrix
software that is integrated into Sage 100 Contractor.
How does my business information in Sage 100 Contractor get into Aatrix forms?
When you select a report, such as 2013 940 Report and the Year 2013, and then click Run Report, Sage 100
Contractor searches its database for information relevant to that form and inserts it into the Aatrix form.
122 Sage 100 Contractor
Federal and state Filing
How do I know the forms are up to date?
Aatrix makes a strong point of keeping all its forms up to date. If Aatrix determines that you do not have the
latest forms, you see a message window that provides four choices:
Automatic Update: Update forms automatically over the Internet.
Download Update: Update forms by manually downloading an update from any computer with an
Internet connection.
Continue Expired: Continue processing without the required update. Forms will be marked as expired
and cannot be filed.
Cancel: Cancel without processing forms.
About 5-4-2 State Tax forms and eFiling by Aatrix®
The 5-4-2 State Tax Forms and eFiling by Aatrix window is an integration portal into Aatrix software. When
you move beyond this window, for example, by clicking View History or Run Report, you actually begin
working in Aatrix software that has been integrated into Sage 100 Contractor.
On the menu bar, you have access to the following Options:
Update Forms- Displays a message window that prompts you to update Aatrix forms if updates are
available.
View History—Displays the Open Report window which provides information about saved reports.
Payroll Calculation Assignments—Displays the Payroll Calculation Assignments window. There are
situations where your payroll calculation may need more information. You use the Payroll Calculation
Assignments grid to assign the payroll to the tax.
Register Aatrix Software—Displays the Aatrix Software Registration window. Registering allows you
to fill out and print current reports for the duration of your service and maintenance contract. A line at the
bottom of the window displays your registration status.
NOTE: When you are working in Aatrix software, you have access to Aatrix Help. Sage 100 Contractor
Help does not duplicate Aatrix Help.
About state quarterly reports
The 5-4-3 Magnetic Media—Quarterlies window creates reports through the existing Sage 100 Contractor
functionality.
IMPORTANT: Sage 100 Contractor creates an electronic file that you can submit electronically. The
state of California accepts physical media and electronic files; however, mailing the electronic file on
physical media (round tapes, cartridge, diskette, CD) is no longer an acceptable filing method for “federal
tax forms.” For details, visit
http://www.edd.ca.gov/Payroll_Taxes/Electronic_Filing_Registration_and_Payment_Information.htm
To help complete your quarterly report, print the state quarterly report.
Product Overview 123
Chapter 6: Payroll
You can also print:
The State of California Quarterly Employee Tax Report (DE6). With the preprinted DE6 forms in your
printer, you can print the DE6 information directly on the form. You can also create an electronic file.
The Alaska Quarterly Contribution Report. For the Alaska Quarterly Contribution Report, Sage
100 Contractor prints the form as well as the information on blank paper.
124 Sage 100 Contractor
Chapter 7: Project Management
Working with Project Management
Sage 100 Contractor’s project management tools provide a way for you to manage proposals, budgets,
purchase orders, subcontracts, change orders, and job costing.
Budgets
Your budgets are always under your control when you verify and compare job costs as you enter them. You
can enter budget information manually or export data from Sage 100 Contractor estimates. Budget information
can be used in Work in Progress, Bonding, and Job Status Reports as well as in other reports that
compare costs by cost code, cost type, and summary totals. Also, as your project proceeds, Sage 100
Contractor maintains the initial budget and contract amounts at the same time that it updates the current
(working) budget and contract amounts with change order information. In addition, you can create budgets
from your estimate, import budget information from other programs, or manually export budget information to
Work in Progress, Bonding, Job Status, and other reports.
Purchase Orders
Your can simplify your purchasing to enhance productivity. Sage 100 Contractor can generate all purchase
orders from your estimates, and then automatically phase your purchasing by scheduled tasks. Alternatively
you can use master purchase orders and generate purchase orders for only the parts you need at a particular
time. You can also create manual purchase orders with the Part Lookup feature.
After you issue a purchase order, the costs are included in committed cost reports. To pay your bills, simply
enter the purchase order number from supplier invoices and Sage 100 Contractor fills in the payables due, plus
the remaining balances and job cost information automatically. You can set vendor-specific warnings so that
you will not pay invoices that are missing a purchase order number or invoices that exceed the purchase order
amount. By running purchase order audit reports, you can catch overcharges.
Subcontracts
You can manage all subcontractor interactions from contract creation to the last item on your final punch list.
Sage 100 Contractor helps you avoid subcontractor overpayment by monitoring for retention, approved and
open change orders, expired Workers’ Compensation, liability insurance, safety certification, and more
throughout the job. Over-billing control, retention tracking, withholds for insurance, charge backs, lien
tracking, and lien waivers are all fully integrated with Sage 100 Contractor’s accounts payable functionality.
You can make your own custom subcontract forms (up to 100 pages) using the Subcontract option in
Form/Report Page Design, so you do not need to use pre-printed forms. You can even include a billing form
to standardize your subcontract billings.
To check a subcontract’s status, you simply click Recap, and then click once more to display a list of
changes or invoices against the contract. You can also call up a summary view of the entire subcontract to
verify billing accuracy whenever you enter an invoice for payment.
Product Overview 125
Chapter 7: Project Management
Change Orders
With Sage 100 Contractor’s change order management tools, you use a single window to modify your prime
contract, any number of subcontracts, and your budget. After approval, change orders automatically
increment your budget, contract, and subcontracts. You can handle each part of the change independently
and continue subcontract negotiations even after the prime contract change has been approved. Your
approved and pending change orders are reflected in job cost reports.
You can use internal change orders to manage chargebacks, move work from one subcontractor to another,
and manage inter-cost changes. You can view prime and subcontract audits with audit reports.
Using change orders, you can manage all upgrades and options that belong to the sale price of the project.
You can archive change orders as they are printed for a complete, permanent history of interactions with your
clients and subcontractors.
Job Costing
With Sage 100 Contractor’s job costing functionality, you can see where your business is earning profits and
where you need to improve estimates or other processes to be more profitable. Generate a wide variety of
reports comparing costs to budget so that you can obtain precise, up-to-date cost views for every project with
as much detail as you choose to include. Sage 100 Contractor job costing helps you estimate job profits with
cost-to-complete and committed-cost reports that compare budgets, job costs, and actual labor for every line
item. You can even create your own job cost reports with the built-in Report Writer.
Job cost information, including labor burden costs, stays current and accurate because it integrates with all
posting features including General Ledger, Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Payroll,
Equipment, and the Inventory add-on module. Because explicit cost details are preserved indefinitely, you
can research job costs at any time.
Project Work Center
About Project Work Center
The first time you open the Project Work Center, the job box displays the last job entered in the current
company. However, you can also view any other available jobs in that company. After that, the last accessed
job is the default when you open Project Work Center. If you have not created any jobs in your company, you
are prompted to create one from the 3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable) window when you open Project Work
Center.
Project Work Center displays the following information for a selected job:
A customizable menu tree displaying accessible menu commands.
The Project Hot List.
Contact and current financial information about the selected job.
IMPORTANT: All selections and defaults are user-specific and company-specific.
126 Sage 100 Contractor
Project Work Center
Customizable Menu Tree
The left side of the window displays a menu tree for accessible Sage 100 Contractor menu commands for the
selected job. Selecting a menu command displays the form or record pre-loaded with the job’s information for
you to view or update.
In some cases, a list of associated items of that type for the selected job appears and you can then select the
appropriate item. The following selections display a list:
3-2 Receivable Invoices/Credits
3-7 Progress Billing
4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits
6-4-1 Change Orders
6-6-1 Purchase Orders
6-7-1 Subcontracts
The menu tree defaults with all possible menu commands available. This is customizable through the
Customize Project Work Center Menu window.
Project Hot List
The upper right side of the window displays the Project Hot List. The Project Work Center lets you view
and manage information from the standard tables in the Project Hot List. With Document Control, you also
have access to the enhanced functionality available from the 6-11-9 Project Hot List window.
Project Work Center Job Contact and Financial Data
The bottom of the window displays important information at a glance for each selected job. This information is
“display only” and cannot be edited. However, as information is changed in Sage 100 Contractor for a specific
job, this information is updated.
Project Work Center Desktop Shortcut
Job information is available directly from the Sage 100 Contractor Desktop by creating a desktop shortcut
icon in the 6-12 Project Work Center window. This feature enables you to view important data and manage
all your jobs from one location. Project Work Center is highly customizable for each user’s needs.
IMPORTANT: You must create the desktop shortcut once. The Project Work Center shortcut will
then be accessible from the desktop or in the 6-12 Project Work Center window.
Project Work Center job contact and financial information
The bottom of the Project Work Center window displays contact and financial information for the selected
job. This information is “display only.” However, as you make changes in Sage 100 Contractor that affect the
selected job, this information is refreshed.
Product Overview 127
Chapter 7: Project Management
The following client information appears:
Client name
Contact name
Email address
Phone number
Fax number
Cell number
The following financial information about the job appears:
Contract Amount
Approved Changes
Total Contract
Costs to Date
Original Budget
Budget for Changes
Total Budget
Costs as % Budget
Project Hot List
About Project Hot List
NOTE: This functionality is available only if you have the Document Control Module.
The Project Hot List is a record of items that require immediate attention. You can display a hot list by job or
by supervisor. You can then drill down to review a specific record.
You can access the Project Hot List from the 6-11-9 Project Hot List or the 6-12 Project Work Center
windows.
IMPORTANT: Selection by supervisor is not available when accessing the Project Hot List from 6-12
Project Work Center.
You can include the following standard information on the Project Hot List:
Invoices
Change orders
Purchase orders
Subcontracts
Proposals
128 Sage 100 Contractor
Budgets
Progress bills
Loan draws
Unitary bills
Recurring payables
Recurring receivables
Optional information you can include on the Project Hot List:
You can display more items in your Project Hot List, from both the 6-11-9 Project Hot List and 6-12 Project
Work Center windows, such as:
Requests for information
Requests for proposals
Transmittals
Submittals
Plan records
Daily field reports
Punch lists
Correspondence
Budgets
About budgets
A budget represents a summary of the hard costs detailed in a takeoff, and provides the basis for all budgeted
versus actual cost, hour, or unit comparisons. In addition, you can use the budget as the basis for the proposal
you provide to the client.
The costs for a budget are categorized by cost code, and each cost code is further divided into cost types.
Furthermore, you can include the hours necessary to complete the work for each cost code. For work
performed on a unit basis (include the quantity of units to be performed for each cost code), Sage 100
Contractor automatically computes the cost per unit.
There are several ways to create a budget: you can export the data from a takeoff, import a file, or create a
budget manually. After the budget is completed, you can set the original budget. If at any point the budget is
changed, you can compare it to the original.
If it becomes necessary to adjust the costs in a budget, you enter the changes by issuing change orders.
Change orders allow you to alter the budgeted costs independent from the budget itself.
Sage 100 Contractor also provides a way for you to be warned when you are over budget. The program
determines the costs to date for the jobs by cost code and cost type. It then compares the data to the original
budget plus change orders. When you save the record, Sage 100 Contractor notifies you if costs exceed the
Product Overview 129
Chapter 7: Project Management
budgeted amount for a job. You can enable the Over Budget Warning option using the 1-3 Journal
Transactions or 4-2 payable Invoices/Credits windows.
Job Costs
About job costs
Job costs provide detailed information about costs, giving you the means to track the costs of a project using
cost codes and cost types. This functionality provides you with another way to analyze costs and refine the
estimating or budgeting process.
When you post a transaction to the Direct Expense or WIP range of accounts, Sage 100 Contractor prompts
you to create a job cost record in the Job Cost Distribution window. Job cost records are maintained in a
separate database from the accounting data, and therefore do not impact the general ledger.
IMPORTANT:
If you have turned on WIP Verification for job costs, and are posting job costs to a job that is marked for
WIP Posting, you will not be allowed to post to a direct expense account. A message will display: WIP
Posting is not = to job costs. You must correct your posting before you will be allowed to save.
If you have turned on WIP Verification for job costs, and are posting job costs to a WIP (Asset) ledger
account for a job that is not marked for WIP Posting, a message will display: WIP Posting is not = to
job costs. You must correct your posting before you will be allowed to save.
If a text box is shaded, you cannot directly edit the data; you can only change it through an accounting
entry.
About job cost reconciliation
Because discrepancies can appear over time, it is important to reconcile the job cost records with the ledger
transactions. During the reconciliation, Sage 100 Contractor compares the ledger transactions with the job
cost records and reports any discrepancies that exist.
The reconciliation determines if ledger transactions are missing job cost records, or if variances exist between
the cost amount of the ledger transaction and the job cost records. After the audit is complete, print the Job
Cost Reconciliation report, which lists ledger transactions that are missing cost records or have variances in
excess of $1.
To determine the cause of each error, review the ledger transaction in the 1-3 Journal Transactions window
or in the window of original entry. If a transaction does not have a corresponding job cost record, look for
situations where cost records have been deleted. For example, when you delete a job Sage 100 Contractor
deletes all associated records, including the job cost records.
It is also important to search the job cost records thoroughly. Because historical records do not tie to ledger
transactions, it is possible to already have a cost record for a ledger transaction. Make sure that a historical
record does not already exist before creating a cost record. If you cannot locate a cost record, you can enter a
historical cost record.
130 Sage 100 Contractor
Change Orders
Resolving audit variances does not eliminate them from the Job Cost Reconcile report, and they will appear
on subsequent reports for the fiscal year. It is a good idea to retain a printed copy of the report and any notes
you have made to help identify and resolve errors. You can then use the report with future job cost
reconciliation reports to identify the job cost errors you have already resolved.
NOTE: Sage 100 Contractor does not report duplicate or extra job cost records because they are not
associated with a specific ledger transaction. Additionally, Sage 100 Contractor cannot audit historical
job cost records as they were not created by posting ledger transactions.
Job Cost Distribution
About job cost distribution
When you post payable transactions to the Expense range of accounts, Sage 100 Contractor displays the
Job Cost Distribution window.
In the Job Cost Distribution window, you can break apart costs to create individual line entries that
reference jobs, phases, cost codes, and cost types. You can also select jobs or phases using a Picklist and
distribute the cost equally among the selections.
When job costing a transaction from the 1-1 Checks/Bank Charges window or the 4-2 Payable
Invoices/Credits window, Sage 100 Contractor uses the vendor record to determine which cost code and
cost type to use. If the vendor record does not contain a cost code or cost type, you must supply the
information.
The Ledger Total box displays the total debits less credits posted to Direct Expense or WIP accounts. As
you enter the costs, Sage 100 Contractor shows the total amount costed in the Job Cost Total box. To save
the job cost record, the amount in the Job Cost Total box must equal the amount in the Ledger Total box.
Change Orders
About change orders
You use the 6-4-1 Change Orders window to manage changes to a prime contract or subcontract. Change
orders let you track changes independent of a project’s budget, providing a clear audit trail for pending,
approved, and refused changes.
Change orders are closely integrated with subcontracts. When you use the 6-4-1 Change Orders window to
create a change order for a subcontract, information is displayed on the 6-7-1 Subcontracts window in the
Changes, New Contract, and Remaining columns. This tight integration provides more control over your
contracts and your invoicing by providing accessible information.
Depending on the type of change work you need to perform, you can enter change orders that alter the job’s
budget, proposal, or subcontracts, or any combination of the three.
The 6-4-1 Change Orders window has two tabs:
Product Overview 131
Chapter 7: Project Management
You use the Prime Change Details tab to enter changes to costs that affect the bid amount.
You use the Budget and Sub Change Details tab to enter cost changes that affect your budgeted
costs, such as subcontract changes or work for which you do not want to charge the client.
Prime Change Details tab
The Prime Change Details tab allows you to track changes to a project and segregate changes to the
contract (proposal) from changes to your budget (costs).
Prime changes are change orders that alter the job proposal. They let you track changes independent of a
project proposal, providing a clear audit trail for pending, approved, and refused changes.
From approved prime changes, you can create receivable invoices and purchase orders. When you select the
Create A/R Invoice or Create Purchase Order command on the Options menu, Sage 100 Contractor opens
the appropriate window and inserts the relevant information. To complete the invoice or purchase order, you
enter the parts and any additional information.
Budget and Sub Change Details tab
Change orders have two components:
Prime Change Orders
Budget and Sub Change Orders.
Change orders allow you to track changes to a project and segregate changes to the contract (proposal) from
changes to your budget (costs). Depending on the type of change work you need to perform, you can enter
change orders that alter the job budget, proposal, or subcontracts, or any combination of the three. Overall,
change orders provide a convenient way to manage changes to a contract or subcontract.
Subcontracts work in conjunction with change orders and accounts payable, providing you with better control
over change work and billing. You can review billings, approved and open change orders, or a summary of the
subcontract information. You can also set up retention for a subcontract. When you create an invoice for the
subcontract, the program uses the rate indicated in the subcontract record.
Because the Sub Change Orders window provides for managing changes to a budget or subcontract, you
may enter cost changes that affect your budgeted costs (such as subcontract changes) or cost changes that
affect work for which you do not want to charge the client.
When changes are approved, Sage 100 Contractor reflects the changes to costs in the contract and job cost
reports, but the original budget remains unchanged.From approved change orders, you can create receivable
invoices and purchase orders. When you select the Create Invoice or Create Purchase Order command on
the Options menu, Sage 100 Contractor opens the appropriate window and inserts the relevant information.
To complete the invoice or purchase order, you enter the parts and any additional information.
You can also record which plans and documents you send as attachments with the change order, as well as
to whom you route the change orders.
132 Sage 100 Contractor
Change Orders
Attachments and Routing
The 6-4-1 Change Orders window also supports Attachments and Routing. You can drag and drop files
onto the window to create an attachment that can be emailed to customers or printed. The Routing command
allows you to keep track of where and to whom you have sent attachments.
TIP: The Attachments command is located under Edit > Attachments.
Upgrade check box
Another important feature of the 6-4-1 Change Orders window is the Upgrade check box. The Upgrade
check box controls what information is included on 6-1-13-41 Homebuilders reports. For example:
To include an Upgrade Priceon the Homebuilders reports and add it to the Sales Price Totals on the
reports, you must select Upgrade, and that specific change order must have an approved Prime
Change Order amount.
To include an Upgrade Budget on the Homebuilders reports and add it to the Total Budget, you must
select Upgrade, and that specific change order must have an approved Budget amount.
How change orders affect budgets and proposals and subcontracts
You can make changes to the budgeted costs, bid amounts, and subcontracts using the 6-4-1 Change
Orders window. When you print contract-related reports, Sage 100 Contractor computes the new contract
amounts based on the amount in the Contract box in the 3-5 Jobs window and approved changes. In cost
analysis reports, Sage 100 Contractor computes the new costs based on the costs from the budget and
approved change orders.
Sage 100 Contractor does not alter the original budget created in the 6-2 Budgets window nor does it alter the
original proposal created in the 6-9 Proposals window. It does, however, update subcontract totals while
retaining the original subcontract amount when change orders are created using the Budget and Sub
Change Details tab. These totals can be viewed in 6-7-1 Subcontracts. You can also use the subcontracts
window to invoice the entire subcontract or specific change order lines of the subcontract.
After work begins on a contract, enter any changes to the budget or proposal as a change order. As you create
the change order, determine whether the costs affect bid amounts, budgeted costs, or both.
For example, suppose you forgot to estimate the cost of some work required in a project. To include the costs
in the budget and charge the client, enter the changes to the bid amount on the Prime Change Details tab in
6-4-1 Change Orders. Then on the Budget and Sub Change Details tab, enter the changes to costs.
Otherwise, if you merely want to add the costs to the budget without charging the client, enter only the
changes to the costs in the Budget and Sub Change Details tab.
Alternatively, you can set the original budget and manually enter the changes to costs in the affected cost
codes. Likewise, you can set the original proposal and enter the changes in the affected cost codes. In
addition, you can use a separate cost code for each change order.
Product Overview 133
Chapter 7: Project Management
About entering change orders
The 6-4-1 Change Orders window contains a header area and two tabs, and at the bottom, boxes that report
various values that you may be following.
The header area contains boxes for entering information such as: Job, Phase, Description, Date, Status,
and so forth.
IMPORTANT: The Status box selection sets the status for both tabs, however; you can override the
Status box selection by entering a status in the Approved column on the Budget and Sub Change
Details tab except for those with a status of Void and Rejected.
Tabs
The window has two tabs, Prime Change Details, and Budget and Sub Change Details. To make
changes to a job’s contract amount, you enter the change on the Prime Change Details tab. To change a
budget or subcontract, you enter the changes in the Budget and Sub Change Details tab.
The changes to the contract amount (3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable), and the budget amount (6-2
Budgets) do not appear in the window of origin. They only appear in reports or in sub-menus of the windows of
origin. This functionality maintains the separation of the original amounts and the changes.
For example, to see the changes in a contract, you may view the Prime Contract Audit report. To see the
changes in the budget, you may view various project management reports, such as the Job Cost Summary
report. To see the changes in a subcontract, you may view the subcontract Audit report.
On the 3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable) window, on the menu bar, you may also view changes in the
contract amount by clicking Options > Contract Summary.
On the other hand, changes to the subcontract do appear in the 6-7-1 Subcontracts window. After creating a
change order against a subcontract, the program updates the changes as well as the original totals. On the 67-1 Subcontracts window, on the menu bar, you may also view changes in the budget amount by clicking
Options > Summary.
Change order work may require an adjustment to the job contract and the budget. For example, a general
contractor has begun work on a kitchen remodel project and the client wants to change the sink called for in
the plans. The plumbing subcontractor tells the general contractor to add $75 for the sink upgrade.
In creating the change order, the contractor enters the $75 change to the subcontract in the Budget and Sub
Change Details tab. Because the client requested the change, the contractor charges $25 for the upgrade in
addition to the $75 in added costs. On the Prime Change Details tab, the contractor enters a request for an
additional $100. After saving the sub change, the change information appears with the subcontract record in 67-1 Subcontracts.
Sometimes you might only want to change the contract amount. Suppose, from the above example, the sink
the client wants costs the same amount as the sink from the plans. Because the client requested the change,
the contractor charges $25 for the change work. On the Prime Change Details tab, the contractor enters a
request for an additional $25.
134 Sage 100 Contractor
Change Orders
Under certain conditions, you might have to adjust only the budget. Suppose the specification for the faucet
requires a specific model that costs $100. However, due to some miscommunication, the subcontractor
installed a model costing $150 and refuses to take the loss. In the Budget and Sub Change Details tab, the
contractor enters a budget change for $50.
TIP: To include a detailed description of the change order work, type a note for the change order “record”
rather than typing a note in a grid row or including an attached document. To open the Notes window,
click the Notes icon on the toolbar.
About automatic numbering for change orders
When you create a new change order for a job, Sage 100 Contractor provides the next change order number in
the sequence. You do not have to accept the suggested change order number, and can enter your own number
instead.
Use the following guidelines:
When a change order number uses only a number, Sage 100 Contractor increments the change order
number by one. For example, you create change order 1 for job 220. The subsequent change order
numbers would be 2, 3, 4, and so on.
If a change order number uses a dash ( – ), Sage 100 Contractor increments the number to the right of the
dash by one. The dash lets you include the job or subcontract number in the change order number
sequence this helps identify to which job or subcontract the change order belongs.
Suppose you are creating the first change order for job 220. By including the job number, the first change
order number would be 220-1. The subsequent change orders for the job would be 220-2, 220-3, and so
on.
You can also use the same numbering convention for subcontract change orders. Suppose you are
creating a change order for subcontract 850 on job 220. When entering the first change to the subcontract
on the Budget and Sub Change Details tab, you enter 850-1 in the Change# box. Later, when you
enter another change order for that subcontract, the next change order number would be 850-2.
When a change order number combines letters and numbers, Sage 100 Contractor cannot increment the
change order number. For example, if you created change order AAA5 for job 220, Sage 100 Contractor
cannot suggest the next change order number.
NOTE: The change order numbers in each phase of a job are independent from the change order
numbers in the other phases of the job. Suppose job 220 has two phases, and you create change order
220-1 in phase 1. In phase 2, you can also create change order 220-1. This lets you track the number of
change orders in each phase.
About adding change orders to subcontracts
It is likely that you will have to add one or more change orders to subcontracts during the course of a project.
NOTE: 6-7-1 Subcontracts control subcontract records and their interaction and integration with 6-4-1
Change Orders and 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits. Changes made to records in 6-4-1 Change Orders
and in 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits are displayed in 6-7-1 Subcontracts.
Product Overview 135
Chapter 7: Project Management
The process of entering a change order for a contract is straight forward. You begin by referencing the job in
the header section of the widow. Then after entering the required information, such as Description, Change#,
Date, and Status in the header, you enter information in the tabs, Prime Change Details and Budget and
Sub Change Details.
On the Prime Change Details tab, you only need to enter required information for Description, Cost Code,
and Cost Type. Then you click the Budget and Sub Change Details tab to enter the changes.
There is a new column, Subcontract Line, in the Budget and Sub Change Details grid. Five of the
columns of the grid now act as a unit. These columns are:
Vendor—Enter a vendor, or accept the default vendor.
Subcontract—Enter a subcontract number, or accept the default subcontract number.
Subcontract Line- Select the line to affect in the subcontract, leave the cell blank to create a new line in
the subcontract.
Change#—Enter a Change#, or accept the default Change#.
Status—Enter a Status.
IMPORTANT:
These five columns act as a unit. In addition to required fields, a value must be entered under each of
these columns except Subcontract Line to be able to save the change order record.
If the Subcontract Line cell is blank, you have to enter a Cost Code and Cost Type.
If you enter data in the Subcontract Line cell, Cost Code and Cost Type autofill.
Change a line or create a new line in a 6-7-1 Subcontract record
When entering a subcontract change, you can add or subtract the existing value of a subcontract record line or
you can add a new line to the subcontract record. When working in the grid with your cursor in the a cell under
the Subcontract Line column, you can press F5 to open the Subcontract Lines lookup window. Then select
the line you want to affect by double-clicking it. Alternatively, leaving the Subcontract Line cell blank when
creating a new line in the grid, creates a new line in the subcontract record.
After saving the record, you can see the changes to the subcontract record by opening the subcontract in 6-71 Subcontracts. In the grid, notice that the Changes column will have an entry in the line you selected when
creating the change. The change is also displayed in the details summary boxes at the bottom of the window.
Cost Codes and Divisions
About cost codes and divisions
Cost codes are an important part of the job costing system. They allow you to separate costs into different
categories and compare budgeted costs to actual cost for a job. Each cost code is assigned to a division,
which provides a way to group cost codes for subtotaling on reports. Sage 100 Contractor organizes job costs
in order of detail by job and phases, cost codes, and cost types.
NOTE: Cost codes are company-specific, not job-specific.
136 Sage 100 Contractor
Cost Codes and Divisions
A common mistake when creating a cost code list for general contractors is building a long list that contains
too much detail. It is unnecessary to include trades that the contractor does not perform or subcontract.
Unless a general contractor performs the work, one cost code is usually sufficient. For example, a general
contractor rarely needs separate cost codes for rough electrical, electrical trim, electrical fixtures, and alarm.
Including such trades only creates an unwieldy cost code list, which leads to errors in data entry.
The cost code list for most single-trade subcontractors can be very short; a dozen codes are usually
sufficient. Some contractors, though, may need more cost codes. Mechanical subcontractors, for example,
may need approximately twenty codes to break down both plumbing and HVAC work.
Divisions are used to group cost codes. Because Sage 100 Contractor uses divisions to subtotal costs for
cost-based reports, many contractors create divisions based on the Construction Specifications Institute
(CSI) divisions. However, you do not have to rely on the CSI structure for divisions and can create your own.
NOTE: Although there is no report that prints cost codes by division, you can print the cost codes from
the 6-5 Cost Codes window. The report lists the costs codes and divisions assigned to them.
About Workers' Compensation codes
Assigning Workers’ Compensation codes to cost codes provides the correct compensation code based on the
type of work performed during timecard entry. You may need to create additional cost codes for the
combination of cost codes and Workers’ Compensation codes to work correctly.
In a split rate system for Workers’ Compensation, a category of work uses two different rates. Some states,
such as California, use a two-tiered system of rates based on employee pay. The wages an employee earns
determines the rate at which the insurance company computes Workers’ Compensation.
For split rates, Sage 100 Contractor uses a wage maximum to determine which code to use. For wages that
are less than or equal to the wage maximum, Sage 100 Contractor assigns the first compensation code to the
timecard. When employee wages exceed the wage maximum, Sage 100 Contractor assigns the second
compensation code.
Setting Up A Cost Code Numbering System
About cost code numbering systems
When creating cost codes, use a simple numbering system to avoid the introduction of errors and to divide the
cost codes into major categories. When starting with a 4-digit number system, for example, make each
thousand a division, such as 1000-General Requirements, 2000-Site Work, 3000-Concrete, and 4000Masonry.
CAUTION: Carefully plan your cost code structure before implementing it. After you have entered
transactions into the system with a set of cost codes, it is a complex process to change them.
The Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) has designed a set of cost codes intended for cost and
specification purposes. General contractors often adopt the system for estimating and cost accounting, and
subcontractors often use an extended numbering system defined by the CSI code list.
NOTE: Cost codes are company-specific, not job-specific.
Product Overview 137
Chapter 7: Project Management
About cost code numbering for general contractors
A common mistake when creating cost codes is building a long list that contains too much detail. It is not
necessary to include trades that the contractor does not perform or subcontract. Unless a general contractor
performs the work, one cost code is usually sufficient. For example, a general contractor rarely needs
separate cost codes for Rough Electrical, Electrical Trim, Electrical Fixtures, and Alarm. Including such
trades only creates an unwieldy cost code list. While you can use a single cost code in place of many cost
codes, how do you track costs? With each payable invoice, the contractor creates job costs that detail the
type of work performed. Continuing with the example above, an electrical subcontractor on most jobs submits
three to six invoices to the general contractor. By printing a Job Cost Journal for the specific job, the journal
details each electrical cost entry made to the job as well as the total electrical costs.
There are circumstances in which having several cost codes are useful. If you have allowances in a contract,
you will want to track those costs separately. For example, you might use Electrical and Electrical Fixtures as
separate cost codes, allowing you to separate the electrical costs. Over the course of the project, you can
provide the owner with a report detailing the total amount spent on allowance items. You can always enter a
change order to adjust the prime contract based on the over/under amount of the allowance.
When building the list of cost codes, it is best to begin with a small list with room for expansion. Over time you
can add more cost codes in the appropriate sections.
For ease of use, many general contractors use the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) divisions. Be
aware that the CSI numbering system classifies materials and workmanship in a construction project and not
cost breakdowns. In most cases, the first two levels of the CSI system work for cost codes. If you decide to
use the CSI divisions, use the main 16 divisions. To provide room for growth in the cost code list, add two or
three zeros after each division number.
While creating the cost codes, keep in mind that you will assign a cost type to each job cost. It is
unnecessary, therefore, to create cost codes that break apart costs into materials, labor , equipment,
subcontracts, and so forth.
About cost code numbering for subcontractors
The cost code list for most single-trade subcontractors can be very short; a dozen codes are usually
sufficient. Some contractors, though, may need more cost codes. Mechanical subcontractors, for example,
may need twenty codes or more to breakdown both plumbing and HVAC work.
Some subcontractors use numbers that reflect the related CSI divisions. For example, a drywall
subcontractor may use 9250 for Stocking, 9255 for Hanging, 9260 for Taping, 9265 for Spraying, 9270 for
Knockdown, and 9275 for Cleanup. General contractors or owners rarely require such detail in a cost code list.
Purchase Orders
About purchase orders
A purchase order lists the materials needed from a specific vendor for a specific job. You can create purchase
orders manually for each vendor, or export data from the takeoff to create purchase orders automatically for
each vendor. In addition, you can create purchase orders for the subcontractors on a given project.
138 Sage 100 Contractor
Subcontracts
With large projects, you can create master purchase orders. A master contains all the parts needed from a
vendor, but allows you to create smaller purchase orders to help schedule the flow of materials to the job site.
For example, you can stagger the purchase and delivery of framing materials to better coincide with the
different phases of construction.
After creating purchase orders, you can generate job cost reports to determine committed costs. As you
receive shipments of materials, employees can enter the quantities of materials received using the 12-4
Purchase Order Receipts window, which creates a payable invoice with status 2-Review. When you
receive the payable invoice from the vendor, you can review the invoice record and make any necessary
adjustments.
Use the Remove Closed Purchase Orders option to remove purchase orders with a Closed status and no
job number.
About master purchase orders
To control the ordering and arrival of materials at a job site, use a master purchase order. Think of the master
purchase order as a contract with the vendor, which lists all the materials you intend to purchase over the
course of the project. You might even supply each of your vendors with copies of the master orders.
From the master, you create smaller purchase orders for the materials necessary to complete the next series
of tasks. The master tracks the total quantity of items ordered and cancelled for a particular vendor and job.
After creating the master purchase order, you can create all the smaller purchase orders to ensure you have
accounted for all materials on the master purchase order. You then only need to assign the appropriate
delivery dates and print the purchase orders as you need them.
Subcontracts
About subcontracts
Many general contractors enter into subcontracts with other contractors to perform specific types of work. In
the 6-7-1 Subcontracts window, you can create subcontracts, review change work and invoices that affect
subcontracts, and gain tighter control of subcontract billings. You can export items from a takeoff to create
subcontracts automatically, or you can enter the subcontracts manually.
When using phases to manage larger projects, look at the amount of work a subcontractor is providing and
determine whether you want to create a single subcontract for the entire job or a subcontract for each phase
within the job. If the amount of work is relatively small or does not vary from phase to phase, it might be easier
to create a single subcontract. For large amounts of work, or if the complexity of work varies between phases,
consider creating a subcontract for each phase.
From a takeoff, you can export items assigned status 4-Subcontract by job, or by job and phase.
When you export the subcontracts by job, Sage 100 Contractor creates a subcontract that lists each
phase in which the subcontractor performs work.
When you export the subcontracts by job and phase, Sage 100 Contractor creates a separate
subcontract for each phase in which the subcontractor performs work.
Product Overview 139
Chapter 7: Project Management
Subcontracts work in conjunction with change orders and accounts payable invoices, providing you with
better control over change work and billing. You can review billings, approved and open change orders, or a
summary of the subcontract information, including a line-by-line summary of the invoiced amounts. You can
also set up retention for a subcontract. When you create an invoice for the subcontract, Sage 100 Contractor
uses the rate indicated in the subcontract record.
Job-Complete Tracking
About cost to complete
CAUTION: The Cost to Complete report relies on accurate and up-to-date job costs. Be sure to post
all job costs and enter any recent change orders before updating the report.
In the 6-8-1 Cost to Complete window, you can generate a report estimating the costs necessary to
complete a project currently under construction. When you select the job and phase and update the data,
Sage 100 Contractor retrieves the current budget, job costs, and the gross wages for uncomputed payroll
records. Over the course of the project, you can update the current budget and job costs in the Cost to
Complete window to create a new report.
Enter the estimated percent of work completed or costs to complete the project, and calculate the report. If
you provide the percent of work completed, Sage 100 Contractor computes an estimate of the remaining
costs to complete the project and the amount by which you are over or under budget. If you provide the
estimated costs to complete the project, Sage 100 Contractor computes the percent of work completed and
the amount over or under budget.
While the computed payroll records include the labor burden, the gross wages for uncomputed payroll records
do not. To increase the accuracy of the report, you can provide a labor burden rate, which Sage 100 Contractor
uses to calculate and add in the estimated labor burden for uncomputed payroll records.
About hours to complete
In the Hours to Complete window, you can generate a report estimating the number of hours necessary to
complete a project currently under construction. When you select the job and phase and update the data,
Sage 100 Contractor retrieves the current budget, job costs, and the gross wages for uncomputed payroll
records. Over the course of the project, you can update the current budget and job costs in the Hours to
Complete window to create a new report.
CAUTION: The Hours to Complete report relies on accurate and up-to-date job costs. Be sure to post
all job costs and enter any recent change orders before updating the report.
Enter the percent of hours completed or estimated hours to complete the project, and calculate the report. If
you provide the percent of hours completed, Sage 100 Contractor computes an estimate of the remaining
hours to complete the project and the amount by which you are over or under budget. If you provide the
estimated hours to complete the project, Sage 100 Contractor computes an estimate of the percent of hours
completed and the amount by which you are over or under budget.
140 Sage 100 Contractor
Proposals
About units to complete
In the 6-8-3 Units to Complete window, you can generate a report to review the number of units to complete
on a project currently under construction. When you select the job and phase and update the data, Sage 100
Contractor retrieves the current budget. Over the course of the project, you can update the current budget in
the Units to Complete window to create a new report.
You can enter the estimated units completed and calculate the report. Sage 100 Contractor computes the
budgeted cost per unit, the actual cost per unit, and the units by which you are over or under budget.
Proposals
About proposals
The proposal is a document presented to a client, providing a breakdown of the contracted amount by cost
code or bid item. Sage 100 Contractor provides several ways to create a proposal: you can export the data
from a takeoff, import a budget, import a file, or create a proposal manually. After the proposal is completed,
you can set the original proposal. After negotiating the price with your client, you can edit the current proposal
and compare it with the original.
If it becomes necessary to adjust the selling price in a proposal, enter the changes by issuing change orders.
Change orders allow you to alter the selling price independent from the proposal itself.
About creating proposals
There are many ways to create proposals—from entering the cost codes or bid items manually, to selecting a
list of cost codes or bid items in a Picklist, to importing a budget or file. Furthermore, you can export a takeoff
to create a proposal by bid item or cost code.
While it is faster and easier to import a proposal, you can also build a proposal manually by entering the
individual cost codes and amounts for each cost type, including the overhead and profit.
Exporting and Importing Proposal Files
About exporting and importing files
Files save you time performing repetitious work by providing the structure for documents such as budgets or
proposals. You can create files that provide only a brief outline or contain nearly complete information or
anywhere in between.
Suppose that you are building homes in a residential subdivision. Because there is only one model of home,
the basic budget for each home does not change. Rather than re-entering the same budget information for
each home you intend to build, you can create a file from the first budget. Then for each new home, import the
budget file and enter any minor modifications to suit the needs of that particular project.
If the subdivision contains four different models of homes, you can create four budget files. When you begin
work on a new home, import its budget file for the particular model and modify it as needed.
Product Overview 141
Chapter 7: Project Management
Perhaps you do a great deal of home construction, and one budget cannot accurately reflect so many different
projects. You can create a budget file that only contains a list of cost codes. When you import the budget file,
you can enter the appropriate figures as dictated by the job.
When creating a file, either you can use an existing record as the basis for the file, or you can build the file
from scratch.
Unitary Proposals
About unitary proposals
The proposal is a document presented to a client, providing a breakdown of the contracted amount by bid item.
There are two ways to create a unitary proposal: you can import a file, or you can create a proposal manually.
After the proposal is completed, you can set it as the original. After negotiating the price with your client, you
can edit the current proposal while retaining the original.
If it becomes necessary to adjust the selling price in a proposal, you enter the changes by issuing change
orders. Change orders allow you to alter the selling price independent from the proposal itself.
Document Control
About document control
NOTE: This functionality is available only if you have the Document Control Module.
Sage 100 Contractor’s Document Control module provides complete control of all your project management
documents. These include Requests for Information (RFIs), Requests for Proposal (RFPs), transmittals,
submittals, daily field reports, and correspondence.
Document Control tools help you manage correspondence, keep track of project plans, maintain a project
hot list, and stay on top of punch list items. A customizable template makes daily field reports accurate and
accessible.
When using the functionality of Document Control, all your documents integrate with estimating, change
orders, purchase orders, subcontracts, and payroll. This makes the process of project management complete,
fast, accurate, and reliable.
About Request for Proposal
NOTE: This functionality is available only if you have the Document Control Module.
A Request for Proposal (RFP) is a document you send to vendors or subcontractors containing a list of parts
needed or work to be performed. The vendor or subcontractor uses the RFP to create a proposal for you. Look
for menu 6-11-1 Request for Proposal.
TIP: You can set up RFPs to be numbered sequentially with an association to a job and phase.
142 Sage 100 Contractor
Document Control
About file and link Attachments on records
What are attachments?
Attachments provide functionality to attach files and/or Web links to selected records in Sage 100 Contractor.
There are two methods for attaching files and links. You can add them individually using the Attachments
window (Edit > Attachments), or you can simply drag-and-drop files and/or Web links onto a Sage 100
Contractor window that accepts attachments.
A few examples of Sage 100 Contractor windows that accept attachments are payable invoices, requests for
proposal, progress bills, change orders, purchase orders, jobs.
How can I use attachments?
Here are a few examples:
After receiving a hard copy document that you would like to attach to a payable invoice record in 4-2
Payable Invoices/Credits, you scan the document into your computer to create a file, then attach the
file to the payable invoice record.
You have several digital photos of work being done on by a subcontractor on a remodel job. You can
transfer these files to your computer, and then attach them to a record in 6-7-1 Subcontracts.
After sending an RFP to an architect who has a Web site, you want to attach the architect's web site
URL link to the RFP record. From the open the site in your browser, you drag and drop the link from the
browser's Address box onto the 6-11-1 Requests for Proposal record.
How does attachment functionality work?
You create an attachment as either a “local” attachment or a “link” attachment. Link attachments can either be
a file or a URL (Web site link).
Creating a “local” attachment, associates the a local file (on your local computer) or a copy of a network file
(copied from a network computer) to an Sage 100 Contractor record in your local computer's company data. In
this process, the program creates a local folder and subfolder structure in your local company where the
record is located.
Creating a “link” attachment, attaches a link to the remote file (on a network computer) or URL link to Web
page on a remote computer. The program does not create a local folder and subfolder structure in your local
company for linked attachments.
IMPORTANT: For link attachments, do not rename an attachment's file server after attaching a file.
Sage 100 Contractor cannot locate a linked file if the file server is renamed or replaced by a server with
another name.
Can I drag and drop files to create attachments?
If a record accepts attachments, you can drag and drop files onto the window to create an attachment. This
includes graphic files, Web links, email messages, desktop shortcuts, or any other file type.
Product Overview 143
Chapter 7: Project Management
NOTE: If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can drag and drop email messages from your Inbox list
directly onto a Sage 100 Contractor record.
Where are attachments located?
First, let's look at what happens when you attach a local file to a record. When you add the attachment and
save the record, the program creates an Attachments folder and folder structure under \MB7\[company]
\Attachments. To prevent naming conflicts between files, each file in placed into a subfolder with a unique
name.
For example, let's suppose you are working in Sample Company job Jiminez Burrito #8, and you attach a
local graphic file to record 8 in 6-4-1 Change Order, Floor Tile Upgrade. After saving the record, in
Windows Explorer, you will find this path: \MB7\Sample Company\Attachments\Jobs\Change Orders\(unique
subfolder name)\(file name).gif.
TIP: Sample Company data can be changed on any computer. The Sample Company data in these
examples may not match the Sample Company data on your computer exactly.
What is the attachment parent-child structure?
You probably noted that the Change Order folder is a subfolder of Jobs. That's because the program creates
Attachments according to the existing parent-child relationships that already exist in the program for Jobs and
Change Orders.
For example, the parent record for the change order is the job, 215-Jiminez Burrito #8. If you were to open, 66-1 Purchase Orders to record 38, clear the Lock Edit, and add the same graphic file to this record and then
look at the folder structure, you will find MB7\Sample Company\Attachments\Jobs\Purchase Orders\(unique
subfolder name)\graphic.gif. The attachments to the purchase order record and the change order record are
both “children” of job 215—Jiminez Burrito #8, which is located in 3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable).
What do I see when opening parent record when children have attachments?
You can attach files to both “parent” records and “child” records. For example, you can attach files and links to
job 215-Jimenez Burrito #8 directly from that job's record in 3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable) or to that job
through other records such as Change Orders, Purchase Orders, Subcontracts, and so forth. As described
above, you can add attachments to records that are children of the job.
Because of the parent-child structure of the program, when you open the Attachments window from the parent
window 3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable) 215-Jimenez Burrito #8, you can select different ways to view
the Attachment related to this job using the box with the title, Show items attached to:
this job directly. If the parent record has attachments, the attachments would be displayed in this list.
Purchase Orders for this job. If a “child” purchase order record of this job has attachments, then the
attachments would be displayed in this list.
Change Orders for this job. If a “child” change order record of this job has attachments, then the
attachments would be displayed in this list.
144 Sage 100 Contractor
Document Control
How does attaching network files work?
When you select a network file to attach to a record, the program recognizes that it isn't a local file and offers
two choices, Copy the file to my company data (my local computer), or Link to the existing file (on a
network computer).
If you select to Copy the file to my company data, the program makes a copy of it and places it in a
folder\subfolder structure under \MB7\(company)\Attachments\ in its parent-child relationship.
If you select to Link to the existing file, the file remains on the network computer. A copy of it is not created,
and it does not appear in a folder under \MB7\(company)\Attachments\. In fact, if you never link to a local file
or copy a attachment file to your computer, you will never see an Attachments folder under the company
folder.
What happens if I select “Protect this file from being changed”
After you link to a network file by selecting Copy the file to your company data, you have the option to
Protect this file from being changed. After saving the record, if you were to open the linked file and try to
edit it, the program that opens it displays a message stating that the file cannot be changed, is read-only, or
something similar. The message displayed depends on the program that opens it.
NOTE: If you select the option, Link to the existing file, the Protect this file from being changed
option is unavailable. If you need to prevent an attachment from being changed, select the Copy file to
my company data option.
How do I attach Web links?
When adding a link to a Web page as an attachment, you are encouraged to copy and paste the contents of
your browser's Address box (a URL—unique resource locator) into the box on the Add Attachment window.
You can type the URL in the box, but it's much easier to copy and paste it to avoid possible errors from typing
mistakes.
TIP: Attachments that are Web links are always remote and never appear in an Attachments folder
under \MB7\(company name).
How do I know that a record has attachments? Are there visual indicators?
An Attachment button has been added to the toolbar. It displays a paper clip against a grey background if the
record has no attachments. It displays a paper clip against a white rectangle if the record has attachments.
You can click the Attachments button to open the Attachments window whether the record has attachments
or not.
IMPORTANT: To provide room for the Attachments button, the Count button has been removed from
the toolbar. On windows that provide the count files functionality, the Count command is available from
the menu bar.
Product Overview 145
Chapter 7: Project Management
Can I email attachments?
IMPORTANT: Emailing attachment functionality only works if Microsoft Outlook is your default Email
client.
Yes, just open an Attachments window, and select one or more attachments. Click Email, and the program
opens an email message with the attachments included in the Attach... box.
Can I print Attachments?
Yes, just open an Attachments window, and select an attachment. Click Print, and the program opens the file
in the program that is controlled by your Windows settings.
NOTE: Printing from the Attachments window behaves the same as right-clicking the file in Window
Explorer and selecting Print from the menu.
About Requests for Information
NOTE: This functionality is available only if you have the Document Control Module.
A request for information (RFI) is a document you send to general contractors, architects, or engineers asking
for information. When you receive the information, you can include it in the RFI record. There is a business
advantage to adding information about clients or vendors. When you enter such information on a request for
information, the document is legally traceable.
The entry in the Client box and Vendor box on the 6-11-2 Requests for Information window are mutually
exclusive. On a new request for information record when you enter a client, the vendor entry is cleared and the
client address and contact name are automatically placed into the Attention box and Address boxes. Also on
a new record, when you enter a vendor, the client information is cleared and replaced with the vendor
information.
TIPS:
To check spelling, click in the text entry areas and then press the F7 key. On the Field Properties
Text window, select the Check Spelling check box, and then click OK.
You can set up RFIs to be numbered sequentially with an association to a job and phase.
About transmittals
A transmittal is a cover sheet that lists all the documents being sent. The individual to whom you sent the
documents signs the transmittal as proof that all the items were received.
There is a business advantage to adding information about clients or vendors. When you enter such
information on a transmittal, the document is legally traceable.
The entry in the Client box and Vendor box on the 6-11-3 Transmittal window are mutually exclusive. On a
new transmittal record when you enter a client, the vendor entry is cleared and the client address and contact
name are automatically placed into the Attention box and Address boxes. Also on a new record, when you
enter a vendor, the client information is cleared and replaced with the vendor information.
146 Sage 100 Contractor
Document Control
NOTE: This functionality is available only if you have the Document Control Module.
You can provide submittal documents with all material samples supplied to the general contractor, client,
vendor, or architect. The submittal lists each sample you are providing for review. Look for menu command 611-4 Submittals.
There is a business advantage to adding information about clients or vendors. When you enter such
information on a submittal, the document is legally traceable.
The entry in the Client box and Vendor box on the 6-11-4 Submittals window are mutually exclusive. On a
new submittal record, when you enter a client, the vendor entry is cleared and the client address and contact
name are automatically placed into the Attention box and Address boxes. Also on a new record, when you
enter a vendor, the client information is cleared and replaced with the vendor information.
About plan records
NOTE: This functionality is available only if you have the Document Control Module.
In the 6-11-5 Plan Records window, you can enter and track the revisions made to plans. In addition, you can
track who has received the plans.
NOTE: This functionality is available only if you have the Document Control Module.
You can track the conditions and events that occur at the job site on a daily basis. You can keep track of the
employees and subcontractors working on the job, what equipment was used, and how many units of work
were completed. In addition, you can track incidents, meetings, and field orders.
About punch lists
NOTE: This functionality is available only if you have the Document Control Module.
You can create a punch list in the 6-11-7 Punch Lists window. This feature helps you with project reviews at
the job site with an architect, engineer, or client inspecting the work, and helps you create a list of items to
complete.
Correspondence
About correspondence
NOTE: This functionality is available only if you have the Document Control Module.
Documenting correspondence is a very important part of business record keeping. Using the various 6-11-8
Correspondence menu commands, you can write letters and keep records of your correspondence with
clients, subcontractors, architects, engineers, and so forth.
Product Overview 147
Chapter 7: Project Management
For example, if you are having a dispute with vendor about a missed payment or a dispute with a client about a
change order, you can use the 6-11-8 Correspondence window features and options to track and record the
correspondence with the other party.
There are several useful tools available with the 6-11-8 Correspondence window. You can create Quick Lists
for frequently used descriptions and for creating a list of attachments. There is an Edit menu command for
creating correspondence notes. On the Options menu, the Routing command tracks to whom the
correspondence was sent, the date sent, the expected return date (if any), the date returned, and any notes.
TIP: To check spelling, click in the text entry area and then press the F7 key. On the Field Properties
Text window, select the Check Spelling check box and click OK.
Like many Sage 100 Contractor windows, the 6-11-8 Correspondence window provides access to the
Report Printer window where you can create output such print, print to screen, fax, and email. You can also
export the correspondence to Microsoft Excel. In addition, you can schedule the correspondence to be
delivered via fax or email.
7-8 Contact Manager
About 7-8 Contact Manager
Contact Manager allows you to add and update 3-5 Jobs (Accounts Receivable), 3-6 Receivables Clients,
and 4-4 Vendors (Accounts Payable) contact records in your Outlook contacts.
The contacts are added in a Sage 100 Contractor folder in Outlook. Updates made in Outlook to those Sage
100 Contractor contacts can be synchronized and saved back to the contact records in Sage 100 Contractor.
NOTE: Any contacts added to the Sage 100 Contractor folder that were originated in Outlook cannot be
added back into Sage 100 Contractor. Contacts must originate in Sage 100 Contractor.
From this window, you can:
Manage contacts from multiple companies
Sync with Outlook
Sort contacts by contact type, contact record, short name, contact name
Drill down into single contact record
148 Sage 100 Contractor
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
Working with Review and Reporting
Sage 100 Contractor provides over 1200 reports providing you with many ways to understand your business
and to communicate with your clients. Standard reports include selection criteria that allow you to save your
personal defaults for repeated use. For quick access to reports that you use often, you can drag them to the
Sage 100 Contractor Desktop to create an icon.
You can drill down into special Dashboard reports and from there to the record source. This feature makes
getting to the source of financial data just one mouse-click away.
You can also drill down into the 1200 program-wide reports by running a report in print preview, which is
available via Preview report on screen the Preview report on screen button. With your cursor appearing as a
magnifying glass with a red lens, double-clicking rows or fields drills down to report details and records.
Many sections of Sage 100 Contractor have menu links to reports. For example, in 3-Accounts Receivable
you find 3-1 Receivable Reports and 3-1-1 Receivable List reports. On the Report Criteria tab in the 3-1-1
Report Printing window, you see a list of 17 reports. With a report selected, you can then click the Samples
tab to view a sample of that report.
You can use 13-3 Report Writer to create your own reports. As a starting point, you can modify many of the
standard reports to fit your own needs.
From any window with report scheduling functionality, you can schedule the automatic delivery of reports to
customers, subcontractors, and suppliers via fax and email.
Using the tools in 13-5 Form/Report Page Design, you can customize the reports to your company’s design
requirements. You can change the look of any document to fit your needs so that you will not have to purchase
expensive, pre-printed forms.
For a list of all the Sage 100 Contractor reports, see Appendix B, Sage 100 Contractor Reports, see Appendix
B: Sage 100 Contractor Reports.
Selecting and Creating Reports
Sage 100 Contractor comes with over 1,200 reports, providing you with many ways to understand your
business and to communicate with your clients. Standard reports include selection criteria that allow you to
save your personal defaults for repeated use. For quick access to reports that you use often, you can drag
them to the Sage 100 Contractor Desktop to create an icon.
You can drill down into special Dashboard reports and from there to the record source. This feature makes
getting to the source of financial data just one mouse-click away.
You can also drill down into the 1,200 program-wide reports by running a report in print preview, which is
available via the Preview report on screen button. With your pointer appearing as a magnifying glass with a
red lens, double-clicking rows or fields drills down to report details and records.
Product Overview 149
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
To drill down into report information
Examples of Drilling Down into Report Information
In the following examples, Sage 100 Contractor is running the Sample Company, menu 3-1-3 Receivable
Aging, and the 31-Current Job Aging report. The report was run without selection criteria.
Drilling down into rows
A single click on the information reveals whether you are drilling to information contained in a row (notice the
arrows at each end of the row) or an individual field. In this case, the first line contains a drillable row in
addition to two drillable fields, Job# and Current Retention.
Job#
Description
Current + Retention
186
Williams Post Office
149,696.25
201
Trappen Motel
156,053.48
207
Wood Elementary School
Double-clicking the row drills down to the job record 186—Williams Post Office in the 3-5 Jobs (Accounts
Receivable) window.
Drilling down into fields
Drillable information contained in a single field is depicted differently. In a drillable field, you see arrows at
each end of the field.Double-clicking the field opens a grid window that shows the details of the value, as
shown in the 31—Job Current Aging~Current + Retention window.
Notice that the grid window displays the value in addition to the values that have been added together to
create the drillable field value. At the bottom left corner of the grid window is a Drill Down button. By
selecting a grid cell in the A/R Invoices Balance column (9,569.34) and clicking Drill Down, you can drill to
the invoice.
From that invoice, you can continue to drill down to information through other reports. In addition, the status
bar below the grid displays the selection criteria of the cell when the query selection criteria contains a
“Where” clause.
This information can help you understand why certain information is in a grid and (equally as important) why
certain information is not in the grid. For example, if you are expecting to see an important invoice on a grid but
it’s not showing up, the information in the status bar can show information revealing that the invoice has
incorrect status. This allows you to locate the invoice and correct its status.
About report selection criteria
You can use the selection criteria to limit the scope of documents; however, many reports do not require you
to use selection criteria. If a criterion is left blank, Sage 100 Contractor does not use the criterion when
creating the document.
150 Sage 100 Contractor
Selecting and Creating Reports
Specific criteria is required to print checks. You must provide the first check form number, check date, and
ledger account number of the checking account.
If a document does not include information that you were expecting, examine the selection criteria. If all the
criteria are correct, the scope of the criteria might be too narrow. Try removing some of the criteria.
GAAP-standard reports
Sage 100 Contractor provides several reports to reflect generally accepted accounting principles, or GAAP.
These reports include the following:
2-2-0-21 Balance Sheet
2-2-0-31 Balance Sheet~This Year/Last Year Comparison
2-3-0-21 Income Statement
2-3-0-31 Income Statement~Period and YTD
2-3-0-32 Income Statement~This Year/Last Year Comparison
2-3-0-33 Income Statement~Actual/Budget Comparison
2-3-0-41 Dept. Income Statement
2-3-0-51 Dept. Income Statement~Period/Year
2-3-0-53 Dept. Income Statement~Actual/Budget Comparison
2-3-0-71 Income Summary~With Subaccount Detail Period and YTD
2-8-0-21 Financial Report
2-9-0-21 Statement of Cash Flows
Viewing reports
You can view a list of reports in three ways:
To view a list of available reports
NOTE: You can view the list of available reports for a particular function or print window from the
Report Printing window. Some reports are editable; if so, a Modify Report button appears.
1 Open a Sage 100 Contractor window, for example 3-2 Receivable Invoices/Credits.
2 Select the record you want to view in the data control.
3 In the toolbar, click the Print Records button.
4 In the Report Printing window, click the Report Criteria tab.
5 Double-click the report you want to view or print.
Product Overview 151
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
To view a list of all reports by menu command
NOTE: You can only edit a calculated field on an existing report containing an existing calculated field.
1 Open 13-6 Report/Query Lists.
2 The 13-6 Report/Query Lists window opens.
3 If not already selected, select 21-Report List~by Menu.
4 On the toolbar, click Preview report on screen to view the report.
5 Alternatively, select other printing and export options.
To view the list of all reports by menu option
NOTE: You can only edit a calculated field on an existing report containing an existing calculated field.
1 Open 13-6 Report/Query Lists.
2 The 13-6 Report/Query Lists window opens.
3 If not already selected, select 26-Report List~by Menu Option.
4 On the toolbar, click Preview report on screen to view the report.
5 Alternatively, select other printing and export options.
Viewing sample reports
Sage 100 Contractor provides representative samples of most reports that the system produces. These
samples are not generated from the sample data, but are images for you to view. By viewing sample reports,
you can get an idea of the report’s content without having to actually generate the report.
To view a sample report
1 Open a Sage 100 Contractor window, for example 4-2 Payable Invoices/Credits.
2 On the toolbar, click the Print Records button.
3 In the Report Printing window, click the Samples tab.
4 In the reports list, click a report.
5 The sample appears in the right pane.
NOTE: Not all reports have a sample. If there is no sample, a message appears: There is no example
available for this report.
152 Sage 100 Contractor
Selecting and Creating Reports
Working with Quick Reports
Sage 100 Contractor’s Quick Reports feature lets you create simple reports for review. When you view a
Quick Report, Sage 100 Contractor displays the report information in a grid.
For example, here are some of the windows in which you can create Quick Reports:
1-9 Departments
6-5 Cost Codes
7-3-1 Security Groups
7-3-2 User List
9-8 Board Footage
10-2 Task List
12-3 Inventory Locations
You can change the font styles in individual cells or for the entire grid. In addition, you can hide columns of
information. When you print the report, any information hidden in the Quick Report window will not appear on
the printed report.
Although you can change the formatting of a Quick Report, the changes are not saved. They are only used for
printing a Quick Report. For example, open 6-5 Cost Codes, and using the B, I, and U buttons located under
the menu bar, apply bold, italic, or underline formatting to the contents of cells.
You can hide the columns by right-clicking the column heading and selecting the Hide Selected Column
command from the drop-down menu. Then click the Print Records button. When the Grid Printing window
opens, click the Preview report on screen button to view a preview of your changes.
In some cases, a grid may display too many columns for the report to fit on a standard-sized piece of paper
even in landscape orientation. In such cases, we recommend that you export the quick report to Microsoft
Excel, which has the capability to capture all the data on any grid in Sage 100 Contractor.
Setting up a shortcut from a report printing window
To create a shortcut to a specific report:
1 Open any Report Printing window.
2 Click the Report Criteria tab.
3 Select a report.
4 In the lower left of the window, click Create a Shortcut to Selected Report.
GAAP-standard reports
Sage 100 Contractor provides several reports to reflect generally accepted accounting principles, or GAAP.
These reports include the following:
Product Overview 153
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
2-2-0-21 Balance Sheet
2-2-0-31 Balance Sheet~This Year/Last Year Comparison
2-3-0-21 Income Statement
2-3-0-31 Income Statement~Period and YTD
2-3-0-32 Income Statement~This Year/Last Year Comparison
2-3-0-33 Income Statement~Actual/Budget Comparison
2-3-0-41 Dept. Income Statement
2-3-0-51 Dept. Income Statement~Period/Year
2-3-0-53 Dept. Income Statement~Actual/Budget Comparison
2-3-0-71 Income Summary~With Subaccount Detail Period and YTD
2-8-0-21 Financial Report
2-9-0-21 Statement of Cash Flows
NOTE: The existing reports with the same names in previous versions of Sage 100 Contractor are
replaced with these new GAAP-standard reports.
About report selection criteria
You can use the selection criteria to limit the scope of documents; however, many reports do not require you
to use selection criteria. If a criterion is left blank, Sage 100 Contractor does not use the criterion when
creating the document.
Specific criteria is required to print checks. You must provide the first check form number, check date, and
ledger account number of the checking account.
If a document does not include information that you were expecting, examine the selection criteria. If all the
criteria are correct, the scope of the criteria might be too narrow. Try removing some of the criteria.
Working with Quick Reports
Sage 100 Contractor’s Quick Reports feature lets you create simple reports for review. When you view a
Quick Report, Sage 100 Contractor displays the report information in a grid.
For example, here are some of the windows in which you can create Quick Reports:
1-9 Departments
6-5 Cost Codes
7-3-1 Security Groups
7-3-2 User List
9-8 Board Footage
154 Sage 100 Contractor
Dashboard Reports
10-2 Task List
12-3 Inventory Locations
You can change the font styles in individual cells or for the entire grid. In addition, you can hide columns of
information. When you print the report, any information hidden in the Quick Report window will not appear on
the printed report.
Although you can change the formatting of a Quick Report, the changes are not saved. They are only used for
printing a Quick Report. For example, open 6-5 Cost Codes, and using the B, I, and U buttons located under
the menu bar, apply bold, italic, or underline formatting to the contents of cells.
You can hide the columns by right-clicking the column heading and selecting the Hide Selected Column
command from the drop-down menu. Then click the Print Records button. When the Grid Printing window
opens, click the Preview report on screen button to view a preview of your changes.
In some cases, a grid may display too many columns for the report to fit on a standard-sized piece of paper
even in landscape orientation. In such cases, we recommend that you export the quick report to Microsoft
Excel, which has the capability to capture all the data on any grid in Sage 100 Contractor.
Dashboard Reports
About the Dashboard
The Sage 100 Contractor Dashboard has been designed to show the state of your company’s finances in real
time by displaying information about your company’s financial state.
NOTE: Until you set up Dashboard security, the Dashboard is only available to the supervisor user.
Showing the Dashboard after Login
You can show the Dashboard every time you log into the company, if you have the access.
1 Click the [Dashboard] button.
2 Select the Options menu, and click on [Show Dashboard After Login].
NOTE: If you need to turn off displaying the Dashboard after you log into the company, use the same
steps, then verify that [Show Dashboard After Login] is not checked.
Dashboard Sections
The Dashboard is organized into seven sections when first opened. You can add and remove content by
clicking the [Add/Remove Content] link.
Cash Accounts- Displays up to five cash accounts. You can drill down into each of the accounts to
review details. You can use the Edit feature to choose which accounts are displayed.
Cash Position - Displays Total Cash and Receivables. Your Cash Position is the difference between
Total Cash + Receivables and Less Current Liabilities.
Product Overview 155
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
Outstanding Change Orders - Displays Change Orders that have not been approved in Less than 30
Days and those that have not been approved in More than 30 Days.
Receivables - Displays receivable amounts that are Due in 7 Days, Due in 30 Days, Overdue 1-30
days, and Overdue > 30 (more than 30) days.
Payables - Displays payable amounts that are Due in 7 Days, Due in 30 Days, Overdue 1-30 days,
and Overdue > 30 (more than 30) days.
Income from Operations - Displays Income from This Month, This Quarter, and This Year broken
down into three cost categories: Direct/Equip/Shop, Overhead, and Administrative. The final display
totals Income from Operations by This Month, This Quarter, and This Year.
Under-Billed Jobs - Displays under-billed jobs in two ways, by amount and by percentage of contract.
You may also choose not to display any under-billed jobs.
NOTES:
The Dashboard displays GAAP-standard financial information.
All negative amounts are displayed in parentheses.
Amounts that are shown in red indicate items that may need your special attention.
Refreshing the Dashboard Information
The Dashboard displays the Last refreshed date and time so that you always know if the information is
fresh. You can click the Refresh button to refresh the information. In addition, every time you exit and relaunch the Dashboard, Sage 100 Contractor refreshes the information.
You can print the current view of the Dashboard by pressing the Print button on the right side of the toolbar.
TIPS:
If you have access to the Dashboard, you can display it at any time by clicking the [Dashboard]
button.
You may need to set up a separate security group with one member if you are the only one who is
going to view the Dashboard. You have to be a Supervisor user to set up security groups.
You can click the [?] link to the right of each section heading to open a detailed Help topic about this
area of the Dashboard.
About Dashboard security
The Dashboard has been created to display and provide access to a great deal of company financial
information. It was designed for the benefit of company owners, company executives, and other selected
employees. Such a detailed presentation of financial information is not meant to be accessible to all your
employees in your company, although it can be set up that way.
Until you set up security, the Dashboard is only available to the supervisor user. It is best to set up the
Dashboard security at the earliest possible opportunity to be able to share your company’s financial
information with selected employees.
156 Sage 100 Contractor
Dashboard Reports
When a supervisor user launches Sage 100 Contractor, the Dashboard window opens. Upon closing the
Dashboard window and until a security option has been selected, Sage 100 Contractor continues to display
the Dashboard Security Options window to the supervisor user.
About Setting the Security Options Globally
Selecting Set Dashboard Security in the Options menu opens the Form Level Security window. Selecting
one or more check boxes from the security groups list allows the members of that security group to view the
Dashboard. Clicking OK sets security for the Dashboard.
NOTE: You may need to set up a new security group just for the Dashboard. For details, see About
Security Groups.
About Setting the Security Options by Dashboard Tab
Clicking on the Add/Remove Content link in the Dashboard allows you to set the security by Dashboard tab
for the General Ledger, Payables, Receivables, and Projects tabs. You can go to each tab and click on the
Security link to choose the security groups allowed access to this tab. Clicking the OK button saves the
security choice for all panels that are on the tab currently displayed.
NOTE: Security for adding panels is enforced. If a non-supervisor user tries to add a panel from a tab
where they are not a member of the allowed groups, then a security message is displayed and the
dashboard panel is not added.
Changing the Security Settings
As your business grows, you may need to change your security settings. You can access the Form Level
Security window at any time from the Dashboard by pressing the F7 key or by clicking the Security link in the
General Ledger, Payables, Receivables, or Projects tabs for tab level security. Selecting or unselecting check
boxes in the Form Level Security window will change access for members of that security group to view the
Dashboard.
About General Ledger content in the Dashboard
You can add or remove the following content panels from the General Ledger tab by clicking the Add/Remove
Content link on the Dashboard.
Cash Accounts
Cash Position
Income from Operations
Income and Expenses
Previous Year Income Comparison
Previous Year Expense Comparison
Budget vs. Actual Income
Budget vs. Actual Expense
Department Income and Expense
Product Overview 157
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
Department Budget vs. Actual Income
Department Budget vs. Actual Expense
Budgeted Expenses
About Cash Accounts on the Dashboard
The Cash Accounts panel displays five selected cash accounts in your list of cash accounts with their
balances.
If these five accounts are not the ones you are interested in monitoring, you can click the Edit button to the
right of the title heading and select five accounts from your cash accounts list.
TIP: The bottom line in the list of accounts, All Other Cash Accounts, presents the sum of all other
existing cash accounts in that company.
About Cash Position on the Dashboard
Displays information on five distinct areas for executive financial review.
The Cash Position section displays numbers representing five distinct areas that merit executive review:
Total Cash—Displays the total for all accounts in the Cash Accounts range.
Receivables—Displays the full balance of the invoices. Because it does not display the net due, it
includes retention.
Total Cash + Receivables—Displays the sum of Cash Accounts and Receivables.
Less Current Liabilities—Displays the total for all accounts in the Current Liabilities range.
Cash Position—Displays the difference between Total Cash + Receivables and Less Current
Liabilities.
About Income from Operations on the Dashboard
Displays information that summarizes an income statement, excluding the Other Income and After Tax
Expense categories.
It displays the information in three ways:
This Month- Displays information that includes all transactions posted to the current period.
This Quarter—Displays information that includes all transactions posted to the current quarter.
NOTE: There is no cutoff within the quarter. If the current period is 4, then activity posted to
periods 5 and 6 are included because they are part of the current quarter.
This Year—Displays information that includes all transactions posted to the current fiscal year.
NOTE: There is no cutoff within the year. Any transaction posted to periods 1 through 12 are
included.
158 Sage 100 Contractor
Dashboard Reports
About Income and Expenses on the Dashboard
Displays the income and expenses by period for the fiscal year.
About Previous Year Income Comparison on the Dashboard
Compare this year's income with last year's income.
About Previous Year Expense Comparison on the Dashboard
Compare this year's expenses with last year's expenses.
About Budget vs. Actual Income on the Dashboard
Compare this year's actual income with their budgeted amounts.
About Budget vs. Actual Expense on the Dashboard
Compare this year's actual expenses with their budgeted amounts.
About Department Income and Expenses on the Dashboard
View incomes and expenses for ledger accounts with departments. You can add this panel more than once for
different departments.
NOTE: All departments are selected by default, click the Edit button on the Dashboard to select a
specific department. This reports supports multiple instances on the Dashboard.
About Department Budget vs. Actual Income on the Dashboard
Compare this year's actual income with the departmental budgeted amounts. You can add this panel more
than once for different departments.
NOTE: All departments are selected by default, click the Edit button on the Dashboard to select a
specific department. This dashboard panel supports multiple instances on the Dashboard.
About Department Budget vs. Actual Expense on the Dashboard
View income and expenses for ledger accounts with departments. You can add this panel more than once for
different departments.
NOTE: All departments are selected by default, click the Edit button on the Dashboard to select a
specific department. You can add this panel more than once for different departments.
About Budgeted Expenses on the Dashboard
Displays expenses for accounts that have budgets, ranked by percent of budget.
From beginning of the fiscal year through the current accounting period. The budget amount for the current
accounting period is prorated, based on today's date.
NOTE: All future periods are ignored.
Product Overview 159
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
About Payables content in the Dashboard
You can add the following content panels from the Payables tab by clicking the Add/Remove Content link on
the Dashboard.
Payables Aging
Top Vendors
Expiring Vendor Discounts
Credit Card Accounts
About Payables on the Dashboard
This section of the Dashboard displays information on invoices with status of:
1-Open—Indicates a record posted to the general ledger.
2-Review—Indicates the management or bookkeeping staff should review the record.
3-Dispute—Indicates a record disputed by the client.
It also displays information about the invoices in four ways:
Invoices Due in 7 Days—Today is the first of the seven days. If today is Sunday, then this number
represents the total amount due from and including today, which is Sunday through and including the
following Saturday.
Invoices Due in 30 Days—Today is the first of the thirty days. If today is the tenth day of the month, this
number represents the total amount due from and including today through and including 29 more days.
Invoices Overdue 1-30 (overdue one to thirty days)—This is the same as an aging report.
Invoices Overdue > 30 (overdue more than thirty days)—This is the same as an aging report. The
amount that the Dashboard presents is the sum of AP Invoice Aging report, 31-60, 61-90, and 91—120+
columns.
When reviewing the information contained in this section, it is important to remember that the amounts are
“net due;” that is, if retention exists, then it is excluded.
About Payables Aging on the Dashboard
Displays information on invoices with status of:
1-Open—Indicates a record posted to the general ledger.
2-Review—Indicates the management or bookkeeping staff should review the record.
3-Dispute—Indicates a record disputed by the client.
It also displays information about the invoices in four ways:
Invoices Due in 7 Days—Today is the first of the seven days. If today is Sunday, then this number
represents the total amount due from and including today, which is Sunday through and including the
following Saturday.
Invoices Due in 30 Days—Today is the first of the thirty days. If today is the tenth day of the month, this
number represents the total amount due from and including today through and including 29 more days.
160 Sage 100 Contractor
Dashboard Reports
Invoices Overdue 1-30 (overdue one to thirty days)—This is the same as an aging report.
Invoices Overdue > 30 (overdue more than thirty days)—This is the same as an aging report. The
amount that the Dashboard presents is the sum of AP Invoice Aging report, 31-60, 61-90, and 91—120+
columns.
TIP: Amounts that are shown in red indicate items that may need your special attention.
When reviewing the information contained in this section, it is important to remember that the amounts are
“net due.” That is, if retention exists, then it is excluded.
About Credit Card Accounts on the Dashboard
Displays five selected credit card accounts with their balances.
Displays the first five credit card accounts in your list of credit card accounts. If these five accounts are not
the ones you are interested in monitoring, you can click the Edit button to the right of the title heading and
select five accounts from your credit card accounts list.
TIP: The bottom line in the list of accounts, All Other Card Accounts, presents the sum of all other
existing cash accounts in that company.
About Top Vendors on the Dashboard
Displays the top 6 vendors based on year-to-date activity. Based on billed amounts for the current fiscal year.
About Expiring Vendor Discounts on the Dashboard
Displays the amounts of vendor discounts that are available this week and next week. Each week ends on
Saturday.
About Receivables content in the Dashboard
You can add the following content panels from the Receivables tab, once you click the Add/Remove
Content link on the Dashboard.
Receivables Aging
Service Receivables Aging
Job Receivables Aging
Top Customers by Billing
Top Service Customers
Top Customers by $ Owed
Top Customers by Contract
About Receivables on the Dashboard
This section provides information about receivable invoices with status of:
Product Overview 161
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
1-Open—Indicates a record posted to the general ledger.
2-Review—Indicates the management or bookkeeping staff should review the record.
3-Dispute—Indicates a record disputed by the client.
It also displays information about the invoices in four ways:
Invoices Due in 7 Days—Today is the first of the seven days. If today is Sunday, then this number
represents the total amount due from and including today, which is Sunday through and including the
following Saturday.
Invoices Due in 30 Days—Today is the first of the thirty days. If today is the tenth day of the month, this
number represents the total amount due, from today through 29 more days (inclusive).
Invoices Overdue 1-30 (overdue one to thirty days)—This is the same as an aging report. The amount
that the Dashboard presents is the sum of:
AR Invoice Aging report, 1—30 column
Service Invoice Aging report, 1—30 column.
Invoices Overdue > 30 (overdue more than thirty days)—This is the same as an aging report. The
amount that the Dashboard presents is the sum of:
AR Invoice Aging report, 31-60, 61-90, and 91—120+ columns, and
Service Invoice Aging report, 31-60, 61-90, and 91+ columns.
When reviewing the information contained in this section, it is important to remember that the amounts:
Are “net due,” that is, retention, if it exists, is excluded.
Include both Accounts Receivable and Service Receivable invoices.
TIP: Amounts that are shown in red indicate items that may need your special attention.
About Receivables Aging on the Dashboard
Displays information about receivable invoices with status of 1-Open, 2-Review, and 3-Dispute.
1-Open—Indicates a record posted to the general ledger.
2-Review—Indicates the management or bookkeeping staff should review the record.
3-Dispute—Indicates a record disputed by the client.
About Service Receivables Aging on the Dashboard
Displays information about service receivable invoices with status of:
1-Open—Indicates a record posted to the general ledger.
2-Review—Indicates the management or bookkeeping staff should review the record.
3-Dispute—Indicates a record disputed by the client.
TIP: Amounts that are shown in red indicate items that may need your special attention.
162 Sage 100 Contractor
Dashboard Reports
About Top Customers by Billing on the Dashboard
Displays the total billed for the top 6 customer from job and service billings.
About Top Service Customers on the Dashboard
Displays the top 6 customers from service billings.
About Top Customers by $ Owed on the Dashboard
Displays the top six customer balances for both accounts receivables and service receivables.
About Top Customers by Contract on the Dashboard
Displays the top 6 customers based on contract amounts, including approved change orders.
About Projects content in the Dashboard
You can add or remove the following content panels from the Projects tab, once you click the Add/Remove
Content link on the Dashboard.
Under-Billed Jobs
Outstanding Change Orders
Job Costs by Cost Type
Job Contract, Budget, and Cost to Date
Job Cash Flow to Date
Job Uncommitted Budget
Today's Job Tasks
Tomorrow's Job Tasks
Payable Retention by Job
Receivable Retention
Job Hours Over Budget
About Under-Billed Jobs on the Dashboard
Displays the five most under-billed jobs ranked by dollar amount or percentage of contract.
This section of the Dashboard displays the Job Number and Job Name with two ranking criteria:
The dollar amount that is under-billed.
The percentage of current contract amount that is under-billed.
To be included in the Under-Billed Jobs display, jobs must have:
A status of 3-Contract or 4-Current.
A positive contract amount.
Product Overview 163
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
A budget.
The Under-billed Jobs section displays the five most under-billed jobs ranked by percentage of contract.
Clicking Edit located to the right of the section heading opens the Under-Billed Jobs window.
Clicking Show all in Report opens a report displaying all under-billed jobs. This link is only available if there
are more than 5 under-billed jobs.
This window provides options to display jobs:
Ranked by dollar amount
Ranked by percentage of contract
TIP: Over/under billing is another name for percentage complete accounting. For more information, see
the topic About percentage complete accounting.
About Outstanding Change Orders on the Dashboard
Displays information on change orders that are outstanding Less than 30 days or More than 30 days.
Drilling down into either one of these areas displays change orders with statuses of:
2-Open—The client has not approved the changes yet. (Only the Prime Change List~Land with
Aging report and job status reports reflect the changes.)
3-Review—The changes are under review. (Only the Prime Change List~Land with Aging report and
job status reports reflect the changes.)
4-Disputed—The change order is in dispute.
TIP: Amounts that are shown in red indicate items that may need your special attention.
About Job Costs by Cost Type on the Dashboard
Compare job costs by cost type. You can add this panel more than once for different jobs.
NOTE: User-defined cost types (6-9) are included in the Other category. Default is All jobs, click Edit on
this dashboard panel in the Dashboard to select specific jobs. You can also view jobs by job supervisor.
About Job Contract, Budget and Costs to Date on the Dashboard
Displays the job contract, budget, and costs to date for 6 selected jobs. You can add this panel more than
once for different job contracts.
NOTE: In the Cost to Date column, the number is shown in red if the cost is greater than the budget.
About Job Cash Flow to Date on the Dashboard
This panel displays the net cash flow to date on 6 selected jobs. You can add this panel more than once for
different jobs.
164 Sage 100 Contractor
Dashboard Reports
About Job Uncommitted Budget on the Dashboard
Displays budget, actual and committed costs, and remaining budget for 6 selected jobs. You can add this
panel more than once for different job contracts.
This panel allows you to see what the committed costs are on a job. The committed costs are monies that
you’ve committed to spend but have not spent yet. The report looks to new or unfilled purchase orders,
subcontracts, and payroll records that have not been final-computed. It allows you to determine the
percentage of labor burden applied to all open payroll records. It calculates the remaining budget based on the
budget plus changes, less costs to date and committed costs.
About Today's Job Tasks on the Dashboard
Displays today's tasks from a job schedule for a single job.
NOTE: Based on work days.
About Tomorrow's Job Tasks on the Dashboard
Displays tomorrow's tasks from a job schedule for a single job.
About Payable Retention by Job on the Dashboard
Displays retention on jobs from payable invoices. You can add this panel more than once for different jobs.
About Receivable Retention on the Dashboard
Displays retention on jobs from receivable invoices.You can add this panel more than once for different jobs.
About Job Hours Over Budget on the Dashboard
Displays the top 6 cost codes from a job that are over the budgeted hours. Includes hours from uncomputed
payroll records, including daily payroll entries.
About Alerts content in the Dashboard
You can add or remove the My Alerts content panel from the Alerts tab by clicking the Add/Remove Content
link on the Dashboard.
About My Alerts on the Dashboard
This panel is automatically displayed in the top left when you have alert notifications sent to the Dashboard.
NOTE: If you remove the My Alerts content panel from the Dashboard, the next time an alert notification
is sent to the Dashboard, the My Alerts panel will automatically be displayed in the top left position.
All Alerts
The All Alerts count is the count of all read and unread alert notifications in the Dashboard Alert Viewer.
Product Overview 165
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
Unread Alerts
The Unread Alerts count is the count of all unread alert notifications in the Dashboard Alert Viewer.
Form/Report Page Design
About 13-5 Form/Report Page Design
Every report, document, or letter that you generate uses a form design. A form design is a template for the
layout of a page or pages. With 13-5 Form/Report Page Design, you can edit any of the form designs
supplied with Sage 100 Contractor, or create entirely new forms. You can change the graphic elements and
layout of the form, as well as the boilerplate text. This is especially useful when a company has several
different businesses, and needs to use different forms for each business.
Before creating a report, it is important to understand how 13-3 Report Writer and Form/Report Page
Design work together.
In 13-5 Form/Report Page Design, you create the page layout for a single page form or a multi-page
form that includes text, fields, and calculated fields. Form designs also use a detail box, which indicates
where the details of the report will be placed.
In 13-3 Report Writer, you create the body of the report that appears in the detail box of the form design.
In the design of the report details, you can include text, fields, and calculated fields. In addition, you can
control when a report prints on a new page or on an entirely new form.
13-5 Form/Report Page Design provides the ability to create multi-page forms. Suppose that you always
send a cover letter with each proposal to potential clients. You can incorporate both the cover letter and the
proposal forms in a single design. Then when you print proposals, the cover letter always prints with the
proposal. A form can have up to 100 pages, each of which you can format differently.
Creating new forms
NOTE: Sometimes it is quicker to create a new form from an existing form if you only have to make a
few changes or additions.
To create a new form, open 13-5 Form Report/Page Design. The 13-5 Form Report/Page Design window
appears and displays a blank page on which you can begin creating your new form.
Creating new forms using existing forms
It may be easier for you to use an existing form to create a new form. For example, in the 3-2 Report Printing
window, on the Report Criteria tab, you see a list of reports. When you click a report in the Report Criteria
list, the form upon which the report is based is displayed in the Report Form drop-down list.
Report
Report Form
21—Receivable Invoice
System.Invoice_AR
22—Receivable Invoice~with Notes
System.Invoice_AR
166 Sage 100 Contractor
Form/Report Page Design
Report
Report Form
23—Receivable Invoice~Retention
System.Invoice_AR_Retention
24—Receivable Invoice~Retention;
with Notes
System.Invoice_AR_Retention
31—Receivable Credit
System.Credit_AR
The system forms follow a specific naming pattern, for example, System.Invoice_AR. For the new report to
appear in Sage 100 Contractor in the area in which you would want it to appear, it must be saved with a similar
naming scheme. For example, YourName.Invoice_AR. You do not need to preserve “System” in the name,
you must retain the .Invoice_AR in the name. The "System" designation is intended to identify the forms that
are included with the program installation. Forms that you create or modify should not include "System" in the
name.
NOTE: Form designs are listed alphabetically in the report form list. To see your new forms listed before
the "System" reports, use a name that will appear before the word system.
When you open a system report and save it with a new name, it is saved by default to the \Report Forms
folder; however, you can choose to save it in a different folder. If you save it to a different folder, it will not
appear in the program.
To create a new form using an existing form
1 Open, for example, the 3-2 Receivable Invoices/Credits window.
2 Click the Print Records button.
3 On the 3-2 Report Printing window, in the Report Form list, click the drop-down arrow and select the
form design that you want to edit.
4 From the Edit menu, select Form Design.
5 On 13-5 Form/Report Page Design, edit the form.
6 From the File menu, select Save.
7 On the Save File window, name the new form and then click Save.
When you need to make a large number of changes, it might be easier to create a new form from
scratch in the 13-5 Form/Report Page Design window.
Editing existing forms
To edit an existing form design in 13-5 Form/Report Page Design
1 Open 13-5 Report/Form Page Design.
2 Select File > Open.
Product Overview 167
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
3 Select the form design that you want to edit.
4 On the 13-5 Form/Report Page Design window, edit the form.
5 Select File > Save.
To edit an existing form design from a Report Printing window
1 Open any Report Printing window, for example 3-2 Receivable Invoices/Credits.
2 Click the Print Records button.
3 Select the form design that you want to edit.
4 From the Edit menu, select Form Design.
5 On the 13-5 Form/Report Page Design window, edit the form.
6 Select File > Save.
Previewing forms
To preview a form within 13-5 Form/Report Page Design:
1 From the 13-5 Form/Report Page Design window, select Pages > View Page.
To preview a form from within a Report Printing window:
1 Open the report and select the Report Form for preview.
2 Select Edit > Form Design.
3 Select Pages > View Page.
Reducing the document size when previewing forms
When previewing a form, you can reduce the size of a document displayed in the Screen Review window.
In the Screen Review window, select View Options, then select the percentage size (100%, 85%, 70%, or
50%) at which you want to view the report.
Setting object properties
When you right-click an object in 13-3 Report Writer or 13-5 Form/Report Page Design, you can set its
properties.
The Object Properties dialog box is specialized for each type of object
Text Object Properties
Image Object Properties
Lines and Boxes Object Properties
168 Sage 100 Contractor
Form/Report Page Design
Field Object Properties
Multiple Object Properties
Text Object Properties
Property
You can:
Name
Select a font to apply to the entire text box.
Size
Select a font size.
Bold
Format all text in the text box as bold.
Underline
Format all text in the text box as underlined.
Italic
Format all text in the text box as italic.
Bold Italic
Format all text in the text box as bold italic.
Text
Edit the text or field that appears in the text box.
Characters Set the total number of characters that appear in the text box.
Page
Specify on which page the object appears In 13-5 Form/Report Page Design.
Top
Specify the absolute position for the top of the object.
Left
Specify the absolute position for the left side of the object.
Forecolor
Select the color you want to use for the text.
Backcolor
Select the color you want to use behind the text in the text box.
Alignment Align text to the left or right margin of the text box.
Image Properties
Property You can:
Page
Specify on which page the object appears In 13-5 Form/Report Page Design.
Top
Specify the absolute position for the top of the image.
Left
Specify the absolute position for the left side of the image.
Width
Specify the width of the image.
Height
Specify the height of the image.
Image
Specify the path of the image you want to display in the picture box. To select the image, click
the detail button.
Product Overview 169
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
Lines and Boxes Properties
Property
You can:
Line width Specify the thickness of a drawing line.
Line type
Specify the type of drawing line you want (Solid, Dash, Dot, Dot-Dash).
Forecolor
Select the color you want to use for the drawing line.
Backcolor
Select the color you want to use to fill the interior area of a box.
Page
Specify on which page the line/box appears In 13-5 Form/Report Page Design.
Top
Specify the absolute position for the top of the line/box.
Left
Specify the absolute position for the left side of the line/box.
Width
Specify the width of the line/box. This property does not appear for vertical lines.
Height
Specify the height of the line/box. This property does not appear for horizontal lines.
Field Object Properties
Property
You can:
Name
Select a font to apply to the entire text box.
Size
Select a font size.
Bold
Format all text in the text box as bold.
Underline
Format all text in the text box as underlined.
Page
Specify on which page the object appears In 13-5 Form/Report Page Design.
Top
Specify the absolute position for the top of the text box.
Left
Specify the absolute position for the left side of the text box.
Width
Specify the width of the text box.
Height
Specify the height of the text box.
Forecolor
Select the color you want to use for the text.
Backcolor
Select the color you want to use behind the text in the text box.
Format
For special number and date formatting, select the desired format from the list.
Alignment
Align text to the left or right margin of the text box.
Characters
Set the total number of characters that appear in the text box.
170 Sage 100 Contractor
Form/Report Page Design
Property
You can:
Hide a line if the field is blank or returns a zero.
Do not print
line if the
returned
value for this
field is
zero/blank
Suppose you create a detail line in a report to print the account number, account name, and
the account balance. However, you do not want to include the account on the report if it does
not contain a balance. For the balance field, you display the object properties and select the
Do not print line if the value returned for this field is zero/blank check box. Now, when
you generate the report, accounts with no balance or a zero balance do not appear on the
report.
Print a zero
if the value
is zero (othDisplay "0" or "0.00" (depending on the format choice for a zero amount) if the field
erwise will
has no value.
print a
blank
space)
Place fields on a group band that is not totaled on the report.
Do not total
this field
For example, for a report that includes a calculated percentage value on each detail line, you
don't want the total of all the percentage amounts printed on the subtotal and total lines.
Set Properties for All Selected Objects
Property
You can:
Name
Select a font to apply to all the selected text objects.
Size
Select a font size.
Bold
Format all the selected text objects as bold.
Underline
Format all the selected text objects as underlined.
Italic
Format all the selected text objects as italic.
Italic
Bold Italic
Format all the selected text objects as bold italic.
Forecolor
Select the color you want to use for all the selected objects.
Backcolor
Select the color you want to use for all the selected objects.
Line width Specify the thickness of a line for all the selected line/box objects.
Line type
Specify the type of line you want (Solid, Dash, Dot, Dot-Dash) fpr all the selected
line/box objects.
Alignment Align text to the left or right margin of the text boxes for all the selected text objects.
Product Overview 171
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
Page Layout
In the Pages > Page Format dialog box, you can set the following options:
Page Size
Margins
Select the placement of lines
Snap to Position Setting
Disable or enable a 1/4 Inch Grid to align design elements
To set the page size
1 In 13-5 Form/Report Page Design, on the Pages menu, click Page Format.
2 Under Page Size, enter the size of the page on which you want to base your design.
3 Click Save.
To set the page margins
1 In 13-5 Form/Report Page Design, on the Pages menu, click Page Format.
2 Under Margins, enter the values for the page margins.
3 Click Save.
To select the placement of lines
1 In 13-5 Form/Report Page Design, on the Insert menu, click Line.
2 In the status bar area, select the line width and type of line you want to draw.
3 Click in the grid to draw the line and drag the pointer.
To position objects with snap lines
1 In 13-5 Form/Report Page Design, on the Pages menu, click Page Format.
2 Under the Layout Tools section, next to Size of snap-to-position grid, click the arrows to select the
position, up to 10/16".
3 Click Save.
To display a quarter-inch grid
1 In 13-5 Form/Report Page Design, on the Pages menu, click Page Format.
2 Under the Layout Tools section, click Show ¼" grid in background.
3 Click Save.
172 Sage 100 Contractor
Form/Report Page Design
About form and report page design layout
In the Pages > Page Format dialog box, you can set the following options:
Page Size
Margins
Snap to Position Setting
Disable or enable a 1/4 Inch Grid to align design elements
To set the page size
1 In 13-5 Form/Report Page Design, on the Pages menu, click Page Format.
2 Under Page Size, enter the size of the page on which you want to base your design.
3 Click Save.
To set the page margins
1 In 13-5 Form/Report Page Design, on the Pages menu, click Page Format.
2 Under Margins, enter the values for the page margins.
3 Click Save.
To position objects with snap lines
1 In 13-5 Form/Report Page Design, on the Pages menu, click Page Format.
2 Under the Layout Tools section, next to Size of snap-to-position grid, click the arrows to select the
position, up to 10/16".
3 Click Save.
To display a quarter-inch grid
1 In 13-5 Form/Report Page Design, on the Pages menu, click Page Format.
2 Under the Layout Tools section, click Show ¼" grid in background.
3 Click Save.
About fields
Fields are special codes that instruct Sage 100 Contractor to replace the field with information from a
database. For example, you might want to include the job number on a report for payable invoices. You can
insert the ACPINV.JOBNUM field in the report design. Then, when you generate the report, Sage 100
Contractor fills in the appropriate information for you.
With fields, you can create form designs and report designs to add or update information automatically in your
reports and documents. Fields provide access to data throughout Sage 100 Contractor. Because you can
Product Overview 173
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
place fields in both report designs and form designs, you need to determine which fields are necessary and
then decide where to insert them. It is a good idea to place most all fields in the report design if possible, as
this lets you reuse a small number of form designs for a variety of reports.
Like other objects in a form or report design, you can set object properties for fields. When you generate a
report or document, Sage 100 Contractor inserts the information indicated by the field. If the database does
not contain information requested by the field, Sage 100 Contractor leaves the field blank in the resulting
report or document. However, you can set the property of a field to print a zero rather than leaving the field
blank.
Using Report Writer
About Report Writer
13-3 Report Writer provides tools that allow you to create custom reports to access information stored in the
Sage 100 Contractor databases. With 13-3 Report Writer, you can modify existing reports or create entirely
new reports for your company’s needs.
Before creating a report, it is important to understand how 13-3 Report Writer and 13-5 Form/Report Page
Design work together. In 13-5 Form/Report Page Design, you create the page layout for a single page form
or a multi-page form that includes text, fields, and calculated fields. Most form designs also have a detail box,
which indicates to Sage 100 Contractor where the details of the report will be placed.
In 13-3 Report Writer, you create the body of the report that appears in the detail box of the form design. In
the design of the report details, you can include text, fields, and calculated fields. In addition, you can control
when the report prints on a new page or an entirely new form.
13-3 Report Writer allows you to associate a specific form design with a report. When you select the report
for printing, Sage 100 Contractor automatically selects the associated form design. In addition, you can
determine the location of the report in Sage 100 Contractor. You can assign custom reports to 13-4 Report
Printing, or to another window that contains reports similar to the custom report.
You can create new reports from scratch, or you can use existing reports as the basis for new reports. When
you display a Sage 100 Contractor report, Sage 100 Contractor copies the report and displays the copy in the
13-3 Report Writer window. You can then edit, rename, and save the new report.
Assigning reports to form designs
When you decide to print a report, Sage 100 Contractor selects the form design you assigned to the report
design. You can assign a report design to a specific form or to a group of forms.
Form design uses file name extensions to group similar types of form designs together. To assign a report
design to a form design, you need to determine which form design a specific report uses. When you select a
report for preview or printing in the 13-4 Report Printing window, Sage 100 Contractor displays the file name
and file name extension of the form design below the Report list.
For example, you create a new report for income statements titled My Income Statement and want the new
report to use the same form design as the original report for income statements. Having created the report
174 Sage 100 Contractor
Report Printing
design, assign it a form design to use when Sage 100 Contractor generates the report. In the Form text box,
you type report.rpt and save the new report. Later, when you print the My Income Statement report, Sage 100
Contractor automatically selects the Report.rpt form design.
Suppose, instead of limiting the report to the Report.rpt form design, you want to be able to select any form
design using the .rpt file name extension when printing the My Income Statement report. In this situation, use
a wildcard in place of the report name and indicate the file name extension.
In the Form text box, type *.rpt to indicate you want all files using the .rpt file name extension, and save the
report. When you select the My Income Statement report for printing, you will be able to select from all the
form designs using the .rpt file name extension.
Saving and naming reports
When you save a report design, Sage 100 Contractor saves it as a file. The file name determines where you
will find the report in Sage 100 Contractor. Where form designs use different file name extensions to organize
the forms into meaningful groups, all report designs use the .rpf file name extension.
You can assign a custom report to:
13-4 Report Printing. Assign the file any name and save it to the \MB7\Custom Reports folder. You can
save an unlimited number of reports to this location.
A specific location where similar reports are found. For example, if you create a new income statement,
you might want to make the report available with the other income statements. Each window location
can contain up to 20 custom reports.
The filename consists of eight numbers. The first six numbers specify the window location, and the last two
numbers are user-defined and must fall between 01 and 20.
The following examples explain how to convert the window locations into the correct naming format:
You created a new departmental income statement and want to access the report from 2-8-1
Departmental Income Statement. Convert each menu and submenu number used to arrive at the
Departmental Income Statement into a 2-digit number, so the file name becomes 020801. As this is
your first custom report in this location, add 01 to the end. The full name of the file becomes
02080101.rpf.
Some windows in Sage 100 Contractor are not located under two submenus. To indicate the correct
report path, add two zeros in the report name to represent the last submenu. For example, you create a
new income statement and want to access it from 2-3 Income Statement. The numbers representing
the location become 0203. Because you need six numbers to represent the menu location, add two
zeros. The file name then becomes 020300. As this is your first custom report in this location, add 01 to
the end. The full name of the file becomes 02030001.rpf.
Report Printing
About report printing
Clicking the Print Records button on many Sage 100 Contractor windows opens a Report Printing window
that is pre-loaded with reports specific to the area in which you are working. For example, if you are working in
Product Overview 175
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
3-2 Receivable Invoices/Credits, Sage 100 Contractor opens 3-2 Report Printing.
Report Printing window toolbar
The toolbar buttons in the Report Printing window provide versatile tools for working with reports. From right
to left:
Send report to the selected printer sends the selected report to the default printer or the printer you
select from the printer selection drop-down menu.
Preview report on screen opens the selected report in print preview mode with drill-down functionality
(when available).
Send report data to Excel opens the report in an Excel worksheet.
Send report to Word sends the report to an Export to File window. Click Save to open the report in
Word as an RTF file.
The default Save in folder is the Reports folder under the company folder.
Create a PDF file of this report sends the report to an Export to File window. Click Save to open the
report in Adobe Reader as a PDF file. The default Save in folder is the Reports folder under the
company folder.
Send report as an Outlook email attachment launches Outlook with the report attached to an email
message as a PDF file.
Email this report opens the Email Distribution window which provides the means to send a message
through Sage 100 Contractor email functionality.
Fax this report opens the Fax Distribution window which provides the means to send a fax through
Sage 100 Contractor faxing functionality. (Requires an installed fax/modem)
Schedule this report opens the Report Scheduling window, which provides the means for you to
schedule sending the selected report.
NOTE: This button is not available in the 13-4 Report Printing window.
Set the print orientation to landscape or portrait becomes available when printing graphs or charts.
Enter notes for this record opens the Notes window and, if the form design contains the field for
inserting a note, the text of the note is inserted in the selected report.
Enter a new record clears the selection criteria and resets the form design to the saved default.
NOTES:
Printing reports on legal-sized paper is a special condition.
Printing Gantt charts works differently than other report printing. For example, you must select a
form design with either portrait or landscape orientation. Paper size and the size of the detail section
do not matter because the program takes the selected form design elements and resizes them to fit
the size of the selected printer page size.
Selection criteria and form designs
In the Report Printing window, you can select which report design is printed. Using the selection criteria, you
can narrow the scope of a report to provide only the information you need. In addition, you can make changes
176 Sage 100 Contractor
Report Scheduling
to a report before printing it.
Report printing allows you to set up printer defaults. Most windows from which you can print have a dedicated
Report Printing window. Suppose that you have two printers: a tractor feed printer that is used to only print
checks and a laser printer that is used to print all other documents. In the Report Printing window from which
you print general ledger checks, you can set the dot matrix printer as the default.
IMPORTANT: Scheduling reports to email, fax, or print will not work if the company data is opened
exclusively. If you have a question, you may review the file SARAEventLog.txt found in \Program
Files (or Program Files (x86))\Sage\Sage 100 Contractor to see if a scheduled report has been sent
or not and if the company was “opened for exclusive access by another user.”
To print a legal-sized PDF or RTF report:
1 From the printers drop-down list, select either Sage 100 Contractor RTF Export or Sage 100 Contractor
SagePDF Export.
2 From the Size drop-down list, select Legal.
3 On the toolbar, click the Print records button.
NOTE: To avoid truncating the 2-3-0-34 Income Statement~All Periods report, you must print it on
legal-sized paper. One-click printing using the Create a PDF file of this report button does not print on
legal-sized paper, even if you select this paper size, because one-click buttons use the default printer’s
default settings, which are typically set to letter-sized paper.
Printing reports to screen—print preview
You can preview reports before you print them by clicking the Preview report on screen button. It is located
on each report printing window on the toolbar in the upper right. It is indicated by the button displaying a
magnifying glass.
Viewing reports in print preview also provides the platform for drilling down into report information. When you
are viewing a report in print preview and if there is drillable information on that report page, your cursor
becomes a magnifying glass. When the lens displays a red circle, you can double-click the row or field to drill
down to the details of the report information.
Report Scheduling
About report scheduling
The Report Scheduling window is a powerful tool that lets you control and manage the flow of your messaging
and information directly to your vendors, clients, and employees. You can open the Report Scheduling
window from any Report Printing window (except the 13-4 Report Printing window) by clicking File >
Scheduling. You use it to:
Schedule a report to print at a specific time and at a given frequency.
Specify the output options for the report (print, fax, or email).
Product Overview 177
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
Determine to whom it should be sent.
Other features provide a way to send reports and messages to people other than those on your distribution
lists.
TIP: Although you cannot schedule custom reports using the 13-4 Report Printing window, if you save
custom reports using the standard eight-number format for Sage 100 Contractor reports, you can print
and schedule custom reports using an associated window. For example, if you create a custom
Employee List report, saving the report as 05010103, the report appears in the 5-1-1 Report Printing
window as report 03-Employee List, and it is available for scheduling.
You use the Output Options to specify how to send the report:
Select the Printer check box to send the report to a printer or a file. To edit your printer settings, you click
the Edit Printer Settings button that becomes available when you select the check box.
Select the Fax check box to fax the report. To edit your fax settings, you click the Edit Fax Settings
button.
Select the Email check box to attach the report to an email message. To edit your email settings, you
click the Edit Email Settings button.
You use the Frequency Options to specify when to generate the report, including:
A time of day in the Time of Day box.
Whether to print the report daily, weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly.
If you select Weekly or Bi-weekly as the frequency, you also select which day(s) of the week that you
want the report to run.
If you select Monthly as the frequency, you also specify the day each month that you want the report to
run.
You use the Recurrence Options to specify when to stop printing the report. You can print the report:
A specified number of times.
Until a specified date.
Until the schedule is deleted.
You use the Windows Authentication boxes to enter the Windows User ID and Windows Password.
CAUTION: You must enter a valid Windows User ID and Windows Password as set up for your
business in your user profile. If you do not enter a valid password, the scheduled report will not run.
Moreover, you will not receive any notification that the report failed due to an invalid or missing
password. Also, if you change your password, you must reschedule any previously scheduled reports
using your Windows User ID and your new Windows Password.
You use the Message for Email / Fax boxes to enter a subject line and message for emailing and faxing
reports.
You can use the 7-7 Scheduled Reports Manager window to:
View or edit your scheduled reports.
View information about your scheduled reports each time a scheduled report, fax, or email message is
sent.
178 Sage 100 Contractor
Report Scheduling
Emailing and Faxing Reports
Using the faxing functionality through the Sage 100 Contractor program requires:
Installation of the Windows operating system Fax Service component
A separate installation and setup of a fax modem in your workstation
Access to an analog phone line.
In addition, you will also have to set up the cover page information and the number of times that the fax re-tries
to send.
For more information about installing and setting up your fax modem, refer to the documentation that came
with your fax modem. Sage 100 Contractor does not provide support for installing or setting up a fax modem.
For more information about installing the Window operating system Fax Service component, see Installing the
Window Fax Services component.
Upgrade to the latest version of Adobe Reader
Adobe Reader supports faxing from Windows. To fax from Sage 100 Contractor, you should download and
install the latest version from http://get.adobe.com/reader/.
Disengage automatic updating for Adobe Reader
If you are using the scheduling capability for sending faxes, we recommend that you disengage the automatic
“check for updates” capability of Acrobat Reader as it will prevent scheduled reports from completing.
NOTE: Instructions disengaging automatic “check for updates” differ from version to version of Adobe
Reader. Refer to the Adobe Reader Help for instructions.
Report Scheduling and Email Functionality
IMPORTANT: Using the email capability of Sage 100 Contractor requires Microsoft Outlook or access
to a simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP) email server.
The Email Settings window provides a way for you to set up email. You can change the selections to
accommodate different emailing preferences.
You can access the Email Settings window through:
Any Report Printing window by clicking the Email button on the toolbar to open the Email Distribution
windows. Then, click the Email Settings button to open the Email Settings window.
7-9 Alerts Manager
Click on Settings in the Dispatch Board, then click on Email Setup.
Product Overview 179
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
Sage 100 Contractor and SMTP
IMPORTANT: The SMTP server may be located on your workstation PC, on a server on your
company’s network, or at your Internet service provider (ISP). If the email server is local, you may need
the assistance of an IT professional to properly identify or set up this capability. If the email server is
located at your ISP, you may need contact your ISP for assistance.
Using the ISP’s simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP) server to send email via Sage 100 Contractor typically
requires “user authentication” at the STMP server. An example of an SMTP email server name is
smtp.att.sbcglobal.net.
Different ISPs may use different terms when referring to user authentication. In general, however, user
authentication means verifying a user’s identity by means of a “user name” and “password.”
In the context of sending email through Sage 100 Contractor using an ISP’s SMTP server, user authentication
only refers to verifying the user’s identity at the ISP’s SMTP server. It does not refer to your:
Sage 100 Contractor user name and password
Network domain user name and password
Windows system user name and password.
NOTE: We do not provide support for setting up or installing an email server. You set up user
authentication and your fax line access dial out number on 7-2 Company Information.
About setting up emailing and faxing through Sage 100 Contractor
Using the faxing functionality through the Sage 100 Contractor program requires:
Installation of the Windows operating system Fax Service component
A separate installation and setup of a fax modem in your workstation
Access to an analog phone line.
In addition, you will also have to set up the cover page information and the number of times that the fax re-tries
to send.
For more information about installing and setting up your fax modem, refer to the documentation that came
with your fax modem. Sage 100 Contractor does not provide support for installing or setting up a fax modem.
For more information about installing the Windows operating system Fax Service component, see Installing
the Window Fax Services component.
Upgrade to the latest version of Adobe Reader
Adobe Reader supports faxing from Windows. To fax from Sage 100 Contractor, you should download and
install the latest version from http://get.adobe.com/reader/.
180 Sage 100 Contractor
Report Scheduling
Disable automatic updating for Adobe Reader
If you are using the scheduling capability for sending faxes, we recommend that you disable the automatic
“check for updates” capability of Acrobat Reader as it will prevent scheduled reports from completing.
NOTE: Instructions for disabling automatic “check for updates” differ from version to version of Adobe
Reader. Refer to the Adobe Reader Help for instructions.
Report Scheduling and Email Functionality
IMPORTANT: Using the email capability of Sage 100 Contractor requires Microsoft Outlook or access
to a simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP) email server.
The Email Settings window provides a way for you to set up email. You can change the selections to
accommodate different emailing preferences.
You can access the Email Settings window through:
Any Report Printing window by clicking the Email button on the toolbar to open the Email Distribution
windows. Then, click the Email Settings button to open the Email Settings window.
7-9 Alerts Manager
Click on Settings in the Dispatch Board, then click on Email Setup.
Sage 100 Contractor and SMTP
IMPORTANT: The SMTP server may be located on your workstation PC, on a server on your
company’s network, or at your Internet service provider (ISP). If the email server is local, you may need
the assistance of an IT professional to properly identify or set up this capability. If the email server is
located at your ISP, you may need contact your ISP for assistance.
Using the ISP’s simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP) server to send email via Sage 100 Contractor typically
requires “user authentication” at the STMP server. An example of an SMTP email server name is
smtp.att.sbcglobal.net.
Different ISPs may use different terms when referring to user authentication. In general, however, user
authentication means verifying a user’s identity by means of a “user name” and “password.”
In the context of sending email through Sage 100 Contractor using an ISP’s SMTP server, user authentication
only refers to verifying the user’s identity at the ISP’s SMTP server. It does not refer to your:
Sage 100 Contractor user name and password
Network domain user name and password
Windows system user name and password.
NOTE: We do not provide support for setting up or installing an email server. You set up user
authentication and your fax line access dial out number on 7-2 Company Information.
Installing the Windows Fax Services component
To fax from Sage 100 Contractor, you must install the Windows Fax Services component:
Product Overview 181
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
Vista:
1. Click Start > Control Panel > Programs > Turn Windows features on or off.
2. On the Windows Features window, locate the Windows fax and scan check box, then select it.
3. Click [OK].
Windows 7:
1. Click Start > Control Panel > Programs > Turn Windows features on or off.
2. On the Windows Features window, locate Print and Document Services, then click the Windows
fax and scan check box.
3. Click [OK].
Windows 8:
1. Click Start > All apps > Control Panel > Programs > Turn Windows features on or off.
2. On the Windows Features window, locate Print and Document Services, then click the Windows
fax and scan check box.
3. Click [OK].
Windows Server 2012
Detailed information from Microsoft
About fax line access selection
The Fax Line Access Selection window provides a way for you to set up an alternate dialout number to
access an outside phone line. You can change the selections to accommodate different dialing preferences
for a computer in another location.
You can access the Fax Line Access Selection window through any Report Printing window by clicking
the Fax button on the toolbar to open the Fax Distribution window. Click the Change button to open the Fax
Line Access Selection window.
When Fax using the company default dial out number is selected, line access selections default from the
setting on 7-2 Company Information. When you set up and choose Fax using this alternate dial out
number, then Sage 100 Contractor uses this setup for line selection.
About fax distribution lists
Fax distribution lists allow you to select contacts from your client, vendor, or employee records, which appear
in folders in the Fax Distribution window under Contacts. For fax contacts to appear in the folders, each
category of contact—client, vendor, or employee—must have a fax number entered in 3-6 Receivable
Clients, 4-4 Vendors, or 5-2-1 Employees.
If you have scheduled messages to be sent at a certain time, the messages will be faxed to the contacts for
each scheduled occurrence.
182 Sage 100 Contractor
Exporting Data to Microsoft Excel
You can access the Fax Distribution window through any report printing window by clicking the Fax this
report button on the toolbar.
NOTE: If there is no fax contact information entered in 3-6 Receivable Clients, 4-4 Vendors, or 5-2-1
Employees, a message will display indicating that there are no records containing the appropriate
information.
Exporting Data to Microsoft Excel
You may need to get data out of a Sage 100 Contractor report, Quick Report, Quick Grid, or Find query and
into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet so that you can add to or reorder the data or combine data from different
reports into one document.
In some situations, a grid may be displaying too many columns to be viewed in the Print to screen viewer or
to be printed, even in landscape orientation. It is just situations that exporting to Microsoft Excel provides a
solution. Microsoft Excel has the capability to capture all the data on any grid in Sage 100 Contractor.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not have access rights to any data included in the export action, you are notified and no export
file is created.
If support for Microsoft Excel Object Library is not present on the machine that initiates the export action,
you are notified and no further actions are performed.
The exported data includes the following information:
Company name
Report title (grid or query name)
Selection criteria
Column headers
Labels
Data
Formulas
User name
Report number (for example, 3-5-0-21)
Date and time
The exported data excludes the following information:
Graphics, lines, double lines, boxes
Pagination
Checks
To export report data to Excel
1 From a main window, for example 4-2 Payable Invoices, on the toolbar, click the Print Records button.
Product Overview 183
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
2 The Report Printing window opens.
3 Select a report that you want to export to Excel.
4 Click the Send report data to Excel button.
5 Your computer launches Excel with a new worksheet populated with the report data.
To export Quick Grid data to Excel
1 Open a Quick Grid window.
2 On the toolbar, click the Print Records button.
3 The Report Printing window opens.
4 Click the Send report data to Excel button.
5 Your computer launches Excel with a new worksheet populated with the quick grid data.
To export Find query data to Excel
1 Open a window that supports Find queries.
2 The Query List window opens.
3 Select a query, and click Run.
4 The Run Query window opens.
5 Enter criteria, and click Run.
6 Your computer displays a quick grid populated with the query data.
7 On the toolbar, click the Print Records button.
8 The Report Printing window opens.
9 Click the Send report data to Excel button.
10 Your computer launches Excel with a new worksheet populated with the selected data.
About exporting to Microsoft Excel
You may need to get data out of a Sage 100 Contractor report, Quick Report, Quick Grid, or Find query and
into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet so that you can add to or reorder the data or combine data from different
reports into one document.
In some situations, a grid may be displaying too many columns to be viewed in the Print to screen viewer or
to be printed, even in landscape orientation. It is just situations that exporting to Microsoft Excel provides a
solution. Microsoft Excel has the capability to capture all the data on any grid in Sage 100 Contractor.
184 Sage 100 Contractor
Financial Review
IMPORTANT: If you do not have access rights to any data included in the export action, you are
notified and no export file is created.
IMPORTANT: If support for Microsoft Excel Object Library is not present on the machine that initiates
the export action, you are notified and no further actions are performed.
The exported data includes the following information:
Company name
Report title (grid or query name)
Selection criteria
Column headers
Labels
Data
Formulas
User name
Report number (for example, 3-5-0-21)
Date and time
The exported data excludes the following information:
Graphics, lines, double lines, boxes
Pagination
Checks
Financial Review
About financial review
At times, financial information is easier to understand when presented in the form of a chart. Sage 100
Contractor can generate charts for you from data in the ledger accounts of the active company. You can then
use the charts to review and analyze trends in your company.
You can generate charts on financial data from the current fiscal year, or as a comparison between the current
and last fiscal year, for 12 rolling months, or as a comparison between the budgeted costs and actual costs. In
addition, you can create line, area, 2-dimensional bar charts, and 3-dimensional bar charts.
After generating a chart, you can print it, save it to file, or copy it to the clipboard so that you can paste the
chart in another report or document.
NOTE: On 13-1 Financial Review, when viewing charts, be aware that Mean, Standard Deviation,
and Best Fit do not display with bar charts. The statistical methods display as expected only with line
and area charts. When working with these statistical methods, select Format > Line or Area, and then
select Statistics > Mean, Standard Deviation, or Best Fit.
Product Overview 185
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
Financial review—Ratios
Sage 100 Contractor uses the ledger account balances to create the ratio for a fiscal period. Use the ratios to
identify long term trends or potential problems.
The list uses standard math symbols, plus (+), minus
(–), multiplied by (*), and divided by (/).
The following list provides definitions of menu items under 13-1 Financial Review > Ratio:
Current Ratio—Measures the relationship between the current assets and current liabilities.
Definition of Current Ratio: Current Assets/Current Liabilities by fiscal period.
Quick Ratio—Measures the relationship of liquid assets to current liabilities, indicating the short-term
debt paying ability.
Definition of Quick Ratio: (Current Assets – Inventory)/Current Liabilities by fiscal period.
Gross Profit/Sales—Measures the relationship between gross profit and sales dollars.
Definition of Gross Profit/Sales: (Gross Profit + Other Income)/(Total Operating Income +Other
Income) by fiscal period)
Net Profit/Sales - Measures the relationship between net profit and sales dollars.
Definition of Net Profit/Sales: Net Income Before Tax/ (Total Operating Income + Other Income) by
fiscal period.
Net Profit/Equity—Measures the amount of income earned for each dollar invested.
Definition of Net Profit: (Operating Income + Other Income) – (Direct Expense + Equip/Shop Expense +
Overhead Expense + Admin Expense).
Definition of Equity: (Equity + Operating Income + Other Income) – (Direct Expense + Equip/Shop
Expense + Overhead Expense + Admin Expense). Note: The Equity amount excludes Owner’s Draw
accounts.
Current Assets/Total Assets—Measures the relationship between the short-term assets and long-term
assets.
Definition of Current Assets: Cash + Current Assets + WIP.
Definition of Total Assets: Cash + Current Assets + Wip + Other Assets + Fixed Assets –
Accum.Depreciation.
Return on Assets—Measures the earning power or the profitability of a company’s assets.
Definition of Return on Assets: Total Income—Direct + Shop/Equip + Overhead + Admin Expense /
Cash + Current Assets + Wip—Accum. Depreciation.
Debt/Worth - Measures the relationship of debt financing to equity financing, or how much a company is
leveraged.
Definition of Debt: Total liabilities.
Definition of Worth: Equity + Total Income—(Direct + Shop/Equip + Overhead + Admin Expense).
Debt/Assets—Measures the percentage of total assets represented by liabilities.
Definition of Debt: Total liabilities.
Definition of Assets: Cash + Current Assets + Wip + Other Assets + Fixed Assets—Accum.
Depreciation.
186 Sage 100 Contractor
Financial Review
Overhead/Direct Expense—Measures the relationship of overhead expenses to job expenses. Total
Indirect Expense/Total Direct Expense.
Definition of Indirect Expense: Overhead + Administrative Expenses.
Definition of Direct Expense: Direct +Equipment + Shop Expenses
Financial Review—Trends
Sage 100 Contractor uses the ledger account balances to graph financial trends.
The list uses standard math symbols, plus (+), minus
(–), multiplied by (*), and divided by (/).
The following list provides definitions of menu items under 13-1 Financial Review > Trends:
Cash—Charts the balances for all accounts in the cash range by fiscal period.
Compares to the 2-4-21 General Ledger report by cash account range and period.
A/R—Charts the Accounts Receivable balance by fiscal period.
Compares to the dedicated Accounts Receivable account in 1-7 General Ledger Accounts.
A/P—Charts the Trade Accounts Payable balance by fiscal period.
Compares to the dedicated Accounts Payable account in 1-7 General Ledger Accounts.
Sales—Charts the total income.
Compare to the Income Statement by period for the Operating Income balance + Other Income balance.
Budget numbers by period: compare to menu 1-7 General Ledger Accounts income accounts budgets.
Gross Profit—Charts the Gross Profit + Other Income by fiscal period.
Compare to the Gross Profit + Other Income from Income Statement by period.
Definition of Gross Profit: Operating Income – (Direct Expense + Equip/Shop Expense).
Net Profit—Charts the Net Income before Tax by fiscal period.
Compare to the Net Income Before Tax on the Income Statement by period.
Definition of Net Income: Operating Income + Other Income – Direct & Indirect Expenses.
Breakeven Point—Charts all Expenses by fiscal period.
Compare to the Total Direct & Equip/Shop Expenses + Total Indirect Expenses on the Income
Statement by period.
Working Capital—Charts Current Assets – Current Liabilities by fiscal period. This trend is often used
to secure a line of credit.
Compare to the Balance Sheet by fiscal period.
Budget comes from all current assets and liabilities accounts in menu 1-7 General Ledger Accounts.
Financial Review—Statistics
When generating charts, you can use one of the statistical methods provided:
Mean: Calculation derived from the sum of a list of numbers divided by the total number of numbers in a
list.
Product Overview 187
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
Standard Deviation: Calculation indicating how spread out numbers are from the mean.
Best Fit: Calculation showing a trend line indicated by the values in a series.
On 13-1 Financial Review, when viewing charts, be
aware that Mean, Standard Deviation, and Best Fit
do not display with bar charts. The statistical methods
display as expected only with line and area charts.
When working with these statistical methods, select
Format > Line or Area, and then select Statistics >
Mean, Standard Deviation, or Best Fit.
Financial review—Ratios
Sage 100 Contractor uses the ledger account balances to create the ratio for a fiscal period. Use the ratios to
identify long term trends or potential problems.
The list uses standard math symbols, plus (+), minus
(–), multiplied by (*), and divided by (/).
The following list provides definitions of menu items under 13-1 Financial Review > Ratio:
Current Ratio—Measures the relationship between the current assets and current liabilities.
Definition of Current Ratio: Current Assets/Current Liabilities by fiscal period.
Quick Ratio—Measures the relationship of liquid assets to current liabilities, indicating the short-term
debt paying ability.
Definition of Quick Ratio: (Current Assets – Inventory)/Current Liabilities by fiscal period.
Gross Profit/Sales—Measures the relationship between gross profit and sales dollars.
Definition of Gross Profit/Sales: (Gross Profit + Other Income)/(Total Operating Income +Other
Income) by fiscal period)
Net Profit/Sales - Measures the relationship between net profit and sales dollars.
Definition of Net Profit/Sales: Net Income Before Tax/ (Total Operating Income + Other Income) by
fiscal period.
Net Profit/Equity—Measures the amount of income earned for each dollar invested.
Definition of Net Profit: (Operating Income + Other Income) – (Direct Expense + Equip/Shop Expense +
Overhead Expense + Admin Expense).
Definition of Equity: (Equity + Operating Income + Other Income) – (Direct Expense + Equip/Shop
Expense + Overhead Expense + Admin Expense). Note: The Equity amount excludes Owner’s Draw
accounts.
Current Assets/Total Assets—Measures the relationship between the short-term assets and long-term
assets.
Definition of Current Assets: Cash + Current Assets + WIP.
Definition of Total Assets: Cash + Current Assets + Wip + Other Assets + Fixed Assets –
Accum.Depreciation.
188 Sage 100 Contractor
Financial Review
Return on Assets—Measures the earning power or the profitability of a company’s assets.
Definition of Return on Assets: Total Income—Direct + Shop/Equip + Overhead + Admin Expense /
Cash + Current Assets + Wip—Accum. Depreciation.
Debt/Worth - Measures the relationship of debt financing to equity financing, or how much a company is
leveraged.
Definition of Debt: Total liabilities.
Definition of Worth: Equity + Total Income—(Direct + Shop/Equip + Overhead + Admin Expense).
Debt/Assets—Measures the percentage of total assets represented by liabilities.
Definition of Debt: Total liabilities.
Definition of Assets: Cash + Current Assets + Wip + Other Assets + Fixed Assets—Accum.
Depreciation.
Overhead/Direct Expense—Measures the relationship of overhead expenses to job expenses. Total
Indirect Expense/Total Direct Expense.
Definition of Indirect Expense: Overhead + Administrative Expenses.
Definition of Direct Expense: Direct +Equipment + Shop Expenses
Financial Review—Trends
Sage 100 Contractor uses the ledger account balances to graph financial trends.
The list uses standard math symbols, plus (+), minus
(–), multiplied by (*), and divided by (/).
The following list provides definitions of menu items under 13-1 Financial Review > Trends:
Cash—Charts the balances for all accounts in the cash range by fiscal period.
Compares to the 2-4-21 General Ledger report by cash account range and period.
A/R—Charts the Accounts Receivable balance by fiscal period.
Compares to the dedicated Accounts Receivable account in 1-7 General Ledger Accounts.
A/P—Charts the Trade Accounts Payable balance by fiscal period.
Compares to the dedicated Accounts Payable account in 1-7 General Ledger Accounts.
Sales—Charts the total income.
Compare to the Income Statement by period for the Operating Income balance + Other Income balance.
Budget numbers by period: compare to menu 1-7 General Ledger Accounts income accounts budgets.
Gross Profit—Charts the Gross Profit + Other Income by fiscal period.
Compare to the Gross Profit + Other Income from Income Statement by period.
Definition of Gross Profit: Operating Income – (Direct Expense + Equip/Shop Expense).
Net Profit—Charts the Net Income before Tax by fiscal period.
Compare to the Net Income Before Tax on the Income Statement by period.
Definition of Net Income: Operating Income + Other Income – Direct & Indirect Expenses.
Breakeven Point—Charts all Expenses by fiscal period.
Compare to the Total Direct & Equip/Shop Expenses + Total Indirect Expenses on the Income
Statement by period.
Product Overview 189
Chapter 8: Reviewing and Reporting
Working Capital—Charts Current Assets – Current Liabilities by fiscal period. This trend is often used
to secure a line of credit.
Compare to the Balance Sheet by fiscal period.
Budget comes from all current assets and liabilities accounts in menu 1-7 General Ledger Accounts.
Financial Review—Statistics
When generating charts, you can use one of the statistical methods provided:
Mean: Calculation derived from the sum of a list of numbers divided by the total number of numbers in a
list.
Standard Deviation: Calculation indicating how spread out numbers are from the mean.
Best Fit: Calculation showing a trend line indicated by the values in a series.
On 13-1 Financial Review, when viewing charts, be
aware that Mean, Standard Deviation, and Best Fit
do not display with bar charts. The statistical methods
display as expected only with line and area charts.
When working with these statistical methods, select
Format > Line or Area, and then select Statistics >
Mean, Standard Deviation, or Best Fit.
Project Review
About project reviews
At times, project information is easier to understand when presented in the form of a chart. Sage 100
Contractor can generate charts for you from several sources. You can then use the charts to review and
analyze trends in your company. You can create several different types of graphs, such as line, area, 2dimensional bar charts, and 3-dimensional bar charts. After generating a chart, you can print it, save it to file,
or copy it to the clipboard so that you can paste the chart in another report or document.
Using the Graph option in 13-2 Project Review, you can generate graphs to analyze the following:
Cost/Budget by Type
Budget = Job budget + approved budget change orders by cost type.
Cost = Job costs by cost type. (Note that you use the job cost journal by cost type).
Cost/Budget by Code displays job budget + approved budget change orders by cost code.
Budget = Job budget plus approved budget change orders by cost code.
Cost = Job costs by cost code (Note that you use the job cost journal by cost code).
Over/Under by Code
Over = Over budget amount by code with positive number above zero.
Under = Under budget amount by code with negative number below zero.
Gross Profit % by Job displays (A/R invoices – job costs) / A/R invoices.
190 Sage 100 Contractor
Project Review
Gross Profit $ by Job displays A/R invoices – job costs.
Cash Flow displays A/R invoices – job costs by week. (Note that one week = 7 days).
Product Overview 191
Index
add-on modules
1
1099 forms
about 7
advance fiscal year
what happens in the program 39
about 90
advances 98
types 90
about 98
vendor 90
alert notifications 165
A
Aatrix
Attachments
about 143
federal and state reports 121
attach Web links 145
integration 121
drag and drop files 143
registration 123
functionality 143
access rights
network files 145
supervisor 17-18
parent-child 144
window and menu-level security 19
printing 146
account
clearing 32
suspense 33-34
accounting
accounts receivable 45
accounts payable
features 69
uses 143
audit
errors
about 40
audit books
about window 40
audit history 42
percentage complete accounting 72
accounts receivable
statements 51
ACH
about 103
B
balances
customer 163
bank reconciliation
about 36
Product Overview 193
Index
errors
C
about 37
calculation types
common 37
1-Deduct from Employee 110
transactions
2-Add to Gross 112
clearing outstanding 37
3-Employer Cost 112
batches
4-Add-Deduct 113
invoices
5-Accrued Hours 114
changing numbers 89
calculations
totals 90
adding 109
viewing entry lists 89
creating standard 106
viewing prior lists 89
defaults 115
bid items
in employee records 101, 109
examples of 61
in payroll records
billing
about 95
top customers 163
pre-built standard 106
bonus checks 100
prevailing-wage jobs
bonuses 100
and non-union shops 95
about 100
setup 107
budget
taxes
Budgeted Expenses 159
tables 110
versus Actual Expense 159
types 110
versus Actual Income 159
Cash Accounts
budgets
Dashboard 158
about 129
Cash Position
effect of change orders on 133
Dashboard 158
194 Sage 100 Contractor
Index
cash receipts 55
transferring funds among
receivable
about 55
certificates and licenses
vendor 79
change orders
about 131
about 30
hand-computed 100
joint 84
payroll
bonus 100
hand-computed 100
about subcontract change order 135
printing vendor 76
automatic numbering 135
two-party 84
effect on budgets and proposals 133
entering
about 134
outstanding 164
upgrade option 131
change period
about window 39
chart of accounts
pre-built 22, 24
ranges 27
check transmittals
report 76
checks
and bank charges 29
bonus 100
checking accounts
classes
lumber
board footage 153-154
clearing account 32
entering transfers 32
clearing accounts
about 31, 34
concepts
accounting-related
department 28
contact manager 148
controlling accounts
about 27
and subsidiary accounts 28
correspondence
about 147
entering direct transfers 33
Product Overview 195
Index
cost code
numbering systems
about 137
cost codes 153-154
cost codes and divisions
about 136
customer support
knowledgebase 4
customers
contract 163
cycle
symbols 186-189
cost to complete
about 140
cost type 164
job costs 164
costs
D
Dashboard 158-165
about 155
Budget vs. Actual Expense 159
Budget vs. Actual Income 159
codes
for general contractors 138
for subcontractors 138
jobs
about 130
salaried employees 99
credit card
pay 73
Credit Card Accounts
Dashboard 161
credits
payable
about 70
receivable
about 48-49
recalculating 49
196 Sage 100 Contractor
Budgeted Expenses 159
Cash Accounts 158
Cash Position 158
Credit Card Accounts 161
Department Budget vs. Actual Expense 159
Department Budget vs. Actual Income 159
Department Income and Expenses 159
Expiring Vendor Discounts 161
Income and Expenses 159
Income from Operations 158
Job Contract, Budget, and Costs to Date 164
Job Costs by Cost Type 164
Job Uncommitted Budget 165
Outstanding Change Orders 164
Payable Retention by Job 165
Payables 91, 160
Index
Payables Aging 160
Previous Year Expense Comparison 159
details
accounting
Previous Year Income Comparison 159
general contractor 24
Receivable Retention 165
home builder 24
Receivables 161
remodeler 24
Receivables Aging 162
subcontractor 24
security 156
direct deposit
Service Receivables Aging 162
about 103
Today's Job Tasks 165
file 103
Tomorrow's Job Tasks 165
information options
Top Customers by $ Owed 163
Top Customers by Billing 163
Top Customers by Contract 163
Top Service Customers 163
Top Vendors 161
Under-billed Jobs 163
Davis-Bacon Act 95
account type 22
setup 104
direct deposit report
reprint 103
document control
features 142
documentation
dedicated accounts 26
conventions 10
department
Help navigation 2
income and expenses 159
departments 28, 153-154, 159
about 28
deposits
note styles and meaning 11
using Help 2
drill down
cash accounts 158
and interest 30
cash position 158
on jobs 30
Dashboard 155
income from operations 158
outstanding change orders 164
Product Overview 197
Index
payables 91, 160
comparison 159
receivables 161
expiring
single contact record 148
under-billed jobs 163
E
electronic receipts
vendor discounts 161
exporting
about 141
to Microsoft Excel
about 183-184
receivable
F
about 56
employee license
track 147
employee loans 98
employee positions
about 119
employee training
track 147
fax line access selection 182
fax service component
Windows 181
features
accounts payable 69
add-on modules 7
document control 142
employees
payroll 93
records
utilities 13
about 94
salaried
job costing 99
equipment
records 147
federal tax 122
field properties
locked fields 16
fields
about 173
Excel 183-184
locked 16
exclusive access
properties
about 19
expenses
budgeted 159
198 Sage 100 Contractor
about 16
setup 17
Index
financial and project reviews
G
project reviews 190
GAAP-standard reports 151, 153
financial review 185, 188-190
general ledger
financial reviews
deposits
ratios 186, 188
on jobs 30
Financial Reviews
ledger accounts
trends 187, 189
about 21
fiscal year-end
setup
and posting periods 24
about 24
flat rate 53
considerations 23
entering retention 53
glossary
form designs 173
margin 169
13-5 Form-Report Page Design 166
task 153, 155
assigning reports to 174
guides
creating
printing 2
using existing forms 166
printing
editing
guides 10
existing 167
Sage 100 Contractor and Your Business 1
pages
User Guide 1
about format 173
H
previewing 168
reducing display size 168
setting object properties 168
hand-computed checks 100
about 100
format 169
Help 2, 6
forms
hours to complete
check 7
about 140
tax 7
Product Overview 199
Index
I
job cost distribution 131
job costs
importing
about reconciling 130
about 141
jobs
income
change retention 52
comparison 159
costs
install
about 130
component
salaried employees 99
documentation 1
progress billing 64
insurance 112
releasing retention 53
invoices
joint checks 82, 84-85
payable
journal transactions
about 70
about 34
credit 70, 92
recurring 35, 91
purchase order sales tax 71
L
release retention 88
ledger accounts
use taxes 71
Workers’ Compensation costs 80
about 21
account ranges 27
receivable
creating based on contract balance 48
clearing 31, 34
entering 46
controlling 27
recalculating 49
departments 28
status 45
numbering 22
types 46
posting
payable invoices 73
voiding 47
J
pre-built chart of accounts 22, 24
renaming 22
job cost 131
starting balances 26
200 Sage 100 Contractor
Index
subsidiary 22, 28
Per Hour (all hours) 115
summary 22
Per Hour (regular hours only) 115
ledger balances 41
Per Pay Period 115
liability 113
Percent Disposable Income (net) 115
lien waivers
Percent Gross + Paygroup Benefits 114
about 77
Percent Gross Pay (unadjusted) 114
printing 77
Percent Other Calculation 115
report 76
Percent Regular Pay (all hours) 115
loan draws
Percent Regular Pay (regular hours only) 114
about 64
Percent Total Taxable Wages 114
local payroll taxes
Regular/Overtime/Premium (0*, 1*, 1*) 115
about 120
Regular/Overtime/Premium (0*, 1.5*, 2*) 115
locked
Regular/Overtime/Premium (1*, 1.5*, 1.5*)
115
check box 16
Regular/Overtime/Premium (1*, 1.5*, 2*) 115
columns 16
Regular/Overtime/Premium (1*, 2*, 2*) 115
fields 16
Tables 115
text boxes 16
Variable (manual calculation) 115
lumber
N
board footage 153-154
M
non-union shops 95
O
manage contacts 148
margin 169
menu-level security
about 18
methods
calculation 110, 112-113
objects
setting properties 168
operating system
fax service component 181
Outlook 144, 179, 181
Per Day 115
Product Overview 201
Index
P
payroll calculations
create 106
payable invoice 160
maximum only 117
paygroups 119
update calculations 117
benefits 113
percentage complete accounting 72
payments
plan records
by voucher 78
about 147
vendor
tracking 147
printing checks 76
posting
reports 76
payroll 104
payroll
about 104
advances 98
periods
bonuses 100
about 24
calculations
period 0 archive 29
types 110
pre-built chart of accounts 22
employee loans 98
about 24
features 93
pre-built standard payroll calculations 106
hand-computed 100
prevailing-wage jobs
paygroups 119
and non-union shops 95
posting 104
previous year 159
processing
expense comparison 159
computing records 102
income comparison 159
records
print preview
about 96
reports 177
entering 98
printing
errors 97
checks
third-party sick pay 101
vendor 76
202 Sage 100 Contractor
Index
lien waivers 77
Q
reports
quarterlies 123
about 175
Quick Reports 154
financial 188-190
R
progress billing
about 64
Project Hot List
about 128
Project Reviews
statistics 187, 190
Project Work Center
about 126
job contact and financial information 127
properties
setting for objects 168
proposals
about 141
creating 141
recalculate 41, 54
Recalculate Balances 41
records 147
recurring journal transactions
about 35
examples of 35
recurring payables
about 91
recurring receivables
about 66
releasing retention
for jobs 53
removing
effect of change orders on 133
closed purchase orders 139
exporting and importing 141
paid and void invoices 70
punch lists
about 147
purchase orders
about 138
master
about 139
repairing balances 41
report
direct deposit 103
report printing
fax line access selection 182
report scheduling 177
sales tax on payable invoices 71
Product Overview 203
Index
Report Writer
about 174
reports 123
assigning to form designs 174
check transmittals 76
creating
shortcuts to 153
emailing and faxing
fax distribution lists 182
faxing and emailing
requests for information
about 146
requests for proposal
about 142
retention 165
by job 165
change for jobs 52
entering as a flat rate 53
flat-rate 53
payable
setup 179-180
about 87-88
GAAP-standard 151, 153
paying 87
lien waivers 76
releasing 88
print preview 177
receivable 165
print to screen 177
release 54, 88
printing
release and print statement 54
about 175
release for jobs 53
financial 188-190
release when complete 54
Quick Reports 154
saving and naming 175
selection criteria 150, 154
Set to Pay 76
state quarterly 123
vendor payments 76
retention rates 52
changing for jobs 52
review and reporting 149
overview 149
RFP
about 142
vendor 73
viewing
samples 152
204 Sage 100 Contractor
S
Sage 100 Contractor 1
Index
Sage CRE
cheques 7
forms 7
salaried employees
job costing 99
secondary payees
window-level
about 18
window and menu-level 19
service receivable
records 147
service receivables
about 85
aging 162
invoices
statements 51
adding to existing 84
decreasing payable amounts 85
set to pay
report 76
entering 82
simple mail transfer protocol 179, 181
increasing payable amounts 84
SMTP 179, 181
security
starting balances
access rights 19
about 26
Dashboard 156
dedicated accounts 26
features 14
state quarterly reports 123
field properties
state tax 123
about 16
setup 17
groups
about 14
menu-level
about 18
supervisor user 18
user names
about 17
statements
accounts receivable 51
statistics
Project Reviews 187, 190
subcontracts 143
about 139
Workers’ Compensation
rate setup 80
subsidiary accounts
about 28
Product Overview 205
Index
supervisor user 18
transactions
suspense
cash 55, 187, 189
accounts 33-34
transferring funds
T
task 153, 155
among checking accounts 30
entering direct transfers 33
transmittals
tasks
today 165
tomorrow 165
tax forms 122-123
federal 122-123
state 123
about 146
trends
Financial Reviews 187, 189
TUG (The Users Group) 6
two-party checks 82, 84-85
U
taxes
sales and use
on payable invoices 71
purchase order sales tax 71
tables
setup 110
templates
saving 175
The Users Group (TUG) 6
third-party sick pay
about 101
time and materials billing
about 65
training 6
getting started 6
206 Sage 100 Contractor
unitary billing
about 65
unitary proposals
about 142
units to complete
about 141
unprinted checks
find 10
upgrade
change orders 131
user-defined
cost types 164
user names
about 17
Index
users
window and menu-level security
supervisor 17-18
access rights 19
utilities
Windows
features 13
fax service component 181
overview 13
WIP
V
about 72
accounting 72
valuation methods
verification 130
about 26
Workers’ Compensation
vendor
calculations 118
payments 73
codes
vendor discounts
about 137
expiring 161
rates
vendor invoices
setup for payable invoices 80
select 74
subcontractors 119
vendors 79, 161
Y
certificates and licenses
about 79
year end
payments 75
calendar year 38
printing checks 76
year-end management 39
reports 76
select invoice to pay 74
vouchers
paying by 78
W
window-level security
about 18
Product Overview 207
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising